Home

Dell OpenManage Network Manager Version 5.0 Web Client Guide

1. Name TestServer Description IP Address 192 168 1 27 7 Choose Mediation Partition Existing Partition Name TestPartition Description Routable Domain Default Routing Entries Ra 2 192 168 1 27 24 BR wv Apply iz Test Cancel When creating a new server enter a Name Description and IP Address You can also Add Partitions or select from Existing Partitions choosing a Name Description Routable Domain and Routing Entries click the to add your entries to the list The Test button scanning the ports in the proposed application server mediation server link validating the installed versions of Dell OpenManage Network Manager in both locations are the same and validating the connection between application server and mediation server A job screen like those described in Audit Trail Jobs Screen on page 91 appears to track the progress of testing 46 Control Panel Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager The Partitions tab of the Mediation monitor displays already configured partitions and lets you edit them with an Edit this entry icon The editor screen is like the one that adds new partitions Test listed partitions with the gear icon to the right of the partition or delete it with the Delete this entry icon Search for Mediation Server The Search button in the Partitions tab of the Mediation monitor opens a screen where you can enter an address in IP to Search for
2. 11 Additional Products 00 4 11 OnlineHelp Filter 2 0 o a 12 Howto Use HowTo 002 c cece eee eens 12 Feedbackis cntatiae cal esate ROR vena he eae 13 A Note About Performance 0 c0cce cece cece eee ees 13 2 Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 15 Verv Wass ecedinc ee si ee ebeiatweedisaeresivie ds ad 15 System BaSiCS 2 20 000004 15 Single Server Sizing 0 cece cece cece eee rr 20 Sizing for Standalone Installations 0cceee eee eeee 21 Network Basics 2 22 22 Authentication 0 0 02 22 24 Supported PowerConnect Models 2 2 2 2 24 Windows Management Interface 24 Getting Started csatin eroien dra 27 Installation and Startup s s s naana nenene 28 How to Set Linux Permissions 000ceeeeeeeeees 31 Perl ox cscs deers ok A ht a ag RI AEA ce le 8 aed Beth Ga 32 Starting Web Client o o 32 Control Panel ersero Gaara a 33 Search Indexes a 34 My Account 0 a 34 RCSynergy Domain aaa 35 Portal gt Users and Organizations 35 How to Add Users and connect them to Roles 36 How to Configure Organizations 0eceeeeeeee 38 Public Private Page Behavior 40 How to Add and Configure User Roles Permissions
3. If you delete the default view and do not set a new one then the Network View defaults to its original settings CAUTION Deleting views is not confirmed The saved label appears in the title bar the next time you open the view Data Node Finder This screen offers additional topology information to help you locate specific resources within the visualization you have produced Visualize My Network Visualize 213 214 GRAPH INVENTORY This displays a legend of icon types followed by a count in parentheses of how many of each appear in the topology The switch at the bottom of this panel centers the display around the selected icon ig Control and Styles e i Data Node Finder A GRAPH INVENTORY O sss Links 15 a o Switches 22 NetgearGSM7224V2_39 10 128 4 39 NetgearSM722451 10128441 10 128 4 41 NetgearGS748TPS 10 128 4 13 4 i NetgearGSM7352Sv2 10128430 10 128 4 30 NetgearGS108Tv2_37 10 128 4 37 NetgearGS748TS 10 128 4 20 NetgearGSM7252PS 1_32 10 128 4 32 NetgearFS726T 10 128 4 22 A NetgearFS726TP 10 128 4 23 A NetgearGSM7252PS 1_9 10 128 4 9 A NetgearGSM7248V2_24 10 128 4 24 NetgearGS724Tv3 10 128 4 14 NetgearFS728TP 10 Netgear GSM7328Sv2 1 10128425 10 128 4 25 NetgearGS724TS 10 128 4 21 Center view around selected Item Search for nodes by Keyword Go Click the plus to the left of the inventory category icons to display a list of devic
4. led Save x Close This editor has General Inventory and Layout tabs You can edit any but pre existing templates whether they have reports attached to them or not Consider this example Template T has three columns A B and C Someone creates a report R against Template T executes the report saves the data as a historical report H1 Two weeks later someone modifies the Template T removing column C adding column D When executing report R against the revised Template T the report now shows columns A B and D User saves the report as historical report H2 Here H1 only has data for columns A B and C H2 has data for columns A B and D 196 Report Templates Resource Management If you view H1 you see Template T is in use and this template creates a report with columns A B and D Unfortunately H1 only has data for columns A B and C so the report created has data for columns A and B only Column D is empty When viewing H2 you can see Template T is in use and can create a report with columns A B and D H2 has data for columns A B and D so all data appears General The following are fields that appear on these screens Not all screens have all fields General Settings Name An identifier for the template Description An optional description of the template Chart Type Select from the available alternatives column line Summarize by Group Group similar results together Advanced Settings
5. 40 Portal gt Roles 0 0 0 0 o 41 Portal gt Portal Settings 41 Portales OMerli 3 cated A da ca eh cel ad 42 Redcell gt Permission Manager 42 Redcell gt DataConfiguration 2 45 Redcell gt Mediation 0 45 Redcell gt FilterManagement 48 A tae a ee ae ae ote ee Gok Ae 49 Redcell gt Database Aging Policies DAP 50 How to DAP Workflow 0c c cece cece tenets 51 Aging Policies Editor 2 2 2 2 0 52 Aging Policies Options 2 0 0 2 54 SUb PoliclES lt oo ten ay a wt ee oe od e s es a Be hs een 55 Repositories 2 2 2 2 020 2 0000 222 0004 57 Portlet Level Permissions 58 How to Configure Portlet Permissions 0 0oooo 59 How to Configure Resource Level Permissions 59 Quick Navigation 0c ccc cece nent e teenies 61 License Vie Welt de bl 62 How to Register a License ooococcoccococccccccc 63 Discovery Profiles 0 0 c cece ee eee e eee ence e ee eaee 64 How to Discover Your Network 0cceee eee eeees 64 Managed Resources 0cc eee c cece rr 66 Common Setup Tasks 0 0 ccc ec cece enean 67 SMTP Configuration 2 220040 67 Netrestore File Servers 69 3 Portal CONVENTIONS lt a a
6. 184 Equipment Details Resource Management Details This panel displays detailed information about the equipment selected This can include the following fields Serial Number The selected resource s serial number Last Configuration The date for the last backed up configuration file Change The date for the last configuration file change System Object ID The SysObjectID of the resource Operational State One of following possible values selected from a drop down menu describing the availability of the Tesource Disabled Inoperable because of a fault or resources are unavailable Enabled Operable and available for use Active Device is operable and currently in use with operating capacity available to support further ser vices Busy Operable and currently in use with no operating capacity to spare Install Date The date this equipment was installed Notes Any notes recorded about the device RTM Category The Right to Manage category for licensing DNS Hostname The DNS name of the resource this name must be unique Details Serial Number Last Configuration Change System Object Id Operational State Install Date Notes RTM Category DHS Hostname Vendor Name Hardware Version Software Version Network Status Creator Firmware Version Backup Result Manage By Hostname Model Equipment Icon Equipment Type Location Hame IP Address Discovery Date
7. 99 100 Alarms In its summary form this portlet displays alarms t Alarms Showing de All Alarms click on chart slice to filter Total Unique Alarms 100 Severity Date Openedy 91611 9 47 AM Entity Hame HB indeterminate 55 00 PB warning 37 00 Minor 2 00 Device IP HB critical 6 00 Event Name SNAKEEYES2008Partition 1 1 SNAKEEYES2008Partition 1 1 7 SNAKEEYES2008Partition 1 1 SNAKEEYES2008Partition 1 1 SNAKEEYES2008Partition 1 1 7 SNAKEEYES2008Partition 1 e The chart can act as a filter too For example clicking the Critical alarms slice means only Critical alarms appear listed Notice also that the chart explodes to highlight the selected slice Hover the 9 611 9 47 AM 91611 9 10 AM 9 611 9 10 AM 9 611 9 10 AM 9 6 11 9 03 AM na Di 2 10 20 1 80 10 20 1 80 10 20 1230 10 20 1 230 10 20 1 230 172 17 102 2 enterprises 674 10895 0 1000 enterprises 674 10895 5000 2 6132 1 1 1 0 13 enterprises 674 10895 5000 2 6132 1 1 13 0 3 enterprises 674 10895 0 740 enterprises 674 10895 5000 2 5132 1 1 13 0 4 linkDowwn cursor over a portion of the chart and a tooltip with information about that slice also appears By default the chart appears only when there are alarms See Configuring the Alarms Chart below for options available in configuring the display See Menu on page 103 for details about menu items available when you right click in t
8. Dashboard Views Monitoring 279 280 Dashboard View Selection This screen displays any existing dashboards so you can select one for the Performance Dashboard you want to appear on a page in Dell OpenManage Network Manager Dashboard View Selection Select a Dashboard View entity E Name F Lo MIL Namev Created Date Performance Dashboard for 10 128 2 31 10 03 10 06 45 PM Performance Dashboard for 10 128 2 33 10 05 10 05 39 PM Dashboard for Managed Equipment PEGASUS 192 i 10 07 10 01 41 PM Dashboard for 10 128 2 33 10 128 2 31 10 19 10 12 14 AM Max items returned 25 119 Select Cancel 0 of 4 items selected Use the filter at the top of this selector to limit the listed dashboards from which you can select See Dashboard Views on page 277 for more about creating and configuring the views from which you select Tip If you delete the Network Status Dashboard can put it back by adding the Performance Dashboard portlet to the desired page then select the desired Dashboard View you would like to display as your Network Dashboard Dashboard Views Monitoring Dashboard Editor When you Edit dashboard by right clicking a resource in Managed Resources and selecting Show Performance or create select New a dashboard from the Dashboard Views portlet an editor appears that lets you select and rearrange the monitor components of the dashboard Dashboard View Properties
9. When you see the Failure indicator then the scanned item is Not compliant Select the Following Config Term not satisfied message to see the contents of the failed Xx Failure file at the bottom of this screen ProScan Portlet Change Management ProScan Creating or Modifying ProScan Policy Groups When you create or modify a ProScan Policy Group after right clicking New gt Group or Open when you have selected a group the ProScan Policy Group editor appears catar Heyy Bom ollagra policy lua General Properties Name TestGroup Description This is a Test Enabled M Grouped Policies Add Policies Name ic Juniper SNMP community NOT private Le Juniper SNMP community NOT public j Grouped Targets AddTargets Hame M5 Juniperm5 10128315 10 128 3 15 eb Juniper2300 16 10 128 3 16 lal Save x Close This has the following to configure Name A text identifier for the group Enabled Chceck to enable this grouping Grouped Policies Click Add Policy to select ProScan policies in a selector screen Click the Remove icon to delete a selected policy You can use individual policies in several groups Grouped Targets Click Add Targets to select targets for the scans K NOTE Individual policies that are part of groups display inherited group targets grayed out Executing a group executes all the member policies and update the history records o
10. Criteria This screen lets you filter configuration files based on text or Regular Expressions Click Add to open an editor line e EH Enugaliayrs volea uo commune MOL obli General Targets cgo gt Current Compliance Policy Criteria Add Criteria Match Any of the following criteria Match All of the following criteria Type Criteria Action does not contain snmp community public lal la Save x Close This screen ultimately determines whether the configuration file s for the selected equipment complies with the applicable policy To create a policy first select whether you want to Match Any logical OR or All logical AND of the criteria you configure with the radio buttons at the top of this screen See these sections for more about criteria Editing Compliance Policy Criteria e Match Regex for each line e Count number of occurrences e Input Source Grouping For additional criteria information consult these sections Create Source Group Criteria Regular Expressions e Perl Java Groovy Language Policies ProScan Portlet Change Management ProScan 313 Editing Compliance Policy Criteria After clicking Add Criteria use the pick list on the upper right to select an operation to select a criteria match type Contains Doesn t contain does not match Regex see Regular Expressions on page 320 does not Match Regex for each line Count number of occurrences Perl or
11. Results Dell OpenManage Network Manager stores the results of running a script as lines the Execution Details snap panel Right click the particular command run in the snap panel at the bottom of the Expanded Actions Portlet Tabs show the Results Sent Command and Script and Parameters When viewing a script run the results of running it appear target device by device SACO TESCCA COn pistes couse curlers 1 Oe ern end PT 2 0 O 3 HTTP 1 1 200 OK 4 Server Web Server 5 Content Type text html Cache Control no cache 7 Pragma no cache 8 11 lt html gt 13 lt HEAD gt 15 lt META http equiv Pragma content no cache gt Results Device Hame Execution Date v Status Result Version User ID E nenas 15172171018 6 23 11 3 19 PM Succeed 2 A admin E NG _XSM7224S_41 10 128 4 41 6 23 11 1 30 PM Succeed 5 A admin E NO_NAS_15 172 17 101 18 6 23 11 1 30 PM Succeed 1 A admin E NG_GSM7352Sv2_30 10 128 4 30 6 23 11 1 30 PM Succeed 2 3 admin E NG_GSM7248V2_24 10 128 4 24 6 23 11 1 30 PM Succeed 1 3 admin 0 asn Execution Details ES Sent Commands Script and Parameters Find Go Parameter Name Value s Result 0 El 10 lt DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC W3C DTD HTML 4 0 Transitional EN 14 LINK REL stylesheet HREF base style css TYPE text cs 16 lt META HTTP EQUIV Content Type CONTENT text html charset 17 lt TITLE gt NetGear XSM7224S lt TITLE gt lt Netgear Pa
12. Tree snap panel that E E displays a tree of associations between selected profiles and authentication and tasks that they execute See Discovery Profiles on page 153 for more about this portlet xX How To Discover Your Network 1 Right click the Discovery Profiles list and select New 2 The Discovery Profile Editor appears with a step by step set of screens to configure resource discovery You can navigate through it by clicking the screen tab names at the top or by clicking the Next button at the bottom of the page Discovery Profile Editor Use this editor to configure discovery once you have started Discover Your Network Baseline discovery is the initial discovery to compare to later discoveries Follow these steps to discover equipment on your network General 3 General Parameters Set the Name Description and whether this profile is the baseline default 4 Profile Options Select the Device Naming Format how the device appears in lists once discovered whether to Manage by IP address or hostname and check whether to Resolve Hostname s ICMP Ping Device s Manage ICMP only Device s or Manage Unclassified Device s This last checkbox determines whether Dell OpenManage Network Manager attempts to manage devices that have no device driver installed Management may be possible but more limited than for devices with drivers installed provided this capability is one you have licensed 64 Discovery Profile
13. View Name test1 Show Composites TimeFrame within last v 30 Hours y Entities Add Entity Name IP Address y Action 5324_Neyland_34 10 20 1 34 10 20 1 34 EP Router yourdomain com 10 128 2 11 10 128 2 11 M5 Juniperm5 10 128 3 15 10 128 3 15 10 128 315 Dashboard View Attributes Available Selected MaxRTT D avort MinRTT q PacketCount bb K fel Save Cancel This screen has the following fields View Name The identifier for the dashboard The default is Performance dashboard for IP address but you can edit this This is what appears in the Dashboard Views list Show Composites Show attributes that are constructed from other attributes TimeFrame Use the selectors to configure the time frame for the performance measurement displayed Entities Select the equipment you want to monitor When you right click to Show Performance with resource s selected those resources appear in this list Dashboard View Attributes Click the arrows between Available and Selected panels to select monitors for the dashboard The Available Attributes list shows all the available attributes for that device based on its monitor affiliations If you select none a chart appears for each attribute that has data This is the default If the user moves some attributes to the Selected list then only charts for those attributes appear Dashboard Views Monitoring 281
14. c Cisco IP Finger Disabled Le n22 2 gt 306 ProScan Portlet Change Management ProScan Overall Compliance Overall Compliance can have the following values and flag icon colors All Compliant Icon Green All selected equipment is in compliance with the policy None Compliant Icon Red None of the selected equipment is in compliance with the policy None Determined Icon blank None of the equipment has been tested for compliance Partial Compliance Icon Yellow Not all equipment complies with the policy but all equipment has been tested Compliance Varies Icon Yellow Not all equipment has been tested for compliance The tested equipment might be compliant or not compliant Portlet Menu This screen also has the following right click menu items New Select either a new policy or group Creating a new policy opens the ProScan Policy Editor through which you can define one See Creating or Modifying a ProScan Policy on page 310 for more information about the Editor See Creating or Modifying ProScan Policy Groups on page 325 for the group editor Edit Opens the selected policy or group for modification See Creating or Modifying a ProScan Policy on page 310 for more information See Creating or Modifying ProScan Policy Groups on page 325 for the group editor Refresh Targets Queries to check targets particularly those in dynamic groups are up to date Tip Best practice is to Refresh ProS
15. 117 118 Trap Forwarding Process SNMPv1 and SNMPv3 traps become SNMPv2 Traps SNMPvI traps are converted according to RFC 1908 SNMPv3 traps are already in SNMPv2 format and the application simply does not use SNMPv3 security when sending these northbound The following is the relevant snippet from RFC 1908 3 1 2 SNMPvl gt SNMPv2 When converting responses received from a SNMPvl entity acting in an agent role into responses sent to a SNMPv2 entity acting in a manager role 1 2 If a Trap PDU is received then it is mapped into a SNMPv2 Irap PDU This is done by prepending onto the variable bindings field two new bindings sysUpTime 0 6 which takes its value from the timestamp field of the Trap PDU and snmpTrapOID 0 6 which is calculated as follows if the value of generic trap field is enterpriseSpecific then the value used is the concatenation of the enterprise field from the Trap PDU with two additional sub identifiers 0 and the value of the specific trap field otherwise the value of the corresponding trap defined in 6 is used For example if the value of the generic trap field is coldstart then the application uses the coldStart trap 6 Then one new binding is appended onto the variable bindings field snmpTrapEnterprise 0 6 which takes its value from the enterprise field of the Trap PDU The destinations for the SNMPv2 Trap PDU are determined in an implementation dependent fashion by the proxy a
16. 2 Apply Cancel This displays configured file servers Configure new servers by clicking the new file server link in the upper right corner The editing process after that is as described in File Server Editor on page 222 CAUTION If you select the internal file server make sure no external file server is running on the same host A port conflict prevents correct operation Either turn off the external file server or use it as the FTP server Dell OpenManage Network Manager selects the file server protocol for backup restore or deploy based on the most secure protocol the device supports Common Setup Tasks Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 69 70 Common Setup Tasks Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager Portal Conventions Portal Overview This section explains how to navigate and configure the Dell OpenManage Network Manager web portal Because this portal is based on open source features and can be so flexible this is not a comprehensive catalog of all its features The following discusses only features significant for using Dell OpenManage Network Manager The application s web Portal contains the following common elements The Dock e Status Bar Alerts Menu Bar e Portlets Because the elements that manage the Web portal are so flexible and can be very detailed only Dell OpenManage Network Manager s most important or most frequently used features appear documen
17. 3 classpath sh 4 jboss_init_hpux sh 5 jboss_init_redhat sh 6 jboss_init_suse sh 7 jbosssvc exe 8 password_tool sh 9 Go probe bat shutdowm bat wsprovide bat probe sh shutdow jar wsprovide sh run bat shutdown sh wsrunclient bat run conf twiddle bat wsrunclient sh run conf bat twiddle jar wstools bat run jar twiddle sh wstools sh run sh wsconsume bat service bat wsconsume sh Delete to remove a listed Action record from the list Right click menus on the Actions portlet can include the following items these vary depending on the Action s family New Edit Lets you create or modify a selected action in the Adaptive CLI Editor described below Execute Execute the selected Action This typically displays a target equipment selector screen and a screen where you can configure any parameters necessary for execution then a screen like the Audit Trail Jobs Screen on page 91 Dell OpenManage Network Manager validates the parameters before executing the Adaptive CLI If a parameter is invalid for example a blank community name in the Dell PCT Set SNMP Community Settings Adaptive CLI Dell OpenManage Network Manager logs a validation error to the audit trail In this case the Adaptive CLI is not executed and leaves behind no history record Some Adaptive CLI scripts also let you Preview what is sent the device in a subsequent screen This does not appear in the execution of Targetless and Multi
18. Administrative State Hardware Version Last Backup Last Modified Equipment Hame Alarm Severity Restore Result Description FTX091642H5 1 36141 9 1 543 of Enabled Router 12 4 7 Responding admin 12 4 7 False 3825 Router 192 168 017 06 09 10 02 12 PM a Unlocked vot 07113110 04 46 PM 06 09 10 03 33 PM Router oware net 192 168 0 17 Cisco IOS Software 3800 Software C3825 ADVENTERPRISEKS M Version 12 4 7 RELEASE SOFTWARE fc6 Technical Support http Awww cisco comfechsupport Copyright c 1986 2006 by Cisco Vendor The vendor that manufactures distributes this resource See the Vendors on page 139 for more information about managing vendors Hardware Version This resource s hardware version Software Version The selected resource s software version Network Status The status of the resource in the network For example Responding means this application can via some network protocol get the device to respond Not Responding means the device does not respond to the protocol Indeterminate means the monitoring software has not tried to reach the device or there was some other error which prevented us from determining one of the other two statuses Equipment Details Resource Management 185 The appearance of Network Status depends on the default ICMP monitor see Resource Monitors on page 245 If you exclude this equipment from the monitor or disable it
19. Enable Password lal Save x Close 144 Authentication Resource Management The fields that appear in this editor vary depending on the type of authentication The ID name for the authentication is mandatory If you Add an existing authentication for example to Discovery Profiles you can also configure the Management Interface Parameters like Timeout Retries and Port used If you have an authentication that works for multiple protocols for example SSH or Telnet you can also select the Protocol Type Use the Equipment and User Groups tabs to associate the authentication you configure here to devices or groups of users Expanded Authentication Portlet The Settings button in the expanded Authentication portlet lets you configure column appearance see Show Hide Reorder Columns on page 8 This offers the same column setup as the summary screen Authentication Return to previous Default Authentication Fitter X Advanced Filter Search Refresh Settings 2 8 Y Name Designated for EMS Type PowerVault POWERVAULT Printers HTTPHTTPSAABEM Printers2 HTTPJHTTPSWWBEM Prod_auth Telnet SSH prod_SNMP SNMP 1 4v2c pubpriv SNMP 1 4v2c ES qatesteridorado HTTP HTTPSAWBEM 2 s sra Reference Tree Associated Equipment e qapublic IP Address y DNS Hostname Vendor Resource Profles MS JuniperMS 101 10128 3415 EE Juniper Network This Authentication is associated with the foll
20. Link drawing type Select from Straight Straight polyline Curved polyline Orthogonal polyline Orthogonal curved Cluster Policy Select Vertical or Horizontal This determines the automated orientation of the topology Remember you can click and drag device icons Cluster Spacing Use the slider to determine the spacing between icons not in child parent hierarchy Visualize My Network Visualize 217 Circular Circular layouts arrange all nodes in a circle Minimal circle radius Use the slider to determine the radius of the circle Minimal nodes spacing Use the slider to determine the nodes spacing Wedge Angle Use the slider to determine the arc where child nodes appear Overlap avoidance method Select Approximate or Deterministic Root node selection policy Select Most weighted for general graphs Manual for general graphs or Directed only for tree graphs Link drawing type Select from Straight Straight polyline Curved polyline Orthogonal polyline Orthogonal curved Cluster Policy Select Vertical or Horizontal This determines the automated orientation of the topology Remember you can click and drag device icons Cluster Spacing Use the slider to determine the spacing between icons not in child parent hierarchy Hierarchical Cyclic This arranges connections in a hierarchy Use the following settings to alter its appearance Distance between levels Use the slider t
21. Monitoring 269 SNMP The SNMP attributes panel lets you specify which SNMP attributes are to be monitored 6 duniperMS 10128315 10 128 3 15 eb Juniper2300 16 10 128 3 16 136124414 Specify SNMP attributes as follows With the SNMP browser or Entering SNMP attribute properties explicitly 270 Resource Monitors Monitoring The Browse button launches the SNMP browser General Calculated Metrics Thresholds Inventory Mappings RFC Standard MIBs vw Al gt gt SHMPy2 MiB last updated Oct 16 2002 SMI version 2 Le E SNWP VIEW BASED ACK MIB Mame Type E sNwev2 cONF snmpinPkts OBJECT TYPE oD Syntax 136121114 INTEGER E SMPY2 SMI E sivev2 10 selected MIB Hodes 7 SONET MB MiB Node om Syntax Action E SYSAPPL MIB 3 SNVPy2 MIB snmpinPrts 1 3 61 24 114 INTEGER B A TCP MIR ba O SNMPY2MIB Nodes d O g system ej snmp a snmpinPkts le sampOutPkts e sampinBadVersions e sampinBadComenunityNames 6 sampinBadComenunityUses e sampinASNParseErrs snmpinTooBigs z 6 sempinnoSucrivames Add Selection Done Cancel le sampinBadValues sl Click on the desired SNMP nodes and then click on the Add Selection button to add an SNMP attribute When done selecting click the Done button to add selected attributes to the monitor or Cancel to abandon the operation and close the browser Resource Monitors Monitoring 271 The Add and Edit button
22. Orientation Select from Portrait and Landscape Include Chart Details Enables the following fields Report Summary Enable a report summary Row Separator Display a row separator Page Header Position Select none top bottom or both Auto Column Split Enable automatic column splitting This automatically aligns the columns equally on the report providing the column widths that are most proportional Group on First Attribute Create a report that groups rows based on the first reported attribute This creates groups of items in the report whenever the left most column s value changes For example with disabled a report looks like this Device Name Gig e Port Name Health Status M5 ge 0 0 1 Up M5 ge 0 0 2 Down M5 ge 0 0 3 Up M5 ge 0 0 4 Unknown M18 ge 0 1 1 Up M18 ge 0 1 2 Starting M18 ge 0 1 3 Up Report Templates Resource Management 197 M18 ge 0 1 4 Down The same report looks like this with Group on First Attribute enabled Device Name Gig e Port Name Health Status M5 ge 0 0 1 Up ge 0 0 2 Down ge 0 0 3 Up ge 0 0 4 Unknown M18 ge 0 1 1 Up ge 0 1 2 Starting ge 0 1 3 Up ge 0 1 4 Down The Inventory and Layout tabs are common to all editors Inventory Select the type of inventory for a report and its data types in this screen Biireaungnew enor famplata General irventary Layout Column Configuration Inventory Type e Resource Profile 2 Selected Type Available Columns Se
23. Stopping On date and time or occurrence en E number You can also configure recurrence Enable Schedule 7 in this screen 2 stopping On Once you save the schedule the action for example Discovery Profile it also appears in the Schedules Portlet as a scheduled item By Date and Time By Occurrence Never la Save x Close Schedules Portlet You can view and modify schedules in the Schedules portlet or the Expanded Schedules Portlet E Schedules pHX 17 Settings lt Refresh Search Enabled Description v Type Hext Execution Recurrence 5 Weekly Database Agin 84241 2 00 AM Recur Weekly E Refresh Pr Refresh Prosc 8 8 11 3 07 PM Recur Every 6 E Refresh M Refresh Monito 8 8 11 1 00 PM Recur Every 6 E Network Li Network Link Di 8 9 11 3 00 AM Recur Daily E Network D Network Data 8 9 11 12 00 AM Recur Daily E Monthly Database Agin 8 25 11 3 00 AM Recur Monthly KEK 2i N This displays the Enabled status a Description the Type of schedule its Next Execution and Recurrence in columns You can do the following by right clicking a scheduled item and selecting the appropriate menu item Delete Deletes the selected scheduled item displaying a confirming dialog box Enable Schedule Appears on an already disabled scheduled item so you can change its status To enable the schedule you can also edit it and check the En
24. The NetFlow exporting router monitors traffic traversing it How does it work Traffic Flow Analyzer 293 e The router becomes an Exporter of NetFlow data It forwards information to the NetFlow Collector e Collector stores correlates and presents the information about Traffic bottlenecks in networks e Applications responsible for bandwidth utilization Definitions NetFlow NetF low is a traffic profile monitoring technology J Flow Juniper s implementation of NetFlow sFlow For Dell devices Collector Application listening on a UDP port for NetFlow datagram Exporter Network element that sends the NetFlow datagram Conversations IP communications between two network nodes Flow A flow is a unidirectional stream of packets between two network nodes Setup If they are not already set up to emit flow information set up devices themselves to emit flow data Consult the manuals for your devices for instructions about how to do this Set up Dell OpenManage Network Manager with the following Exporter Registration To register a device right click in Resources portlet after you select the router and choose Traffic Analyzer gt Register The system should then be ready to accept flow data from the device Router Configuration You must configure the router to send flow reports to the Dell OpenManage Network Manager server on port 9996 by default Resolving Autonomous System AS Numbers Dell Op
25. The port s operation type Switch Mode Is the port in switch mode Duplex Is the port in duplex mode Name The port s name Port Number The port s number Equipment Name The port s equipment name Operational State One of following possible values describing the availability of the resource Equipment Details Resource Management Details Hardware Version Port Description Model Date created Creator Port Type T1 Port Encapsulation Subnet Mask Install Date In Use Not In Use If Index Container Index Slot Number Speed MTU Port Icon Learned MAC Addr Count CLI Name Notes Operation Type Switch Mode Duplex Name T1143 Port Number Equipment Name Operational State Down IP Address MAC Address Administrative State 183 Disabled Inoperable because of a fault or resources are unavailable Enabled Operable and available for use Active Device is operable and currently in use with operating capacity available to support further services Busy Operable and currently in use with no operating capacity to spare IP Address The port s IP address Hardware Version The port s hardware version MAC Address The port s Media Access Control MAC address Administrative State One of the following values Locked Device use is prohibited Shutting Down Only existing users can use the device Unlocked Normal use of device is permitted
26. o gqapublic Tasks amp Application Resyne 33 DataCollectionForGroupOtfDevices o 3 DiscoverLinksForGroupOfDevices y Resyno o 2 Scheduled Resyne Snap Panels X Close You can right click to act on listed elements as in the basic smaller portlet but here you can also see details about a selected row in the Snap Panels below the table list items in an expanded portlet Snap Panels The snap panels that appear below the expanded portlet s list Reference Tree can stack on top of each other so several can appear S O st tene 72 10 204 73 simultaneously in each slot for Snap Panels Click the title bar o rowerconnect 6224 Unt 1 of the panel to toggle its expansion or collapse In the Q Einen ee ee Ey Equipment to Contact Reference Tree snap panel click the plus to expand the Caa tree of connections Equipment to Vendor o A This Equipment has these Authentication s 8 Heartbeat Poling Status button at the bottom right of expanded portlets These ON onto Sate panels re appear when you click the Open button Network Details You can collapse the entire snap panel area with a Close Status Bar Alerts Portal Conventions 83 xX How To Show Hide Reorder Columns Click the Settings button in an expanded portlet and screen ezine appears with a Columns tab where ritorrosurs CIES you elect to show or hide columns Click the appropriate buttons they
27. File Name A text identifier for the file Description A text identifier for the file Update User Label A text identifier for the file Entering such a label creates it and makes it available for later restoration comparison and so on Email Settings Click add email to configure an email notification about this backup Select Targets for Backup This screen defaults to the device you selected in Managed Resources You can also click the Add Equipment to add individual devices or Add Groups to add groups or Remove All to manage devices that appear in this list of tar gets 226 File Management File Server File Management Device Options This portion of the Backup Options screen displays detailed configura tion options available for the selected target For example you could select between backing up the running config and the startup config 5 Click one of the buttons at the bottom of the screen to initiate the next backup action Add Schedule opens the scheduling screen to let you automate the backup you have configured on a specified date time or repetition See Scheduling Actions on page 361 Execute performs the backup immediately The Results tab in this screen opens displaying the message traffic between Dell OpenManage Network Manager and the device s See Audit Trail Portlet on page 93 Save preserves this configuration without scheduling or executing it Close closes this screen without saving the con
28. J JuniperJ2300 10 DefaultConfig 8 811 8 26 AM i gt E Compare to Label Compare Selected Compare labeled configuration files to the current selection See File Management on page 223 for a description of this capability You can create labels when you back up a config file or you can compare to the default labels Change Determination Current Compliant If you select two configuration files in the expanded portlet you can also Compare Selected Promote Makes the selected config file available for mass deployment This is a useful way to make a pattern configuration file to deploy to several devices See Image Repository on page 233 for additional information about how to do this Backup Restore Back up the device again related to the selected file or restore the selected file Archive Save the selected file to disk and optionally delete it from this list Import Export Export the selected config file to disk or import it from disk Delete Removes the file from the Dell OpenManage Network Manager database without exporting it Tip You can use the browser s Find function typically initiated with Ctrl F to locate text within the view Aging Policy Opens the Aging Policy selector See Redcell gt Database Aging Policies DAP on page 50 for more about these You can also import and export a selected config file Tip You cannot select multiple lines in most summary port
29. Only existing users can use the device Unlocked Normal use of device is permitted Operational State One of the following values Down lInoperable because of a fault or resources are unavailable Dormant The port is dormant Not Present The port is absent Up Operable and available for use Unknown Status is unknown lesting Status is testing Notes Any notes recorded about the device 194 Ports Resource Management Port Details Settings Encapsulation An identifier for the port MTU The size of the maximum transmission unit Speed The port s speed Subnet Mask Any subnet mask associated with the port In Use Checked if the port is in use IF Index The port s SNMP If Index number K NOTE The polling frequency is once an hour This is not configurable Report Templates Report Templates are the basis of reports This portlet displays the ene Airix Template Name Description and O y Settings Refresh Search Type in columns Template Name Description Type Right clicking in this portlet lets Change Template a mee T Inventor you create a New template Edit Port Template Default Template for Ports Table a selected template see Report carers mess Ti Template Editors for information seems TZ about subsequent screens view FEF Details or Delete a selected template You can also Import Export report templates to files The expanded Report Templ
30. System SMTP Settings SMTP Server Host MySMTP com 7 Return Address test rcsynergy com SMTP Server Port 110 Default Subject Enter your subject Authentication Enabled v Connection Timeout 30 milliseconds User Name test Send Timeout 30 milliseconds ere Max Per Minute 20 Use SSL E S Apply Cancel 3 The Apply button accepts your edits Test tries them Cancel abandons them and returns to Dell OpenManage Network Manager This screen contains the following fields SMTP Server Host The IP address or hostname of your SMTP server SMTP Server Port The port for your SMTP server 110 is typical Common Setup Tasks Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 67 68 Authentication Enabled Check this to enable authentication for this server Checking enables the next two fields User Name The login ID for the SMTP server if authentication is enabled Password The password for the SMTP server if authentication is enabled Use SSL Enable Secure Sockets Layer protocol to interact with your SMTP server Return Address The return address for mail sent from Dell OpenManage Network Manager Default Subject Text that appears by default in the subject line of mail sent by Dell OpenManage Network Manager Connection Send Timeout The time outs for mail sent by Dell OpenManage Network Manager Max Per Minute The maximum number of e mails Dell OpenManage Network Manager can send per minute SMTP
31. ald 5 Applying the first group criterion finds the match underlined in the following router bgp 88 bgp log neighbor changes neighbor 2 3 4 5 remote as 22 neighbor description This is Test neighbor test parameter xxx neighbor 4 5 6 7 remote as 66 neighbor description This is Test neighbor test parameter xxx ProScan Portlet Change Management ProScan address family ipv4 redistribute connected route map map 12 redistribute static route map hjlhjhjhjk redistribute ospf 888 metric 500 match internal external 2 nssa external 1 nssa external 2 route map allanRM03 neighbor 2 3 4 5 activate neighbor 2 3 4 5 route map allanRM01 in neighbor 4 5 6 7 activate neighbor 4 5 6 7 route map allanRM02 in default information originate no auto summary no synchronization exit address family address family ipv4 vrf VPN_PE_A redistribute ospf 10 vrf VPN_PE_A match internal external 1 external 2 no auto summary no synchronization exit address family l 6 Applying the second group criterion on the above result divides the source Source 1 address family ipv4 redistribute connected route map map 12 redistribute static route map hjlhjhjhjk redistribute ospf 888 metric 500 match internal external 2 nssa external 1 nssa external 2 route map allanRM03 neighbor 2 3 4 5 activate neighbor 2 3 4 5 route map allanRM01 in neighbor 4 5 6 7 activate neighbor 4 5 6 7 route map allanRM02 in default information originate
32. are up to date Tip Alternatively the Alarms portlet also lets you right click to expose Alarm Actions You can right click for Direct Access Telnet or Direct Access MIB Browser to display a command line telnetting to the device or an SNMP MIB browser to examine SNMP possibilities for it The Managed Resources portlet can display the anatomy of a Resource with its right click actions see Equipment Details on page 178 Click the plus in the upper right corner to see Managed Resources Expanded This displays detail or Snap in panels with additional information about a selected resource Reports let you take snapshots of network conditions to aid in analysis of trends and Audit Trail Portlets track message traffic between Dell OpenManage Network Manager and devices Additional Products The following describes how to increase the power of your Dell OpenManage Network Manager installation While the documents mentioned above describe everything available with Dell OpenManage Network Manager your installation may provide only a limited subset of those features Why Dell OpenManage Network Manager Preface 11 Updating Your License If you have a limited license for example OpenManage Network Manager may limit discovery to a certain number of devices then your application does not function outside those licensed limits You can purchase additional capabilities and can update your license for OpenManage Netwo
33. for example for performance reasons then a status may appear but it is not meaningful Creator The logged in user that created this record in the database Firmware Version T his resource s firmware version Backup Result The result of any attempted configuration file backup for this resource Managed By Hostname Truce false True means DNS rather IP address is how OpenManage Network Manager manages this resources Model The resource s model number Equipment Icon The resource s icon typically related to the Vendor Equipment Type The resource s type For example Router Location Name The resource s location IP Address The resource s IP address Discovery Date When the resource was discovered Administrative State One of three descriptive values The options are Locked Device use is prohibited Shutting Down Only existing users can use the device Unlocked Normal use of device is permitted Hardware Version The resource s hardware version Last Backup When the resource s configuration was last backed up Last Modified When the resource s configuration was last modified Equipment Name The resource s name on the network Alarm Severity The most severe alarm on the resource Restore Result The result of any attempted restoration of configuration for this resource Description A text description of the device X How To Schedule Actions To schedule an
34. fxp0 fxp0 fxp0 Exp0 fp0 fxp0 fxpQ fxp0 2 fxp0 fxp0 fxp0 fxp0 fxp0 fxp0 fxp0 Wed 28 Sep 2011 13 19 37 or print the report The following describes the panels associated with the following Monitor Options types ICMP Key Metrics Proscan SNMP SNMP Interfaces SNMP Table Monitor 266 Resource Monitors Monitoring ICMP The ICMP Monitor Options panel contains the following properties Petites asias Haane Eala luitus General mentor options Calculated Metrics Thresholds Inventory Mappings Packet Size Size of packet for ICMP transmission Packet Count Number of packets to send Timeout Number of seconds without a response before a timeout is issued The ICMP Entity Panel lets you select resource groups and Resource manager objects Clicking Add button displays a selector panel for these axem retuned 25 Add Selection Add AHN Done Resource Monitors Monitoring 267 268 Select the type of entity you want to add then select any desired filter attributes then click Apply Filter Select from the entities that appear and add them to the monitor K NOTE Migrating from previous versions updates the Network Status check box to true and redeploys the monitor Key Metrics The Key Metrics Properties panel contains a list of key metrics you can add to the monitor They are grouped by category liada O ajaja lupe lo
35. i escription Responding w PCT5548P_17 10 2 24G Ethernet Switch Responding we PCTS524P_17 1 aT 8 Not Responding ey PCM8024K_24 10 20 342 a Dell Inc PowerC Responding we PC7048_179 1 10 20 1 179 amp Dell Inc Power K 4 2 3 4 gt M Managed Resources Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager Common Setup Tasks If you install it Add gt Applications the Common Setup Tasks portlet can Jr Common Setup Tasks Px appear on the page of your choice It n D ipti Statu Acti reminds you of the following common ae an SMTP Configuration P Setup required edit tasks ip Metrestore File Servers 7 Setup complete edit gt SMTP Configuration Hetrestore OS Images Setup complete edit e Netrestore File Servers e Netrestore Image Repository A red flag appears with the Setup required message in the Status column when these are not configured Configuring them displays a green flag with the Setup complete message Click the edit link in the Action column to open editors for each of these SMTP Configuration You can use Dell OpenManage Network Manager s messaging capabilities to communicate with other users but if you want to receive e mails automated by actions like configuration file backups Dell OpenManage Network Manager must have a mail account This screen configures the e mail server so Dell OpenManage Network Manager can send such automated e mails amr Configuration
36. make the default filter in Managed Resources display only Powerconnect then click Managed Resources in the upper left corner of the portlet to rename it Powerconnect Routers If you are not an administrator you must make a personal page for such portlets if you want the filter settings to persist 80 Status Bar Alerts Portal Conventions Search You can search by clicking Search at the top of portlets This opens a search field where you can enter search terms for all the fields that appear in the list at the top of the portlet The search is for what you enter no wildcards are supported To clear a search clear the field This searches all available items in the database whether they appear listed or not Tip Sort on a column by clicking on that column s heading Reverse the sort order by clicking it again This only sorts what appears in the portlet whether expanded or not The application remembers each user s choice saving the last Sort Column and Order on any page Most portlets also remember settings for Max Items and the selected Filter Portlet Instances When you add content to a page some portlets for example the OpenManage Network RC Resource Management Manager Container View portlet appear with a 1 Authentication Add purple icon and others for example the 3 Container Manager Add Authentication or Container Manager portlets E Container View Add have green icons The green icon portlets are in
37. monitoring and select Gauge Counter or Boolean buttons to the right of this panel to configure the metric type of the selected output data These attributes default to the metric type Gauge Adaptive CLI is where you define these attributes but you must select their metric type settings on this screen if it is something other than the default Click Save to preserve your configuration or Cancel to abandon it and close the editor screen Adaptive CLI Records Archiving Policy You can use OpenManage Network Manager s archiving feature to preserve Adaptive CLI information Click the Redcell gt Database Archiving Policy DAP node of the Control panel and click the default Adaptive CLI DAP and click the edit button on its right 1 Editing Adaptive CLI Aging Policy General E Keep History for this many days 30 7 Delete history associated with z Negate command Archive deleted records M Y Apply amp Cancel After filling in the General Info tab the Parameters screen lets you configure the following Keep History Enter the number of days to retain the history in the database Delete history associated with Negate command Check to remove archived records associated with Negate described under General on page 341 Archive Deleted Records Check to have deleted archived records saved as a file configured in the General Info parameters too Adaptive CLI Records Archiving Policy Actions and Adaptive CLI 365 36
38. no auto summary no synchronization exit address family ProScan Portlet Change Management ProScan 319 320 Source 2 address family ipv4 vrf VPN_PE_A redistribute ospf 10 vrf VPN_PE_A match internal external 1 external 2 no auto summary no synchronization exit address family This creates two sources sections Now OpenManage Network Manager applies the regex in the criteria field to each of the sources It returns true only if both sources pass we selected the Match All radio button In this case Source 2 does not have those lines so OpenManage Network Manager returns a false value Label Single digit Two digits Three digits Four digits Five digits Number Decimal Float IP Address IP Address Mask Domestic phone number with extension MAC Address MAC Address MIB2 OID Enterprise OID Time All 8 The error details appear in the audit trail panel Regular Expressions The following table outlines standard supported regular expressions Pattern d d 2 d 3 d 4 d 5 0 9 One or more 0 9 Zero or more 0 9 0 9 0 9 Ad 1 3 3 d 1 3 d 1 3 3 Ad 1 3 Ad L s VA 2 1 9 Nd 23 29 J 0 9 3 DAMA 1 109 44 SV x 0 9 3 4 0 9a fA F 1 2 5 0 9a fA F 1 2 0 9a fA F 1 2 5 0 9a fA F 1 2 1 3 6 1 6 1 2 1 d d 1 3 6 1 4 1 d d 0 1 0 3 0 5 0 9 0 5 0 9
39. that establishes your credentials when doing business or other transactions on the Web It is issued by a certification authority CA It contains your name a serial number expiration dates a copy of the certificate holder s public key used for encrypting and decrypting messages and digital signatures and the digital signature of the certificate issuing authority so that a recipient can verify that the certifi cate is real Domain A goal oriented environment that can include an industry company or department You can use Oware to create solutions within your particular domain ENCRYPTION Scrambling data in such a way that it can only be unscrambled through the application of the correct cryptographic key EQUIPMENT A network device managed by the system ETHERNET TRUNK An Ethernet Trunk service represents a point to point connection between two ports of two devices Ethernet frames transported by the connection are encapsulated according to IEEE 802 10 protocol The each tag ID value in 802 10 encapsulated Ethernet frames distinguishes an Ethernet traffic flow Thus an Ethernet trunk can aggregate multiple Ethernet VLANs through a same connection which is why trunk describes these Glossary 367 368 ETHERNET TRUNK Port An Ethernet trunk port is a port that terminates a point to point Ethernet trunk Since Ethernet trunk is a point to point connection each Ethernet trunk contains two Ethernet tr
40. you can specify matches within each neighbor Your policy can audit each router bgp section and each neighbor within each router bgp See Create Source Group Criteria below for an example of how to use these capabilities Also see Regular Expressions below for more about what match criteria are supported X How To Create Source Group Criteria Here is an example of how you can use source group criteria Suppose you want to scan for the following text neighbor 2 3 4 5 activate neighbor 2 3 4 5 route map allanRM01 This is within the following configuration router ospf 888 log adjacency changes 316 ProScan Portlet Change Management ProScan redistribute bgp 88 metric 10010 metric type 1 subnets tag 334 route map allanRM02 network 2 3 4 0 0 0 0 255 area 123 network 2 3 5 0 0 0 0 255 area 124 network 2 3 6 0 0 0 0 255 area 125 router isis I router rip version 2 network 175 92 0 0 no auto summary l address family ipv4 vrf VPN_PE_A no auto summary no synchronization exit address family l router bgp 88 bgp log neighbor changes neighbor 2 3 4 5 remote as 22 neighbor description This is Test neighbor test parameter xxx neighbor 4 5 6 7 remote as 66 neighbor description This is Test neighbor test parameter xxx l address family ipv4 redistribute connected route map map 12 redistribute static route map hjlhjhjhjk redistribute ospf 888 metric 500 match internal external 2 nssa external 1 ns
41. 128 4 9 Ethernet Port E 207 EE NG_GSM7252PS_9 10 128 4 9 Ethernet Port o E zv E NG_GSM7252PS_9 10 128 4 9 Ethernet Port o fw 2050 EE NG_GSM7252PS_9 10 128 4 9 Ethernet Port o Google M of e 205 EE NG_GSM7252PS_9 10 128 4 9 Ethernet Port o CEE EEE Each tagged coordinate is cross correlated with the Alarm State table if there are alarms against it and its color reflects the current Alarm state Resource Discovery The following explains and demonstrates the features included in Resource Discovery The guide assumes you have full access to all the features full license included in the web portal xX How To Discover Resources Here are the steps 1 Set up Discovery Profiles for the resources you want to discover 2 Execute the profile 3 View the results in the Managed Resources portlet Tip Quick Discovery executes the selected Default discovery profile 152 Resource Discovery Resource Management Discovery Profiles The discovery profiles set up equipment discovery for Dell OpenManage Network Manager Discovery Profiles x Q Settings Refresh Search Hame y Description Default Scheduled Hext Execution Date QAFTP_T Shared FTPAF Y No Y Printers Discover Printers Q No Powervautt 8 No Netscreen Q No MimicLab MIMIC simulatio Y No Discover This profile will Y No K 4 203 0M The summary view displays the Name Description Default the green check indicates the de
42. 128 6 11 4 Return to previous Equipment Details Resource Management Alarms Performance Indicators Details Severity Date Openedy Event llame CPU Utilization Equipment llame ForceS4810P_11 10 128 6 11 0 25 50 75 100 it Minor 32210574M autherticetionFalt Poteet Netart meal Te eRe re a A Operating System Software er Version 1 0 Force10 a Application Software Description Version 8 3 7 2 Copyright c Memory Utilization 1999 2011 by Force10 0 25 50 75 100 Networks Inc Build Time MARRAS oe cre A Sun Aug 7 08 32 10 PDT 0 IP Address 10 128 611 Network Status Responding Ports Audit Trail DNS Hostname Manage By Hostname Q False Namea State User ID Action Status Subject Location O Lab M2 ManagementEthernet 0 0 x A admin Es Adaptiv El RA Forces Tortai mar M2 ManagementEthernet 1 0 amp admin 59 Equipm P Forces Equipment Type Switch M2 ManagementEthernet 2 0 A admin File Ma Wh Forces Vendor ES Det nc ManagementEthernet 3 0 2 48 Change R Forces Model Force10 4810 2 ManagementEthernet 4 0 2 admin E File Ma PR Forces System Object Id 1361160871314 Serial Humber HADL112720066 32 ManagementEthernet 5 0 amp Change PU Forces eras Number Hardware Version LEKI 2 3 4 gt K 4 2m o o Firmware Version 8372 Software Version Virtual Q Not Virtual Associated Link s Latest
43. 173 fed PCT5548P_17210 10 201 172 R POT5S24P_171 10 10 201 171 ES Delt inc ES Det nc g Delt inc E Det inc ES vel inc ES Dell nc E Det inc ES Det inc ES vet inc ES Dell nc E Det nc Dell inc Dell inc ES Delt inc ES Det inc 3 Det inc Dell inc K 23 om PowerConnect 8024 PowerConnect 5548 PowerConnect 5548P PowerConnect 5524P PowerConnect M6024 k we PC7048_179 10 20 10 201 179 PowerConnect 7048 1 PC7048P_182 10 2 10 201 182 e PC7024P_181 10 2 10 201 181 w PC7024F_178 10 2 10 201 178 we PC6224P_79 10 20 10 20 1 79 ES Netiron MLX 4 Rou PowerConnect 7048P PowerConnect 7024P PowerConnect 7024F PowerConnect 6224P 10 128 5 21 PowerConnect B MLXe 4 we M8024_Griffin_210 10 20 1 210 PowerConnect M8024 A M6220 _Randall_20 10 201 205 PowerConnect M6220 Mg IAP105 10 128 31 20 PowerConnect W IAP 10 128 31 21 PowerConnect W IAP 93 S FCX624S 10 20 1 10 201 174 PowerConnect B FCX Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch SwitchiRouter Switch Switch Switch Switch SwitchRouter lal Save P Preview Group Cancel Managed Resource Groups Resource Management 165 166 Managed Resources The Managed Resources summary portlet displays the discovered devices on your network their Network Status Severity of their highest recent alarm Equipment Name IP Address and Vendor N
44. 25 50 7 Memory Utilization 0 25 ESCA aS NENA 09 50 Ports Audit Trail Mamez State User ID Action Status Subject MP ManagementEthernet 0 0 Q A admin 6 Adaptiv RA Forces ManagemertEthernet 110 A admin ds Equip RA Forces 12 Managementtthernet 20 Aamin E Flema A Forces B ManagementEthernet 3 0 2 4 Change fw Forces ManagementEthernet 4 0 Aamin Flema RA Forces ManagementEthernet 5 0 2 Change fi Forces He 2z 24m Doe gt Associated Link s Latest Configurations Link Mame y Link Type Equi Fi Fi Date Saved Mu P GigabitEthernet 0 47 Forc Ethernet Link Br Tet D 3 5 121 21 PM 1 6 FE Tet Pr 3 5121 31 PM DE Reference Tree Monitor Status Summary AN ForceS4610P_11 10 128 56 11 Target cae pou BB Loopbacks ForceS4st 316121041 AM O NULO ForceS481 3 6 12 10 39 AM Port Channels O mp soto ForceS481 3 611210 39 AM mg sett ForceS481 3 612 10 39 AM mp Sot 2 TenGigabit 3 6 12 10 40 AM O Hy Sita NULLO F 3 612 10 38 AM g9 Sota Entity not 316121041 AM O mp Slot 5 Doo gt Equipment llame Description IP Address Alarm Severity Network Status DIS Hostname Manage By Hostname Location Contact Equipment Type Vendor Modet System Object Id Serial Number Hardware Version Firmware Version Software Version Virtual Date created Creator Discovery Date Last Modified La
45. 6 24 11 1 40 PM Succeed 1 2 admin a Router yourdomain com 10 128 2 10 6 24111 1 40 PM Failed 1 2 admin A admi 2 CiscoME3400 10128231 oware net 10 128 2 31 6 24111 1 40 PM Succeed 1 2 admin 2 CiscoME3400 10128230 10 128 2 30 6 24 11 1 40 PM Succeed 1 A admin K 4 2i N Execution Details File Name AC_RunHistory Version 1 File Name AC_RunHistory Version 1 1 1 2 show protocols 2 show protocols 3 Global values 3 Global values 4 Internet Protocol routing is enabled 4 Internet Protocol routing is enabled 5 6 5 Serial2 0 is down line protocol is dom 7 Serial2 0 is down line protocol is dom 8 9 Serial2 1 is down line protocol is dom 10 Serial2 l is dom line protocol is domn 11 Serial2 2 is administratively domn line protocol 12 13 14 15 6 7 8 Serial2 2 is administratively down line protocol 9 0 x Close This has the same color coding as you would see comparing configuration files Lines that differ between the two Adaptive CLI results appear highlighted green Lines that are missing in one but that appear in another appear highlighted red Added lines appear highlighted in yellow Use the right left arrows or the page numbers at the bottom of the screen to page through the side by side comparison Audit Opens an Audit Trail Viewer for the selected Action See Audit Trail Viewer on page 92 for details Show Last Results Show the last execution details like history for
46. A text description of the container Parent A read only reminder of the container s parent if one exists Access Select Private creator only or Shared A private container is accessible to the container owner alone Shared indicates other users can access a container but even for Shared containers you must assign Roles to give others access to the container The all role grants access to everyone Owner Select an owner for the container The owner of a container can also change the ownership of the container Membership Container membership defines the inventory items that are in a container You can select either a Static membership which cannot change or a Dynamic one based on a filter When Dell OpenManage Network Manager evaluates the filter it adds the resulting items as members in the container MERA E FolsomContainer General Authorizations Lab En Dynamic Static Container Members Remove All Entity Type folsom Location Folsom Lab Location Group By None Entity Type Add Child Delete Child Close The sub tabs at the top of the screen let you edit these types See Managed Resource Groups on page 162 for more about the specifics of editing these groups Click Save to preserve the membership you have configured If you Group By Entity Type at the bottom of the screen rather than None the list of devices appears in a tree with each node as an enti
47. Adaptive CLI execute it with action gt Execute 5 When executing select a target 6 Click Next The Show Run command results appear These are searchable with the job screen Scheduling Actions You can schedule actions with a right click in the Actions Portlet or the Schedules Portlet This opens an editor with the following screens e General e Parameters Schedule See Schedules Portlet on page 95 for more scheduling actions with that portlet Schedules created in the Actions Portlet also appear in the Schedules Portlet Perl Scripts Actions and Adaptive CLI 361 General This screen lets you identify the scheduled item and its targets Case Separar serio Bell Per sary Sanda ED Parameters Schedule General Settings Action Schedule Description dE Dell PCT Set SNTPS 7 test Schedule Associated Targets Add Remove All Mame y Actions PC7024F_178 10 201 178 E 8024F _Campbell_220 10 20 1 220 E 3524_Ryan_116 10 20 1 116 E hal Save x Close This has the following fields General Settings Action Identifies the action being scheduled Schedule Description Identifies the schedule Associated Targets Click the Add button to select target equipment You can remove listed equipment with the icon to the right of listed items or with the Remove All button 362 Perl Scripts Actions and Adaptive CLI Parameters This screen s configuration depe
48. Add Criteria Save Execute or schedule your created ProScan policies Any out of compliance devices throw an alarm which you can email or configure to trigger other actions see the next use case Goal And if not compliant restore compliant configuration In addition to the steps in the previous section 8 9 Create an action to restore the labelled compliant configuration Create event processing rule that says when ProScan fails execute the restore action in 7 If you have multiple device types you do not need to assign actions for each device or even each device type OpenManage Network Manager supports the assigned policies so it knows which actions to do to that device based on which device sent the trap xX How To Configure ProScan Groups If you have different ProScans for different device type then you can run a ProScan Group and automatically scan even different types of devices in one action For more about this see Creating or Modifying ProScan Policy Groups on page 325 1 2 3 Right click and select New gt Group Specify the Proscan Policy Group Parameters Add ProScan Policies Tip These policies can be in multiple groups Add Targets Notice that group targets appear in the child policies grayed out Child policies can add more targets Save Execute or schedule the group policies to run against the selected targets 304 Introducing ProScan and Change Management Change Ma
49. Click Add Action to create anew action in the editor The Actions column lets you revise Edit this entry or Delete entries in this table Click Save to preserve the action s configured here or Cancel to abandon any edits Clicking Add Action lets you select from the following e Forward Northbound e Email e Custom Event Processing Rules Key Portlets Click Apply to accept configured actions or Cancel to abandon their editor and return to this screen Tip Actions available here are like those for Discovery Profiles on page 153 Forward Northbound When you want to forward an SNMP v2 event trap to another host then configure automation in this screen to do that Adding New Northbound Forwarding Action Settings for Northbound Forwarding as SNMPv2 Destination Address 192 168 1 126 Destination Port 162 2 Community String public Send as Proxy wf Apply Cancel Enter the following fields Destination Address The IP address of the northbound destination Destination Port The port on the northbound destination Community String The SNMP community string for the northbound destination Send as Proxy When checked this sends the IP address of the application server as the source of the event Unchecked it sends the IP address of the source device See Send as Proxy on page 118 for more For details of the Trap Forwarding Process see the next section Event Processing Rules Key Portlets
50. Dashboard by default Click the select new text in the upper right corner of the dashboard to select an alternative already configured view from those in Dashboard Views portlet Click the edit button in that same corner to alter the configuration of the existing dashboard See Dashboard Editor on page 281 for more about altering views You can configure Dashboards appear by configuring them in the Dashboard Views portlet or by selecting a device or devices in Managed Resources portlet right clicking and choosing Show Performance To select more than one device use the expanded Managed Resources portlet The first time you create a default dashboard for a single device Dell OpenManage Network Manager saves it in the Dashboard Views manager Invoking Show Performance for that device subsequently displays its default view Dashboard Views Monitoring The icons in the dashboard s upper right corner let you edit Dashboard Properties with the Dashboard Editor or Save the dashboard with the other icon Tip Hovering the cursor over the individual charts displays the charted attribute value s as popup tooltips If a graph has multiple lines the data points for different lines are charted at different times Dell OpenManage Network Manager distributes polling to balance the load on its mediation service Hover the cursor over the time when a line s data point appears and that line s value appears as a tooltip It may seem a device reportin
51. Every time OpenManage Network Manager executes the compliance policy it updates the Last Run Date Status and Details on the history record K NOTE Executing Proscan policies may trigger a benign warning that No proscan policies have target group s if that is the case You can safely ignore this warning message Groups When you run a ProScan group policy the history for the group appears in this detail panel just as it would for a single policy History concatenates the results of the component policies as does reporting See Compliance and Change Reporting on page 329 Tip You can print a Compliance Policy Violation report from Report Manager It produces a document based on the Compliance Policy History ProScan Portlet Change Management ProScan 309 Creating or Modifying a ProScan Policy This series of screens lets you configure ProScan policies sio Cepeliines polis ura comune MOT guaio ED Targets Criteria General Properties Name Juniper SNMP community NO Description duniper SNMP community NOT public Enabled M p Input Source Device Backup Current Config Configuration Label By Date Adaptive CLI results Input source will be the config file from the Current label containing the most recent backup lal Save x Close This screen has the following tabs e General Targets e Criteria The Compliance Policy Job Status screen displays progress of a P
52. Finally you can also import a Readme File to accompany this image and view it in that tab Click Save to preserve the OS Image you have configured or Cancel to exit these screens without saving Image Repository File Management 235 Configuration Image Editor This editor appears for new configuration images or for configurations you Promote in the Configuration Files portlet for mass restoration This screen has the following tabs e General Parameters e Configuration General Parameters In this screen you can name and describe the configuration file and configure a filter to screen restoration targets E Editing Configuration General Parameters Configuration General Parameters Hame TestConfig Unique identifier Description This is a test Text description Version 1 Descriptive version number Target Filter A Edit Det e Y AND Match All of the following Vendor is Juniper Networks Inc la Save x Close The Version field automatically tracks changes to the original The Target Filter panel lets you configure how this configuration decides which devices to target When targets fail restoration skips them 236 Image Repository Configuration This panel lets you configure what is restored and what is variable in mass deployments Edito ones General Parameters Configuration Target Params changed 1999 09 10 16 47 29 PDT 4 rae 1R2 3 Parame
53. L3VPN MVPN Service Vv nae Qe Write Execute Add Delete Apply Cancel Tip When you hover the cursor over a functional permission tooltips provide a description You can also click on the Search button at the bottom to find a phrase within the functional permissions 44 Control Panel Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager Redcell gt Data Configuration This panel configures custom attributes for Dell OpenManage Network Manager Data Configuration Click the Edit button next to the Entity Type Managed Equipment Port Contact Vendor or Location for which Custom Attribute Settings you want to create custom attributes aad coa bl This opens an editor listing the available MansyediEntipment Tesilevel newankasce gt custom attributes for the entity type Port Physical port 3 Edit Custom Attributes on page 89 Contact Contact Information 2 describes right clicking to access this va penonton 2 directly from the portlet menu and the nator ple 4 details of how to edit custom attributes Redcell gt Mediation This panel monitors mediation servers in your system appearing only when such servers exist Mediation servers appear listed in the Servers tab of this manager if mediation servers are connected to application server s 4 Control Panel Redcell Mediation Servers Partitions Mediation Server Add Server Severity Na
54. Retain Availability Q Net Retain Availabilty Juniper 3 8 11 10 41 AM o Retain Polled Data Not Retain Polled Data CiscoME 6 8 11 10 41 AM o Retain Calculated Data Not Retain Calculated Data x Do gt Enable Disable Monitor Enables or disables the monitor Only one of these options appears Only enabled monitors report data and demand resources while disabled monitors do not Refresh Monitor Re query to update any targets for the current monitor See Scheduling Refresh Monitor Targets on page 276 for instructions about automating this Manage Retention Policies Select this to manage the data retention policies for the selected monitor See Retention Policies on page 248 for details Delete Removes the selected monitor Resource Monitors Monitoring Expanded Resource Monitor This screen appears when you click the plus in the upper right corner of the summary screen E Resource Monitors Return to previous Default Active Monitor Fitter y Ad d Search Refresh Settings JB Y Mame Enabled Description Monitor Type Polling Interval Target Count Retention Policy Default WMI Monitor Q Default key metrics monito Key Metrics 5 Minutes lt Default Default Juniper Monitor x Default key metrics monito Key Metrics 5 Minutes S Default Default Interface Monitor Q Default monitor to collect b SNMP Interfaces 5 Minutes Default Default ICMP Monitor Defaul
55. Send New Line option Max Occurrences Indicates the maximum number of times respond to a prompt The default value zero 0 indicates no limit Actions Portlet Actions and Adaptive CLI Attributes Extraction To support Adaptive Service and Active Monitor functions Adaptive CLI provides a way for the user to define output schema attributes This tab is active only if you have selected schema attributes previously in the Attributes portion of this editor Script Content Error Conditions Continue Patterns Value Extractions e Attribute Extraction Pattern Attribute name xl Parse algorithm Extract xl Parse expression o Add new attribute extraction This lets you Add Edit or Delete extracted attributes like Error Conditions s editor and configure them with the following fields Attribute Name This field specifies the name of the extracted attribute To specify the output value of an attribute select it from the provided list Attribute Type The data type of the attribute extracted Only schema attributes of simple type String Integer Long Float Double and Boolean are available to choose from Parse Algorithm Select from the pick list Extract Match For match algorithm the result is either true or false for the Boolean attribute type 0 or 1 for numeric types or true or false for String type K NOTE Currently Active Performance Monitor supports only numeric types Pars
56. The following are common Windows Base prerequisites Credentials You must use administrative credentials to manage the computer system Firewall Some firewalls installed on the computer may block Windows Management requests Allow those you want to manage See Firewall Issues below License Make sure you have the proper Windows Base driver license installed If you have a Dell only license and are discovering a non Dell computer discovery does not work Or if you have a Dell license for desktop discover you cannot discover a server License come in the following types e Major Vendor by Name For example Dell Compaq HP Gateway e Server Desktop individual license support e Generic computers Non major vendors e ALL This gives the driver all capabilities for any computer system Firewall Issues Configure the firewall between your server and the Internet as follows e Deny all incoming traffic from the Internet to your server e Permit incoming traffic from all clients to TCP port 135 and UDP port 135 if necessary on your server e Open Port 445 WMI Sizing for Standalone Installations Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 25 e Permit incoming traffic from all clients to the TCP ports and UDP ports if necessary on your server in the Ports range s specified above e If you are using callbacks permit incoming traffic on all ports where the TCP connection was initiated by your server
57. Tree Protocol STP 371 SSH Secure Shell 371 SSL Secure Sockets Layer 371 Starting Web Client 32 Static Group 164 Status Bar Messaging 75 Sub Policies 55 Supported Operating System 378 Index Versions 16 Supported PowerConnect Models 24 Supported Web Browsers 19 Syslog Escalation Criteria 115 System Basics 15 System requirements 15 T Terminal 190 The Back Button 72 Threshold Graph Back ground 259 Tooltips 72 Top Asset Monitors Port lets 276 Top Configuration Backups Portlet 277 Topology 207 Actions 209 Balloon 216 Circular 218 Configuring Views 208 Data 214 Data View Settings 213 Displayed Levels 210 Layout 216 Orthogonal 217 OVERVIEW 219 Radial 217 STYLE OPTIONS 211 ZOOM 210 Topology saving 213 Traffic Flow Portlet Drill Down 298 Traffic Flow Portlets 295 Search 300 Trap SNMP Trap 371 Trap Forwarding 371 Trap Forwarding Process 118 Troubleshooting Users and Organizations 34 U Update Location 138 Updating Your License 12 Upgrade licenses from previ ous version 12 V Vendors Portlet 139 Vendors Snap Panel 141 View as PDF 90 Visualization 207 Actions 209 Alarms 219 Balloon 216 Basic Spring 219 Circular 218 Configuring Views 208 Data Node Finder 213 Displayed Levels 210 Graph Inventory 214 Hierarchical Cyclic 218 Icons 215 LAYOUT 216 Layout 216 Saving Views 213 STYLE OPTIONS 211 View Details 213 ZOOM 210 Visualize My Network 207 VLAN 371 W WBEM 26 root login 27 WBE
58. When ping responds in less than one millisecond results appear in a table with lt lms entries HTTP HTTPS Selectin EE HTTP S NG_GS716Tv2_15 10 128 4 15 NOTE In order for HTTP HTTPS cut thru to work you must be on the same accessible network as the resource Popup Blocking must be enabled or an exception rule added for this server Some browsers may close the window instantly if the device fails to respond Y Launch HTTP Cancol This summary portlet displays discovered device ports Ports ARX 17 Settings Refresh Search Namev Equipment Port Type State me 100 niner 1241198 34840 Other el irb Hame ge 0 0 3 mel ip 000 Port Type Gigabit Ethernet Port Operational State of Enabled gr 0 0 0 ge 0 0 3 R db duniperJ2300 10 128 3 16 10 Gigabit Ethernet Port me ge 0 0 2 eL JuniperJ2300 10 128 3 16 10 Gigabit Ethernet Port M403 14 6 gt N This displays a list of ports with columns for Port Icon Equipment Name Name Type and Encapsulation Hover your cursor over the Name column and a popup appears adding the port s Date Created and Operational State informat listed in Managed Resources on page 166 You can also create links See Ports gt Links on page 182 ion Right clicking offers a subset of the actions See Port Editor on page 194 for details of the editor specifically for ports Ports Resource Management 191 192 Port Details This screen dis
59. a message template exists for an existing correlated alarm and the generated text does not match the original alarm then Dell OpenManage Network Manager closes the existing alarm and generates a new one Leaving this blank transmits the original message Tip Putting an OID in curly brackets amounts to a tag replaced by the MIB text for that OID Look for OIDs and messages in the MIB browser as described in MIB Browser on page 188 Correlations This screen lets you configure Correlated Events and Correlation Key Bindings For example a link down event could correlate with a link up event or an alarm with a clear alarm event edito ar Definition Cardona operas do eto General Message Template cr Extensions Correlated Events Add Remove All Event Definition MIB Hame adaptiveCLiRunFailureNotification AdaptiveCLI MIB Correlation Key Bindings Available Variables adaptiveCLiName adaptiveCLiScriptName redcellEquipmentContact redcellEquipmentDescription redcellEquipmentHostname redcellEquipmentiP Address redcellEquipmentJobld redcellEquipmentLocation redcellEquipmentModel redcellEquipmentName redcellEquipmentResults redcellEquipmentSysobjectld redcellEquipmentVendor la Save Cancel In the Correlated Events panel click Add to display a selector with filter to find events to correlate with the one you are editing In Correlation Key Bindings use the right left
60. a single run Schedule Schedule the selected Action See Scheduling Actions on page 361 for details Delete Remove the selected Action from the list Import Export Import or Export a file representations of the ACLI action selected Dell OpenManage Network Manager supports ACLI import export only Actions Portlet Actions and Adaptive CLI 339 Adaptive CLI Editor This editor creates new Adaptive CLIs When you click New or Edit after selecting an existing command the command editor screen opens You can create Configure Commands External Commands and Show Commands O rara adagia Ledo ED Attributes Seripts General Settings Name Description TestACLI A unique name TestACLI Type Is Batch Execution Enabled Show Command xl M Enable Batch Execution Target Type Last Executed on Managed Devices xl Export File Location Overwrite on export PT Ovennrite export file la Save x Close The editor screen has the following tabs the ones that appear depend on the type of command you are editing e General e Attributes Scripts K NOTE The Adaptive CLI Manager logs into devices in enable mode by default For most configuration commands and even some show commands you must typically first set the device to its configuration mode Tip Dell OpenManage Network Manager validates entries If saving fails a red X appears next to required omitted entries Click Save
61. action triggered from a right click menu for example from Managed Resources rather than execute it immediately follow these steps 186 Equipment Details Resource Management 1 Select the action in the right click menu For example Netconfig Backup Eee Action Retuonng Ea CO Job Viewer NetConfig Backup Filename DefaultConfig Filename to store the backup configuration Description Description of the backup Label To Update Label to update for the backup Add Schedule Execute Save 2 Rather than clicking Execute click Add Schedule 3 The schedule panel appears E EXPTE series ELO nO Bakio rmt Job Viewer Starting On 08 03 2010 11 33 PM ll Recurrence Every y 1 Day s y Enable Schedule Y Stopping On By Date and Time By Occurrence Never Apply Cancel 4 Once you click Apply on this panel the previous panel returns the Add Schedule button now appearing as Edit Schedule 5 Ifyou click Save Dell OpenManage Network Manager creates a scheduled item around the activity and its data A row also appears in the screen described in Schedules Portlet on page 95 for this schedule 6 When you have scheduled something from the Add Schedule button clicking Apply in the schedule panel returns you to the previous screen 7 Ifyou click Execute in that previous screen the action begins and audit trail panel appears displaying the running job for the
62. and Terminal on page 190 for more the about the available direct access options K NOTE You must have Java installed and updated on the client for direct access to function correctly Event Management This lets you suppress or update alarms related to the selected resource You can Start Alarm Suppression Stop appears once you have started suppression Stop All Alarm Suppression Schedule Alarm Suppression View Active Suppression s and Resync Alarms corrects Dell OpenManage Network Manager s display to match the latest information from the device already in the database Event Management This lets you suppress or update alarms related to the selected resource You can Start Alarm Suppression Stop appears once you have started suppression Stop All Alarm Suppression Schedule Alarm Suppression View Active Suppression s and Resync Alarms corrects Java client s display to match the latest information from the device already in the database Alarms Managed Resources Resource Management resync for all devices This corrects the display when the alarm color displayed either here or in topologies does not match the highest severity alarm for the device in the alarm portlet Dell OpenManage Network Manager issues no alerts when resync occurs When you Start alarm suppression first enter a description in a subsequent screen then a Success Failure message appears confirming suppression has started Schedule displa
63. and any Notes about the device Managed Resources Resource Management 167 Management Interface This lists the management interfaces for the selected device including the IP Address Port Retries and Timeout EXA ser SIZES SU pales oes pl General MI Cg itr lta Authentication Management Interface Items Enabled IP Address y Protocol Type Timeout 10 128 315 Telnet 10 10 128 315 SNMPw1 5 10 128 315 ICMP 10 lal Save x Close Notice you can Add interfaces with the button in the upper right corner Authentication This lists the authentications for the selected device You can Add authentications with the button in the upper right corner too These authentications originate in the portlet described in Authentication on page 143 168 Managed Resources Resource Management Details Displays several panels with detailed resource information These include Alarms Performance Indicators graphs Ports Audit Trail Interfaces Associated Link s Latest Configurations and a Details panel with model and other information A Network Details panel displays VLAN s by ID VLAN s by Port or STP Data Click the button in the upper right corner of the panel to select among those options LB Details ForceS4810P_11 10 128 6 11 Return to previous Alarms Performance Indicators Details Severity Date Opened Event Hame authenticetionFall CPU Utilization 0
64. arrows to select Key Variables from Available Variables The variables considered keys for correlation are the key bindings for the target alarm in the correlation process This means that if event A is defined to include event B as a correlated event comparison of the key bindings defined for event B is also considered when comparing a new alarm for event A to an existing alarm for event B Event Definitions Key Portlets Contacts The contact portlet displays available contacts for your system There is no expanded version of this portlet You can right click to act on the the selected contact with the following menu items New Open Displays the Contacts Editor where you can create new contacts or alter existing ones Details Displays a screen with contact associated alarms and the information entered in Contacts Editor Contacts PX O Settings o Refresh Search Contact idv Company First lame Last Name Work Phone 2 USA Juni Juniper Netwo Juniper Netwo USA 1 888 314 JTAC 2 Phil ext1087 A JTAC US Juniper Netwo Juniper Techni JTAC USA 1 888 314 JTAC 2 it dorad 2 EXTRTAC Extreme Netw Extreme Tech EXTRTAC US 888 257 3000 1 CISCO TA Cisco TAC 1 800 553 2447 D2 gt Visualize Displays a mapping of the selected contact s association to devices See Chapter 5 Visualize Delete Displays a mapping of the selected contact s association to devices Vi
65. clarify such attributes by combining them with others that spell out their source Event Processing Rules Key Portlets 127 Event Definitions You can define how the system treats messages events coming into the Zi Event Definitions so as system Administrators can define event behavior deciding whether it is suppressed rejected or generates an AMiAlarms MB wmialarmsci 13614134 AO Alarm Alarm Manage the definitions of events WLSX TRAP wisxPortentr 1 3 6 1 4 1 14 AOS Suppress O Settings o Refresh Search MIB Name y Event Name Hotification Severity Default Beh Suppress in this portlet WLSX TRAP wisxSwitchLi 1 3 6 1 4 1 14 YWWLSX TRAP wIsxAPEntry 1361 4 1 14 Suppress In this screen you can configure events that when correlated as described m WLSX TRAP wisxWindow 1 3 6 1 4 1 14 ESR T Suppress Event Processing Rules on page 108 0e trigger actions Columns include the MIB Name Event Name Notification OID Severity for associated alarms and Default Behavior See Event Definition Editor for how to alter these Right click a selected event definition for the following menu items YWWLSX TRAP wisxAPRadio 1 3 6 1 4 1 14 Suppress 3 4 PM Edit Fither open the selected event in Event Definition Editor or open a details panel for the underlying equipment Set Behavior This lets you select from the following options Reject Every
66. content of action e mail These appear classified as follows e Basic Variables Managed Equipment Variables Entity Type Port Event Processing Rules Key Portlets e Entity Type Interface Logical interface CAUTION To successfully retrieve Custom attributes you must first create them See Edit Custom Attributes on page 89 You can also configure more limited variables that are slightly more efficient in performance if not as detailed as those described in the following section For example you can retrieve the following attributes RedCell RedCell RedCcell RedCell RedCell Config EquipmentManager_Customl Config EquipmentManager_Custom2 Config EquipmentManager_LastBackup Config EquipmentManager_LastConfigChange and Config EquipmentManager_HealthStatus K NOTE If the entity does not contain return these values then the message No data for lt attribute name gt appears in the email instead Basic Variables Attribute Description Email Action Variable Name The event alarm name Name Message Description from the event Message Entity Name The entity interface card name EntityName Equipment Manager The name of the equipment parent or chassis EquipMgrName Name Device IP address the IP of the device in alarm DevicelP Entity Type Type of entity Router and so on EntityType Instance ID An identifier for the event InstanceID Protocol Type Of originat
67. defined here Permissions for User Group Permission Setting No data is available to display F Apply container permission changes also to any explicit authorization entries in descendant containers Configure Membership for Container 4 Create Gold Customer as a Top Level Container 5 Make it Shared and configure its membership Select and Add a group of devices Set Authorization for User Container 6 Inthe Authorizations tab Add Gold Customer with limited permission and User Synergy Admin with full permission 7 Delete Group User 8 Create a Gold Customer user as described above Set up a Page for Device Level View 9 Adda Container View to the page of interest with portlets for which you want to restrict access Currently Container View is enabled for the following portlets Managed Resources Alarms Ports Audit Trails Printers 60 Redcell gt Database Aging Policies DAP Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 10 Log out as admin and log back in as a user with Gold Customer permissions 11 Confirm your permission configuration is operating on this page Quick Navigation The Quick Navigation portlet lets you quickly perform some basic tasks Resource Discovery Discover devices in your network with the Quick Discovery defaults or lets you construct a Quick Discovery profile if none exists See Resource Discovery on page 152 for details Link Discovery After you have discovered reso
68. delimiters works Here is an example of a command line with a mandatory and optional Attribute show lt mandatory gt optional If you set the lt mandatory gt Attribute to interface and do not set the optional one then the resulting command would be this show interface If you set the lt mandatory gt Attribute to interface and set optional to brief then the resulting command would be show interface brief Conditional Blocks Every line in the script is presumably a command to be sent to the device except for lines that denote either a beginning or ending of a conditional block The begin conditional block marker is tied to a Attribute and has the following syntax lt optional open delimiter gt IF optional attribute lt optional close delimiter gt The end conditional block marker has the following syntax lt optional open delimiter gt ENDIF optional text lt optional close delimiter gt Here is an example of a conditional block where the Attribute delimiters are lt gt optional delimiter is and the conditional Attribute variable is set IF set execute this command and execute this command ENDIF set If the Attribute set has a value then the block is evaluated otherwise it is ignored The text after ENDIF that is set or whatever is not required and it is ignored Nested conditional blocks are allowed Adaptive CLI Script Language Syntax Actions and Adaptive CLI 359 360 Perl Scr
69. edit backed up configuration files See File Management on page 223 for details Links Create a new link or discover links between members of the selected group and others See New Link on page 175 and Link Discovery on page 176 for details Managed Resources Resource Management 171 Performance Select from the following options Show Performance This displays a dashboard with various performance metrics for the selected device These can include packet counts RTT round trip time measure ments and CPU Memory utilization graphs Performance Dashboard for 192 168 0 244 01 08 06 08 11 08 16 08 21 08 il 01 08 06 08 16 08 21 08 26 08 PacketCount pkts Mn MinRTT ms 9 7 5 3 1 06 08 11 08 16 08 21 08 il 01 08 06 08 16 08 21 08 26 08 AvagRTT ms Y MaxRTT ms 02 08 07 08 12 08 17 08 22 08 27 08 CPU Utilization 2 Memory Utilization See Dashboard Views on page 277 for more about re using and managing these capabilities Show Top Talkers This displays a Top Talkers Dashboard of performance metrics for the selected resource Use the icon in the top right corner to re configure the default dis play See Dashboard Views on page 277 and Top Asset Monitors on page 276 for more information Show Key Metrics This lets you see available key metrics for the selected resource and con figure their display Resource Groups This lets you add the selected device to new Dynamic or Static groups or
70. examining it in a Container View portlet Container View Resource Management Map Context In addition to displaying filtered by container portlets you can view discovered devices in the Map Context portlet automatically placed by location EE Container View x E MapContext PX Cinemark 1 Top Container A DeliF CXE48S1 10 20 1 175 10 20 1 175 RA Foxe24S 10 20 1 174 10 20 1 174 m A2H124 5 51 10 128 5 51 FR TurbolronTX24_177 10 20 1 177 Notice that you can move the center of the map with the arrows in its upper left corner above the zoom in out buttons The menu in the upper right corner lets you select a Map or Satellite views and fine tune them to include labels terrain and so on You can configure locations with the Tag menu item See Tag on page 90 for an explanation Map Context Resource Management 151 Map Context without Containers If a page has no containers then the Map Context can act like a container too It displays all tagged resources within the system see Tag on page 90 Clicking on a tagged item behaves like clicking a Container confining displayed resources alarms and so on to those for the selected tag E Map Context x E Managed Resources rx Settings G Refresh Search Network Status Namow IP Address Vendor Model Y Namow Equipment Port Typo State 209 EE NG_GSM7252PS_9 10 128 4 9 Ethernet Port le 208 E NG_GSM7252PS_9 10
71. for the SMyCommandList count n y Actions 7 Settings Refresh Search Hame y B Update Resource Group 23 Update Resource 2 Undeploy Service Policy 2 Unacknowledge Alarm Action 3 Task Collection Runner 2 Sync Allocations Family RC Inventory RC Inventory Service Policy EM Task Pool 0e 3 4 Target Entity Type Group Managed Equipment Policy Alarm Equipment and Subcomponents listed Action The Family column describes the type of Action K NOTE For ACLI to be fully functional you must install Perl on your application server See Perl on page 32 for more about this Actions Portlet Actions and Adaptive CLI 335 Expanded Actions Portlet The expanded portlet adds columns for Description Last Web Service ID Access Level Web Service Deployment and Supports Groups 3 Actions 4 Return to previous Default Activities Filter hd Advanced Filter Hame y Family Target Entity Type Description Web Service ID Access Level Web Service Supports Groups Deployment Update Resource RC Inventory Group Update Resource Gr Public Undeployed Search lt Refresh Settings lt 3 Update Resource RC Inventory Managed Equipment Update Resource Public Undeployed 23 Undeploy Servic Service Policy Policy Undeploy Service Pol Public Undeployed 3 Unacknowledge EM Alarm Unacknowledge Alarm Public Undepl
72. greater than 10000 can be a set of conditions that only has to occur once to satisfy this monitor s condition Click Save to accept your edits or Cancel to abandon them Resource Monitors Monitoring 261 xX How To Create an SNMP Interface Monitor 262 To set up a typical performance monitor follow these steps 1 In the Resource Monitors portlet and create a new monitor by right clicking and selecting New 2 Select the type of monitor from the submenu for this example an SNMP Interfaces monitor K NOTE Some devices have ports rather than interfaces This monitor works for them too even though it is an interface monitor 3 In the General screen enter a polling interval 5 minutes is the default For this example check Retain polled data and accept the remaining defaults for checkboxes and the retention policy 4 Select an entity to monitor by clicking the Add button in the top portion of the Monitor Options screen For an interface monitor select Interface as the Type at the top of the screen You can also filter the list of interfaces that appear further by selecting Interface Type as ge gigabit ethernet for example Tip Notice that you can add refinements like filtering on Administrative State and IP Address to the filter 5 Select interfaces Ctrl click to add more than one then click Add Selection then Done to confirm your entity Tip Hover your cursor over a line describing an interface to
73. highest number For example 9 99 999 1010 Valid Values Enter ranges of valid values as described in Decimal above Editable Valid Values Check to enable editing of default or entered integer Long Default Value Enter a default long Constraints Enter a range of acceptable numbers separated by a colon You can also include several numbers or ranges separated by the pipe character If you specify a range the lowest number must be to the left of the highest number For example 9 99 999 1010 Actions Portlet Actions and Adaptive CLI 345 346 Valid Values Enter ranges of valid values as described in Decimal above Inventory Reference Select the Reference Type entity with the list that appears when you click the green plus then use the side by side widget s arrows to move available attributes from Available to Selected You can change the Reference Type by deleting it with the red minus then selecting a new type with the green plus String Default String Enter a default string Valid Values Enter valid values as described in Coded Value above Editable Valid Values Check to enable editing valid values Constraint Enter the regular expression constraints if any on the string attribute Constraint Description Enter the message to appear if the regular expression constraints are not met Min Max Length Enter the minimum maximum number of characters in a valid string Click Apply t
74. input_source m description print Success 322 ProScan Portlet Change Management ProScan else print Failure no description found Tip Notice that you can also combine these scans with the Edit Source Group Criteria regular expressions to streamline them Java Groovy When you select Groovy as the type of Config term an editor appears that lets you enter that type of scans E rails oo liar Hulisi General Targets EN Editing Compliance Policy Criteria go Input Source Properties Select Criteria Match Type y Groovy public class ProscanGroovy implements IGroovyCommon ii Method should return Success or Failure result public String valid String input if input contains shutdown input contains description return Success else return Failure no description found Y Apply Cancel As the screen says this implements ProScanGroovy or Groovy Java classes The method should return Success or Failure results and assumes public String validate String input precedes what you enter in the text editor The following is example of the type of Java code you can enter that scans for contents like description in shut down interfaces and prints output Success visible in the Audit viewer when it finds a matching term like description in whatever source you select if input contains shutdown input contains descripti
75. is no validation to ensure this date is the current one Adaptive CLI Select a desired Show Adaptive CLI to scan the target device below the radio button The policy configured scans the show results and that show appears in the Audit screen ProScan Portlet Change Management ProScan 311 Targets The top of this screen Current Inherited Targets displays any targets inherited from already configured ProScan Groups Click Add Targets in the Current Implicit Targets panel at the bottom to select equipment that are targets to scan with this policy You can also select listed equipment click the Remove icon to delete it from the list edition Gemolianes Polley unsure Shale ni A oaio General targets Criteria Current Inherited Targets from Proscan Groups Name No data is available to display Current Implicit Targets Add Targets Name LS JuniperMS 10128315 10 128 3 15 lal Save x Close Tip Use filtering in the subsequent selector screen to make individual selection easier but do not forget this is not dynamic selection You must assign policies whenever your managed environment adds new equipment To provide information for individual policies that are part of groups this screen displays inherited group targets grayed out See Creating or Modifying ProScan Policy Groups on page 325 for more about groups 312 ProScan Portlet Change Management ProScan
76. last compliant or not compliant last config date when configuration last changed last checked date when change was last determined Compliance and Change Reporting Change Management ProScan 329 330 You can also run the Change Determination Report that displays changes made to configurations B Lopai yuani Bonitos Buanna ponte see dady ga chi By OL giant RASH a Created By admin Comment Share Configuration Change Report Default Inventory Report containing the Configuration changes to the Devices in the Inventory Run At Mon Apr 18 10 38 42 PDT 2011 Data Collected Mon Apr 18 10 38 41 PDT 2011 Filter Summary Match All of the following Type In Config Change Equipment Configuration Change tor Equipment Group All Devices Mon 18 Apr 2011 10 38 42 Page 1of1 Name IP Address Change Date Changed By Changes Removed Added Jun118 test 192 168 1 118 Jun118 test 192 168 1 118 Jun118 test 192 168 1 118 Jun 18 test 192 168 1 118 192 168 1 118 192 168 1 118 192 168 1 118 192 168 1 118 4 2 08 9 50 AM 42 08 1000 AM 42108 1000 AM 42 08 1001 AM There are 4 admin admin admin admin Equipment General configuration changed Equipment Location configuration changed Equipment Location configuration changed 1 Last changed 1999 05 14 20 54 25 PDT 20 161 location postabcode 99068 description testing records
77. log in you can select a password reminder If you have forgotten your password click the Forgot Password link in the initial screen to begin a sequence that concludes by mailing your user s e mail address a password Z CAUTION For this forgotten password sequence to work you must configure users e mails correctly Click the link that is your user name in the upper right corner of the portal to configure your account s settings for this and other things The same configuration settings are available in Control Panel s tabs labeled as your login The application server hostname is the name of the system where OpenManage Network Manager is installed HTTPS You can connect to application server securely by configuring the included Apache Tomcat server for secure access Consult your favorite search engine for more detailed information about setting up SSL with Tomcat web servers The following sections discuss typical administrative steps in getting started once you have installed OpenManage Network Manager See Getting Started on page 27 for a list of and links to other initial tasks once you have installed Dell OpenManage Network Manager 32 Installation and Startup Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager Changing the Session Timeout Period The timeout for the web portal extends automatically if data is changing onscreen Nevertheless you can change the timeout period with non override able properties in some f
78. may appear out of proportion The total of Used plus Free memory may appear to be much smaller than the Total Memory bar 244 OpenManage Network Manager Server Statistics Monitoring Resource Monitors This summary screen displays E Resource Monitors e e currently active performance monitors in brief 17 Settings 47 Refresh Search The Name column displays the Mame y Enabled Monitor T of Assets Monitored identifier for each monitor instance Defaut Q Key Mers 1 i j if it 1 Available Enable displays a green check if it is Detaut ani Y mas aia tly enabled or a red minus if it abi unen y 4 Defaut Inter Y SNMP Interf is disabled Default ICM ICMP Default Cisc Q Key Metrics Hot Availa The Monitor Type column typically displays what the monitor covers Hover your cursor Enabled O Freed over this column to see a popup with the selected ame Defaut Juniper Monitor gt Description Default key metrics monitor for Juniper monitor s properties The popup that appears after devices Target Count 3 this query displays the relevant information for the monitor including whether it is Enabled Name Cocina Papers Description Target Count Retention Policy and Polling Interva 5 Minutes Polling Interval Value Retention Policy Default The graph that appears to the right of the monitors displays the aggregate availability information for the enabled monitors To
79. message click on it and those details appear in the lowest panel of this screen If you click on a summary message not a leaf on the tree a graph appears displaying the duration for its component messages Hover your cursor over each portion of the graph for more details Tip The time for messages and logged in user initiating the action appear on the bar between the upper and lower screen and an icon summarizing the action appears on its right Click the second icon from the left to configure the amount of detail displayed in audit messages Click the first Refresh icon to re display messages if you re configure the type s displayed Close the audit trail viewer any time and the action continues in the background The the audit trail is archived in the portlet described in Audit Trail Portlet on page 93 Audit Trail Jobs Screen Portal Conventions 91 Audit Trail Viewer Some portlets also offer an Audit Trail menu item that displays Audit Trail Jobs Screens for the selected item aude Audit Record s Creation Date y Subject Action User ID Status 5 25 11 4 51 PM NG_NAS_15 10 128 12 15 Equipment Resyne amp User 5 24 11 8 51 AM NG_NAS_15 10 128 1215 3 Equipment Resyne A netgear Job for Selected Record e g Creating managed object for device found at 10 128 12 15 Ea e A seat est am E sem e51 am di netgear x Close The top of this s
80. network latency limit how quickly your system can respond Tip If you use management systems other than this one you must perform a device level resync before performing configuration actions Best practice is to use a single management tool whenever possible Feedback Preface 13 14 A Note About Performance Preface Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager Overview This chapter describes how to install and start Dell OpenManage Network Manager for basic network monitoring and management For more detailed descriptions of all this software s features consult its other manuals the OpenManage Network Manager Administration Section of the User Guide Synergy User Guide Administration Section and User Guide or the online help Tip If you want to find something but are unsure about which manual it is in you can search all text in the Acrobat files in a single directory You can also click on the blue cross references to go to the target destination of cross references in Acrobat however for such electronic cross references to the other documents to work they must be in the same directory Cross document links do not work between documents for different versions of this software but may provide an approximate location to consult If you are sure your hardware software and network is correct and just want to get started immediately go to Getting Started on page 27 The Dell OpenManage Network Manager porta
81. of the screen appears It has the following fields Column Text The column label Horizontal Alignment Right Left Center the default Column Width The column width in characters Sort Priority Configures report sorting Define the attribute sort order here You can sort within a sort so you can sort on Name and then by Location and then by IP Address and so on The number configures the sort group so sorts then 2 within 1 then 3 and so on Font Size The data s font size Font Background Color The color for the text background Click the field to open a color chooser Report Templates Resource Management 199 200 Calculation Type How to calculate for summarizing the numeric data Select from the available options Average High Low Sum Click Save to preserve any template you have configured or Close to close the editor screens without saving Reports This portlet s summary screen lists the available reports that you can run with Dell OpenManage Network Manager B Reports pH X 17 Settings A Refresh Search Report Name y Report Template Title 8 Software Change Report Software Inventory Change Templ Software Inventory Change Report Juniper ISIS Information Juniper ISIS Template Isis Juniper Bootp Interfaces Juniper Bootp Interface Template Bootp Interfaces Juniper Bootp Juniper Bootp Template Bootp Servers B Juniper BGP Information Juniper BGP Template BGP Juniper BGP Group
82. practice is to override properties as described in Overriding Properties on page 23 For example show perf exclude CPU Utilization AvgRT T If you define this property the Show Performance command creates charts for the listed attributes This has no impact on manually created dashboards K NOTE You must restarttomcat after changing the properties file for the changes to take effect Retention Policies The basis of all reporting and dashboard presentations is retained data from established monitors In other words each monitor provides a simple schema from which you can produce a chart graph or report Resource Monitors Monitoring To reduce resource impacts the scope of retained data may exclude some of the collected data A monitor may have no retained data and only emit events based on transient results in the execution calculation For example the application can derive a metric from several collected values and you may opt to retain only the derived result Retention Policies Add Hame y Description Detail Data days Hourly days Daily days Action Test Policy This is atest policy 1 7 90 1213 Default Default 1 7 90 1214 All monitors rely on a polling engine which provides runtime mediation activities for distributed device interaction at regular intervals Monitors may share a retention policy Data is rolled up hourly and daily into summary data The retention policy controls ho
83. preserve the group you have configured Managed Resource Groups Resource Management Dynamic Group In contrast to Static Groups Dynamic Groups do not let you select individual equipment You simply configure a filter and OpenManage Network Manager creates the group on the fly After you enter the Name and Category for the group create the filter To see what the group would look like click Preview Group This opens the Preview tab concealing the General tab To return to General click that at the top of the screen Click Save to preserve the group configuration or Cancel to exit without saving del Sri estres rua DEIA ENES ganso yale ED Preview Resource Group Parameters Hame Dell devices supporting ICMP Optional Unique identifier Specify Resource Filter E model y does not begin with y Forceto o lel Save JO Preview Group Cancel Be Srita pasua us Dall elage ans Eia cont CEB Dynamic Resource Group Membership Preview Network Status Mame y IP Address Vendor Model Type Responding PowerConnect B TI24 Responding Responding Responding Responding Not Responding RA PCMB024K_242 10 10 201 242 Responding Responding Responding Responding Responding Responding Responding Responding Responding Responding dy 4P93 Responding RA TurbolronTx24_17 10 201 177 fed Pcreo24_221 10 2 10 201 221 R PCT5548_173 10 2 10 201
84. previous screen within the portal For example Return to previous clicking Back within a breadcrumb trail of links returns to the root of that trail If it is available the Return to previous button in the upper right corner of a screen provides the most dependable way to return to a previous screen Show Versions To see which products are installed and what versions select the Manage gt Show Versions menu item This can be critical information if you request support for your Dell OpenManage Network Manager installation The Application Software Versions screen appears with the product versions listed in the bottom Device drivers list supported devices and their operating systems This can be important for troubleshooting and is vital information for support K NOTE Tabs can display more information about supported devices Portal Overview Portal Conventions The Dock This menu bar appears at the top of portal pages Its exact appearance depends on your package With it you can open online help add edit and navigate to portal pages and content Click the down arrow to see menus for items on the dock Here are its functions Help Opens the online help Add This menu lets you add Pages or Applications Tip The breadcrumb trail that appears near the top of pages lets you navigate directly through the hierarchy of parent child pages directly by clicking links displayed there The More menu it
85. results v Users Deactivate Click MyCorp and a screen appears displaying its components and a management menu where you can add additional properties Click Assign Organization Roles in the MyCorp menu Select Organization Administrator from the default roles available If you need permissions other than this administrative user provides you can create an organization role with the correct permissions in Portal gt Roles Click the Available tab and select TestUserBoss as the organization s administrator Click Update Associations You can click the Admin location and similarly configure its user as associated with an organizational role Do the same for Headquarters Tip You are a member of the organization you created because you created it By creating an organization you become both a member and have the Organization Owner role which gives you full rights to the organization Control Panel Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 39 Public Private Page Behavior Public pages are visible to everyone private pages are only visible to the user who created them and are not vulnerable to others changing their arrangement Page Standard settings are Max Items Default Filter Max Items per Page and Column Configuration These persist for Admin users or for users who have the portlet on their Public or Private pages which makes them the owner of that instance Some portlets provide extra setting
86. target Adaptive CLIs Details Opens a screen displaying the Reference Tree Execution History and Action Details for the selected Action Web Services You can elect to Deploy Undeploy or Export WSDL to create a web service from the selected Action Deploy Undeploy Web Service Deploy or undeploy the selected activity as a web service Export WSDL This exports the WSDL for the selected activity You must select the file name and location Web Services Description Language WSDL is an XML format for the description of network services as a set of endpoints operating on messages containing either document oriented or procedure oriented information Actions Portlet Actions and Adaptive CLI 337 History Displays the history of the selected action Seton alaridos story liso tos oro turola Results Device llame y Execution Date Result Version User ID Actions Router yourdomain com 10 128 2 10 6 24 11 1 40 PM Failed A admin E Router 192 168 1138 6 24 11 1 40 PM Succeed 1 A admin en E9 Router 10128 2135 6 24 11 1 40 PM Succeed 1 A admin el 2 CiscoME3400 10128231 oware net 10 128 2 31 6 2411 1 40 PM Succeed al A admin el 2 CiscoME3400 10128230 10 128 2 30 6 24 11 1 40 PM Succeed 1 A admin el 2 Execution Details COMTE Sent Commands Find Gig Go 44Router yourdomain com 10 128 2 11 10 128 2 11 E show protocols Global values ternet Protocol routing is enabled BBav
87. the checkboxes to enable the type of permission desired 7 To do more with Dell OpenManage Network Manager s functional permissions go to the Redcell gt Permission Manager and click to open this screen 8 The Role to Permission mapping screen appears Click the Edit button to the right of listed Roles to see and configure available permissions 9 Click Advanced to see available permissions organized by Read Write Execute Add or Delete actions 40 Control Panel Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 10 After you have selected permissions click Apply to accept them and add them to the role Notice that you can revisit this role manage it and its membership with the Action button to the right of the role You can also add users to the group by selecting and editing that user Portal gt Roles Roles determine the applications permissions available to users assigned them manage them in this screen To configure functional permissions for the application see Redcell gt Permission Manager on page 42 Click Add to create a Regular Role Site Role or Organizational Role A Regular Role assigns its permissions to its members A Site or Organizational Role assigns its permissions to a site or organization to which you can assign users Click the Action button to the right of a role to Edit view or alter Permissions Assign Members this last works to see and assign users You can also assign role members in the P
88. the data type of the custom attribute String Integer Date Boolean read only When you select Boolean the field is a checkbox Tooltip The tip that appears when you hover the cursor over the custom field Click Save to preserve any changes you have made or Cancel to abandon them Common Menu Items Portal Conventions 89 View as PDF This displays the selected asset s information as a PDE Bia Saleeiton ay POF Alarm Tue Apr 12 10 09 37 PDT 2011 Severity 6 Critical Assigned User Acknowledged false Date Opened 04 12 11 09 08 30 AM Count 1 Entity Name 2 0 36 NetgearGSM7252PS 1_9 10 128 4 9 Unit 2 Slot 2 0 Device IP 10 128 4 9 Entity Type Port Event Name linkDown Message ifIndex 88 K gt You can search print or save this to file and use any of the other Acrobat capabilities Clicking the acrobat logo docks the floating disappearing Acrobat toolbar within this screen Tip To search the PDF produced click the binocular icon in the docked toolbar You can also create PDF reports containing descriptions of multiple selected assets but you must open an expanded portlet to multi select Tag The right click menu of many items lets you tag them for example Managed Resources Locations Contacts Customers Services and Containers When you select the Tag menu item and Coordinates a new Map popup appears see Tag on page 138 and you can search for an address or click on the map to specif
89. the latest version of Java v 1 6 or later Adobe s Flash and Adobe s Acrobat that works with these browsers Flash Overview Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 19 for 64 bit browsers is currently a preliminary version but you can typically run a 32 bit browser even in a 64 bit operating system so Flash features will still be available even if you do not want to run Adobe s beta software K NOTE If Flash is installed but the screen still requests it reload the page in the browser Also Your screen must be at least 1250 pixels wide Tip When no cursor or focus is onscreen some browsers interpret backspace as the Previous button Single Server Sizing The following describes hardware and sizing configuration for common Dell OpenManage Network Manager deployments Before any deployment administrators should review and understand the different deployment options and requirements Consider future growth of the network when estimating hardware sizing You can generally expand modern systems running Dell OpenManage Network Manager by adding more RAM to the host server s Selecting expandable hardware may also be critical to future growth For ease of management deployments selection best practice is to use the fewest possible servers Standalone single server deployment offer the simplest and easiest management solution Where high availability HA is required you can produce the simplest deployme
90. the side by side comparison External Commands External commands are essentially scripts that run in the Dell OpenManage Network Manager environment For example you could run the DOS dir command and schedule its execution You can execute external commands with a device as target using device attributes as input parameters to the Adaptive CLI script See some of the Seeded Scripts on page 354 Audit Trail When you execute a script the audit screen displays information about it T e ACUON Command pen itp wo ED Processing Task command perl http Y Executing 2 Tesk s YY Processing Task command perl http on target NO_NAS_15 172 17 101 18 o Executing Adaptive CLI command perl http o Running script Script 1 click here to see command list 0 Adaptive CLI execution completed click here for details o Set attribute extraction results click here tor details E Completed Task Status Executed o Processing Task command perl http on target NG_XSM7224S_41 10 128 4 41 E Executing Adaptive CLI command perl http o Running script Script 1 click here to see command list 0 Adaptive CLI execution completed click here for details A Set attribute extraction results click here for details Completed Task Status Executed Ea E 63m 3 19PM perl owareapps performance scripts http_test pl 172 17 101 18 352 External Commands Actions and Adaptive CLI
91. the triangle and a popup appears describing the device whether the alarm is on the device or a child and what is its severity The alarms indicated are like alarms described in the portlet Alarms on page 100 K NOTE The displayed alarms in the Alarms portlet may not be up to date or may differ from those within Visualizations Resyncing alarms and or refreshing the browser resolves this difference Alarms in Visualizations Topologies Visualize 219 Links in Visualization When you have discovered links between devices in your network see Link Discovery on page 176 they appear in the visualization Hover the cursor over a link and a panel appears with the link information Name Type for example Ethernet A Z Names for the endpoints K NOTE Dell OpenManage Network Manager currently does not support displaying one ended links 220 Links in Visualization Visualize File Server File Management File Servers You must configure FTP and or TFTP file servers to push and pull configuration files to and from devices or to deploy firmware updates With this portlet you can switch between internal and external file server mode and Show or Hide not applicable File Servers depending on the file server mode by checking unchecking the Show All Servers check box When this is un checked only the relevant file server s appear onscreen Right clicking a file server or the empty list spa
92. these initial steps Dell OpenManage Network Manager helps you understand and troubleshoot your network For example Suppose a OpenManage Network Manager Performance Dashboard displays something you want to troubleshoot You can right click the impacted device in the Visualize topology view to access configuration and actions The color of the icon in this view indicates the highest severity alarm on the device or its sub components For example red indicates a Critical alarm Displays include right click access to the Details screen see Equipment Details on page 178 where you can examine each section of device information and right click to see further applicable actions For example right click to Show Performance and edit and or save that view of performance as another Performance Dashboard Performance can also display portlets that Show Top Talkers the busiest devices or Show Key Metrics From looking at Performance Dashboards or Top Asset Monitors you may conclude some configuration changes made memory consumption spike Right click to access resource actions under File Management that let you see the current configuration files on devices and compare current to previous You can also back up devices see Backup Configurations on page 225 and restore previously backed up files see Restore Configurations on page 227 Finally you may simply want to Resync another right click menu item to insure the device and your management system
93. tions may originate from the traps of network devices or may indicate an occurrence such as the closing of a form Events have the potential of becoming alarms EVENT DEFINITION Parameters that define what an event does For example you can tell Oware that the event should be to wait for incoming data from a remote database then have the Oware application perform a certain action after it receives the data EVENT INSTANCE A notification sent between two Oware components An event instance is the action the event performs per the event definition EVENT TEMPLATE Defines how an event is going to be handled EVENT THRESHOLD Number of events within a given tomfooleries that must occur before an alarm is raised EXPORTING Saving business objects packages or solution blades to a file for others to import Glossary FILE LOCATION P Archive OMNM_5 Glossary fm FILTER In network security a filter is a program or section of code that is designed to examine each input or output request for certain qualifying criteria and then process or for ward it accordingly GUI Graphical User Interface ISATAP The Intra Site Automatic Tunnel Addressing Protocol ISATAP is an IPv6 tran sition mechanism which is defined as a tunneling IPv6 interface and is meant to transmit IPv6 packets between dual stack nodes on top of an IPv4 network Key In cryptography a key is a variable value that is applied using an
94. to each monitor attribute The Reassign button reassigns the letters This is useful if some attributes have been deleted and their letters are no longer used 254 Resource Monitors Monitoring The Configured Metrics table lists the calculated metrics An edit and delete action appears to the right of each row The Add button creates a new calculated metric and the Remove All button deletes all the calculated metrics RESTAN Hajali ytoeiies loeieur General Monitor Options Es Thresholds Inventory Mappings Conditions Metric Attribute Legend Reassign Assigned Formula Code Attribute Hame ifinDiscards ifinErrors ifinNUcastPkts ifnOctets ifinUcastPkts ifOutDiscards x D2 gt Configured Metrics Add Remove All Name Type Max Value Formula Action Unicast pkts Count Counter E J 2 a Errors and Discards Count Counter A B F G 1213 Unicast pkts Gauge E J 100 L L iF Packets Total Gauge C E H J 100 L 214 BYY Util Gauge D 1 40000 K L 1214 BW Xmit Gauge 1 80000 K L 1213 la Save Cancel Clicking on the Add button or edit button displays the calculation editor Editor aleta dios BW Recy Unique ID eas o SS Calculation Type Units to be displayed in charts Max Value Max Value for chart axis Formula D 80000 K L Formula used to calculate attribute value lel Save Cancel This panel contains the following properties N
95. up the database and any other resources that need manual installation Consult Release notes for a list of these 5 Proceed with the upgrade Disable Firewalls System gt Administration gt Firewall You may be prompted to enter the root password the password dialog may be hidden behind the Firewall Configuration Startup dialog Directories and Permissions Create the directory for the installation 1 Open a terminal 2 Change to Super User su lt enter gt password 3 Create directory and configure its ownership and permissions Overview Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 17 mkdir opt chown your login name opt your installation directory chmod 775 opt your installation directory K NOTE your login name is the original non root user available when you imported the machine Replace your login name with whichever user you are logged in as or will be installing as You may need to change the permissions on the installer in our package in order to give it execute rights If you have used the shared folder method from above you can give the Linux installer rights as follows chmod uga x Install Media Path install linux_install Make sure that there is no other my cnf file under the etc directory If there is do the following mv etc my cnf etc my cnf original 32 bit Linux Libraries For Red Hat Enterprise 64 bit installations you must identify the appropriate package conta
96. you have refreshed your browser so cached images do not interfere with current ones Visualize My Network Visualize 207 208 Configuring Views Click and drag displayed portions of this screen to see other parts of the topology To move the display more click in the OVERVIEW panel You can also expand collapse the panels on the left of the screen by clicking their title bars Figures below display them expanded Control and Styles LEGEND ZOOM 2 Simple Edge 2 LE le h AutoFit Hierarchical Layer Physical Edges lt L5 Mbps gt 1 5 Mbps amp lt 10 Mbps STYLE OPTIONS gt 10 Mbps amp lt 100 Mbps DISPLAYED LEVELS PERT E Filters Set style label and tooltip options for graph gt 100 Mbps amp lt 1 Gbps elements gt 1 Ghps lt 10 Gbps gt 10 Ghps Unknown Speed i Node Style amp Tooltip wher Edge Style amp Tooltip Background Image VIEW DETAILS Name Not Saved Save Load Existing bi Data Node Finder Layout OVERVIEW p n Hover the cursor over an icon or link between icons to see a small screen describing its contents and alarm state Click an icon to highlight it or click its name in the GRAPH INVENTORY tab list and its connections to the network See Alarms in Visualizations Topologies on page 219 for more about the alarm states indicated by icons in topology CAUTION If you have installed a
97. 0 00 Snap Panels X Close See Compliance Policy Summary on page 308 for a description of the snap panel that appears below the listed policies in this manager Compliance Policy Summary This snap panel appears at the bottom of the expanded portlet described in ProScan Portlet on page 306 It catalogs the compliance policy s history and lists the Equipment Equipment Stetis LasRimbie scanned a status icon indicating whether the run PA Forcess0_0 3421 31 PM discovered equipment in green or out red of FU Forces4810 3 5112 1 31 PM compliance If you added equipment to a policy before it 308 ProScan Portlet Change Management ProScan has run you may also see a Not Executed blue status Each run date for the policy and equipment combination selected in the list at the top of the detail panel screen appears as a row in this panel Tip You can also see compliance failure messages in OpenManage Network Manager s audit trails Compliance scans do not stop the first time they fail They continue so all failures of compliance in the entire device configuration appear cataloged in the result Each time OpenManage Network Manager executes a compliance policy it stores a history record in the database Similarly edits to these policies update history records When you edit a compliance policy to add remove equipment OpenManage Network Manager creates or deletes the corresponding history record
98. 0 128 3 15 Managed Equipment Ld SNMP Attributes Browse Add Remove All Name Oid Row Identifier Foreign Key Series Name Action ifindex 1361 2141 2211 instance Row ldentitier P kd dod 136 instance Rowldentifier 1213 Cancel Columns include the SNMP Attribute Name OID Row Identifier Foreign Key Series Name Meta Syntax Units and Action If you check the Collect from ifXTable checkbox then OpenManage Network Manager attempts to fetch attributes from the ifXTable These attributes are ifHighSpeed ifHCInOctets ifHCInUcastPkts if HCOutOctets and ifHCOutUcastPkts If any of these attributes are not available then it fetches from ifTable Clicking the Add or the Edit button to the right opens either a MIB Browser where you can retrieve these attributes or an Add Edit SNMP Attributes editor at the bottom of the screen See the following sections for details 274 Resource Monitors Monitoring MIB Browser This lets you select attributes to monitor as described in MIB Browser on page 188 The SNMP table monitor lets you pick a table column not the entire table Add Edit SNMP Attributes This screen lets you specify individual attributes lara Mess loner General Monitor options Calculated Metrics Thresholds Inventory Mappings Conditions Monitor Entities Add Remove All Entity Type Action M5 duniperMs 10128315 10 128 3 15 Managed Equipment L
99. 0 128 315 Success Juniper JUNOS show 815 11 9 58 AM amp duniperM5 10 1 serviceResyncNotification Service K 202 54 55 om Reference Tree Bindings MIB Details 2011 08 15 09 58 18 serviceResyncNotification servicellame 0 JuniperM5 NOTIFICATION OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 3477 397 24 oi 10 128 3 15 10 128 3 15_vrf1 MIB TEXT Service Modified Resync a SuniperM5 10 128 3 15 10 128 3 15_vrf1 augSth11_h augtht1_MSDP_PEER_1 11 16 serviceState 0 Provisioned serviceStatus 0 Ok serviceSummary 0 JuniperMS 10 128 3 15 10 128 3 15_vrft aug9th11_MSDP_PEER_1 1 1 16 714 sysUpTime 0 3 hours 18 mins 29 secs snmpTrapOID 0 1 3 6 1 4 1 3477 397 21 servicelD 0 714 serviceType 0 Juniper MSDP Peer Snap Panels X Close This screen has columns described in Alarms on page 100 or Expanded Alarm Portlet on page 102 Configure these as visible or hidden by clicking Settings The following are some additional columns available Receive Time The date the event was received Event Name The event identifier Location The location of the equipment emitting the event SubType A classification for the event For example Trap Protocol The protocol that delivered the event Frequently System indicating Dell OpenManage Network Manager itself delivered it Notification O D The object identifier OID for the event type Instance D The instance identifier for the event Event History Key Portlets 107 1
100. 08 Event History Snap Panels Click a listed alarm to display its details in the Snap Panels The Reference Tree displays the event s relationship to any alarms and to the source device Click the plus next to an item in the tree to unpack it The Bindings Snap Panel displays the event s varbind information including the trap OID the device s IP address and other event specific information The MIB Details Snap Panel includes MIB information like the Notification OID and MIB Text You can right click the listed events and Share with User see Sharing on page 87 or How to Show Hide Reorder Columns Event Processing Rules This portlet manages Dell OpenManage Network Manager s response to events By ka Eve rocosa es eases default it appears with seeded rules but o you can create your own New copy or Settings lt Refresh Search Rule Name y Rule Type Enabled System modify Copy or Open or delete Delete acosada gt alias existing rules by right clicking in the swSensorSenV2 Automation us portlet You can also Import and Export swFCPortScanv2 Automation tules to files swFautv2 Automation The Rule Type column indicates whether pal tules are Pre Processing Correlation or re Post Processing Automation 3119 N Icons in the Enabled and System columns indicate whether the rule is enabled green is enabled red is not and whether it is a System rule or a non system user crea
101. 20 09 30 09 40 Mame Exporter Summary Bytes Packets Bits Sec E Syslog 192 168 1111 2 10M8 104085 24477 When a detail view appears the entity type appears as in the title bar You can change to a Top Bottom n report of a different type then click refresh to display a report of the top entities that apply to the current detailed entity This process can continue until the conversation detail view is reached This is the end of the line 298 Traffic Flow Portlet Traffic Flow Analyzer To go back up through the drill down path the user can click anywhere on the navigation bar Detail for Conversation labapp2 oware net to from pc lab1 oware net Syslog Bytes Oj el ij 6 2 1 A Application Syslog Endpoint pc lab1 oware net Conversation labapp2 oware net tofrom pe tab1 oware net Syslog Conversations Detal Y Byles vw Ey Last Hour 1 200 0 00 1 100 0 00 1 000 0 00 09 00 i Time Endpoint A Direction Endpoint Z Bytes Packets Bits Sec Tue Mar 22 09 10 00 POT 2011 la E 1 11321 2660 Tue Mar 22 09 30 00 POT 2011 mM gt E 1 10728 2541 Tue Mar 22 09 20 00 POT 2011 mM 1M8 10691 2499 Tue Mar 22 09 00 00 POT 2011 a 118 10468 2468 Tue Mar 22 09 40 00 POT 2011 m 744KB 7m 1694 Traffic Flow Portlet Traffic Flow Analyzer 299 300 Search Search by clicking on the Search magnifying glass icon in the title bar Type any string in the next screen to search through t
102. 216 10201154 10 20 1 154 3 6 12 12 05 PM O DellEX8216 10201154 10 20 1 154 3 6 12 12 01 PM DelEx8216 10201154 10 20 1 154 3 6 12 12 01 PM O DellEX8216 10201154 10 20 1 154 3 6 12 12 00 PM Adaptive CLI Script Language Syntax Here s the Adaptive CLI scripting language syntax e CLI script is a line based syntax In other words each line s syntax has to be completed e CLI script supports primarily two features Attributes and Conditional Blocks Attributes Each attribute in the script is marked by a delimiter The following delimiters are supported lt gt 0 8 Q Think of Attribute delimiters as a pair of open close markers surrounding a variable name For single character Attribute delimiters there is no closing marker the close marker is empty Examples of Attributes are lt var gt var var var var Svar var var 358 Adaptive CLI Script Language Syntax Actions and Adaptive CLI The default mandatory delimiters are lt gt and the default optional delimiters are but you can change those default settings That means an Attribute variable like lt var gt may represent a mandatory or an optional Attribute depending on what are set as delimiters K NOTE Single delimiter symbols require a space after the attribute These do allow values immediately before the symbol Perl requires a space after the attribute or the attribute s closing delimiter but values immediately before single
103. 255 255 255 255 Address es v Online A green icon in the lower right corner indicates the device is online while the IP address of the device appears in title bar The IP address of Dell OpenManage Network Manager s server also appears in the lower left corner when the connection is active The following menus appear for your terminal session File This menu lets you Connect or Disconnect to the device Edit This menu lets you Copy or Paste text within the terminal session Click and drag to select text Terminal This menu lets you set Foreground and Background colors as well as configuring the Font and Buffer sizes Reset Terminal restores the defaults K NOTE Terminal is now an applet that requires a Java Runtime Environment be installed and associated to the browser as a plug in on the client machine Tip You can cut and paste from the Direct Access terminal 190 Direct Access Resource Management Ping ICMP Ping LabDistibution 10 128 0 1 g this menu item opens the default browser connected to the selected device An intervening dialog appears advising you about the required network conditions for a successful connection Ports Select this option from the Direct Access menu to initiate ICMP ping and to display a progress bar and graph of the selected device s ping responses Alternatively an error message can appear describing the device s lack of response
104. 3 224 You can also compare two different configurations Selected Config and Labeled Current Live Config in the tabs that appear on this screen with the Compare Files tab at the top Close the screen with the buttons at its bottom Notice you can also Backup or Restore what you are viewing with buttons at the bottom of the screen Assign Labels Use this option to select an existing label or create a new one You cannot assign System labels Current Compliant and so on Compare Current v Previous to Label Selected You can compare configurations by right clicking a device or two devices then selecting Compare If you right click a single device with a previous backup then the comparison is between the latest and next to latest backup If it does not have a previous backup then the menu offers to compare to a designated label You can compare two different Selected devices too Ctrl click to select two different devices before you Compare Notice that the Prev Next buttons at the bottom of this screen cycle through as many as five previous configuration files The comparison screen appears with the configurations side by side note the file names in TSR OO Beieuiestien File Kupu File Name DefaultConfig_2 Version 1 Last changed 1999 08 02 14 13 15 PD 2 version 11 1R2 3 3 groups 4 PROTECT_RE_CROUP mse04 5 logical systems 6 mse04 BURSA 65 ssh 66 protocol version vl v2 1 telne
105. 361 Scheduling Actions o o 361 Active Performance Monitor Support ooocccococococccc o 363 Adaptive CLI Records Archiving Policy 00 oo ooo ooo o 365 A vagie duties emeannad iathid ei 367 Preface Dell OpenManage Network Manager can give you automated consolidated configuration and control of your network s resources It is customizable unifying multiple systems while still communicating with other software systems like billing in generic WSDL XML and SOAP OpenManage Network Manager s Administration Section describes security and some of the runtime features supporting these applications The OpenManage Network Manager Administration Section of the User Guide and Administration Section discuss licensing Consult Release Notes for information about changes not covered in this Synergy User Guide Why Dell OpenManage Network Manager Dell OpenManage Network Manager s benefits Productive Discovery and wizard driven configuration features within minutes of installing Dell OpenManage Network Manager you can monitor your network Easy Dell OpenManage Network Manager provides the network information you need and offers advanced capabilities with minimal configuration overhead Valuable Dell OpenManage Network Manager often costs less to use and maintain than most other solutions Scalability You can scale Dell OpenManage Network Manager to almost any size Key Feature
106. 4 Copyright c 1999 2001 Juniper Networks Inc Graphs can appear as lines bars or pie graphs depending on the portlet device and activity monitored K NOTE Install the latest Adobe Flash for graph functionality Portlets Portlets are the elements of any page within the Dell OpenManage Network Manager web client Initially they appear in a small summary screen format Click Add gt More to add a portlet toa page you have created See Portlet Instances on page 81 below for the distinction between portlets that display the same data and portlets that can exist in more than one instance displaying different data For a more specific look at available portlets see the chapters following this one The following describe common portlet features One of the first portlets typical users see is Discovery Profiles Discovery Profiles e To act on listed items right click O settnge Qrenes Search A menu appropriate to the Hame y Description Default Scheduled Hext Execution Date portlet appears QAFTP_T Shared FTPAF Y No The title bar for the portlet Printers Discover Printers Q No displays its name To rename it Powervaut 9 No click on the name and the field Netscreen Q No becomes editable You can make MMCLab MMC simulatio Y No changes then click the green Sey Discover This profile will Y No checkbox to accept them or the o uv Kk EB 3 gt W red X to a
107. 6 Adaptive CLI Records Archiving Policy Actions and Adaptive CLI Glossary ACCESS CONTROL Refers to mechanisms and policies that restrict access to computer resources An access control list ACL for example specifies what operations different users can perform on specific files and directories ALARM A signal alerting the user to an error or fault Alarms are produced by events Alarms produce a message within the Alarm Window API Application Programing Interface A set of routines used by the application to direct the performance of procedures by the computer s operating system AUTHENTICATION The process of determining the identity of a user that is attempting to access a network Authentication occurs through challenge response time based code sequences or other techniques See CHAP and PAP AUTHORIZATION The process of determining what types of activities or access are permitted on a network Usually used in the context of authentication once you have authenticated a user they may be authorized to have access to a specific service CoS Class of Service Describes the level of service provided to a user Also provides a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping similar types of traffic DATABASE An organized collection of Oware objects DEPLOYMENT The distribution of solution blades throughout the domain DIGITAL CERTIFICATE A digital certificate is an electronic credit card
108. 73 Y Delne Powerco Switch 10011 4010 OB 00 00 02 FAL PCTS 10 201 172 ES Delne Powerco Switch 10012 4010 3 6 12 9 04 AM Ga 00 00 02 a A O O Pron 10 201 242 SS Delne Powerco Switch 42 04 4204 O LAB FR Pc7O 10 201 179 ES Del inc Powerco Switch 4204 4204 ub ec7o 10 201 182 E Delne Powerco Switch 1911 2 1911 2 42 item s returned CECE 2214 Reference Tree Utilization Summary Bandwidth Utilization NL PCTSS24P_171 10 201 171 hb 8 08 Top 10 Interfaces J PowerConnect 5524P 8 04 Interface Bandwidth y w gion 8 00 q_ _ OL 7 96 TF 1 ctss24p_17 1 0 00 di 132 W giton7 pcTss2 20 00 o gin naa TF 31 pctss24p_1 10 00 W gts TF 31 epctss2ap_1 70 00 o m gis Disk YO TF 1 pctss24p_17 2 0 00 a il ine Memory im git1019 pcTss24 1 0 00 Network Details OB gor 09 02 15 02 23 02 29 51 37 02 Snap Panels X Close The Settings button lets you configure the displayed columns and their order Tip You can select multiple devices by Ctrl clicking them in the expanded portlet This lets you do these same tasks on more than one device You can also perform such tasks on multiple devices with managed resource groups See Managed Resource Groups on page 162 The following are available columns Network Status The network status of the device Alarm Severity The highest open alarm for the device Equipment Name The name of the dev
109. Adaptive CLI Last Executed On Displays the last execution date This is blank for New Adaptive CLIs Attributes Adaptive CLI commands let you configure modifiable Attributes as part of the command Brestin tew slaps DL atin you send to the selected equipment General Scripts Use the radio buttons to select from the following Attribute Settings options ae Cenc Attribute Settings Select from the following options Do not use Parameter Schema e Create a new Parameter Schema AS Latter Som e Use an existing Parameter Schema for this ibaa AN ta detach A d ap tiv e C LI C Use an existing Parameter Schema for this Adaptive CLI Tip Why share a schema rather than creating a new one with each Adaptive CLI One reason is that creating an entity often requires a complementary script to remove it In this case the valid values labels and so on for the attributes are always going to be the same in both create and delete Adaptive CLls therefore sharing the same schema is both safe and easy Any delete script can mark unused attributes as Not applicable led Save x Close Do not use Parameter Schema This option does not save a set of standard attributes to re use later Go directly to the Scripts tab to create this type of Adaptive CLI Create a new Parameter Schema Click the New button and the schema a screens app ear lato wer adagia DL actos General Attributes Seripts Attribute Settings En
110. Availability Retain Polled Data and Retain Calculated Data parameters Resource Monitors Monitoring 247 248 The Monitor Status Summary Snap Panel displays the status of each individual member Target of the M6220_Randall_205 10 20 1 205 s x monitor showing the Last Polled time and date and a Managed Equipment E M6220_Randall_205 10 20 1 205 title bar and icon indicating Availability green is Availability o AvgRTT available red is not cia Hover the cursor over the Availability icon and a popup MinRTT appears with details about availability If the device is available the RTT round trip time for en sare communication appears in Avg average Max NetgearGS716Tv2 10 128 4 15 maximum and Min minimum amounts along with 1 trrormessage ined out ater waling on ICMP response for the PacketCount If it is not an Error Message appears Managed Equipment NetgearGS716Tv2 10 128 4 15 instead of the RTT and PacketCount parameters 4 Area o PacketCount To edit more performance settings and targets than are available here use the features described in Dashboard Views on page 277 You can create and display dashboards by right clicking items in Managed Resources selecting Show Performance Excluding Attributes from Display The show perf exclude property in the portal ext properties file contains a comma delimited list of the attribute display names to exclude from display Remember best
111. C Addre ID Last Observed No data is available to display The Settings button lets you configure columns that appear and their order The available columns for this view include many related to the attributes that appear in Port Details on page 192 above This screen also includes a Reference Tree displaying a tree of the selected port s relationship to logical interfaces and monitors Ports Resource Management 193 Port Editor When you right click a port and select Edit this screen appears Ca It has the following fields General Details Hame General Details Port Description F as Install Date Name An identifier for the port Model Port Description A text description for the Beaker EEE Creator Juniper JUNOS Driver port Install Date The date this port was Port Details installed Settings Model The port s model IP Address 4 MAC Address 00 90 69 6a fc 20 Date created The date this port was A Hardware Version created Port Type Fast Ethernet Port xl Administrative State Up rf Port Details Properties Operational State w z Notes IP Address The IP address for the port MAC Address The port s Media Access Control MAC address del Sere a cese Hardware Version The port s hardware version Port Type The type of port Administrative State One of three descriptive values The options are Locked Device use is prohibited Shutting Down
112. CPU utilization ate e Memory and Description eee 00 Ping Rate ms 0 00 The convention indicating such tooltips are available is the Description Cisco IOS Software 3800 Software C3845 question mark that appears nextto the cursor when you ADVENTERPRISEKS M Version 12 4 24 T2 RELEASE 7 H 7 SOFTWARE fc2 Technical Support hover it over the displayed field http www cisco comtechsupport Copyright c 1986 2009 by Cisco Systems Inc Compiled Mon 19 Oct 09 21 46 by prod_rel_team Alarm Snap Panels Y These include the following Alarm Details The source Severity Message Date Opened and so on MIB Details The Notification OID and MIB Text for the selected alarm Reference Tree The connection between the alarm and its source in tree form Total Occurrences by Date A graph of the total occurrences of this alarm by date 104 Alarms Key Portlets Alarm Email The e mail sent by right clicking an alarm has the subject specified when you send it and contains the information within the alarm For example Alarm monitorIntervalSkip Alarm Attributes Device IP Message Alarm State Open Severity 5 Major Count 1 Date Opened Tue Dec 14 22 01 30 PST 2010 Update Date Time Tue Dec 14 22 01 36 PST 2010 Entity Name Entity Type Entity Description Equipment Region SUPDEMOPartition Location Assigned By OWSystem Date Assigned Thu Dec 16 10 40 24 PST 2010 Assigne
113. Cell Config EquipmentManager_Cu stom11 RedCell Config EquipmentManager_Cu stom12 RedCell Config EquipmentManager_Cu stom 13 RedCell Config EquipmentManager_De viceDescription RedCell Config EquipmentManager_Ho stname Attribute Equipment Type Firmware Version Hardware Version Last Backup Last Configuration Change Last Modified Model Name Network Status Notes OSVersion Serial Number Software Version System Object Id Entity Type Port Attribute Custom Custom 2 Custom 3 Description Equipment Type Version of the equipment s firmware Version of the equipment s hardware Last Backup Last Configuration Change Timestamp of Last Modified Model number of the equipment Component name Network Status Equipment Notes OSVersion Unique identifier for the equipment Version of the equipment s software SNMP based system object identifier Description Note that although you can re name any Custom Email Action Variable RedCell Config EquipmentManager_Co mmon Type RedCell Config EquipmentManager_Fir mwareVersion RedCell Config EquipmentManager_Har dwareVersion RedCell Config EquipmentManager_Las tBackup RedCell Config EquipmentManager_Las tConfigChange RedCell Config EquipmentManager_Las tModified RedCell Config EquipmentManager_Mo del RedCell Config EquipmentManager_Na me RedCell Config EquipmentManager_He althStatus Red
114. Cell Config EquipmentManager_Not es RedCell Config EquipmentManager_OS Version RedCell Config EquipmentManager_Seri alNumber RedCell Config EquipmentManager_Sof twareVersion RedCell Config EquipmentManager_Sys ObjectID Email Action Variable RedCell Config Port_Custom attribute you must use the variable s original name For example here that is RedCell Config Equipment Manager_Custom 1 RedCell Config Port_Custom2 RedCell Config Port_Custom3 Event Processing Rules Key Portlets 126 Attribute Custom 4 Encapsulation Hardware Version If Index MAC Address Model MTU Name Notes Port Description Port Number Slot Number Speed Subnet Mask Event Processing Rules Key Portlets Description Encapsulation Version of the port s hardware SNMP If Index Typically a MAC Address with the octets separated by a space colon or dash depending upon the device Note that the separator is relative when used as part of a query Model number of the port Maximum Transmission Unit Port name Port Notes Description of the port Port Number Slot Number Speed SubMask Email Action Variable RedCell Config Port_Custom4 RedCell Config Port_Encapsulation RedCell Config Port_HardwareVersion RedCell Config Port_IfIndex RedCell Config Port_UniqueAddress RedCell Config Port_Model RedCell Config Port_Mtu RedCell Config Port_Name Red
115. Cell Config Port_Notes RedCell Config Port_DeviceDescriptio n RedCell Config Port_PortNumber RedCell Config Port_SlotNumber RedCell Config Port_Speed RedCell Config Port_SubMask Entity Type Interface Logical interface Attribute Description Custom 1 Note that although you can re name any Custom attribute you must use the variable s original name For example here that is RedCell Config Equipm entManager_Custom Custom 2 Custom 3 Custom 4 Encapsulation Encapsulation IfIndex SNMP Interface Index Interface Description Description of the Interface Interface Number Interface Number Interface Type Common Interface Type MTU Maximum Transmission Unit Name Interface name Notes Interface Notes Port Number Port Number Slot Number Slot Number Subnet Mask Subnet Mask of the Interface Redcell Email Action variable RedCell Config Interface_Custom RedCell Config Interface_Custom2 RedCell Config Interface_Custom3 RedCell Config Interface_Custom4 RedCell Config Interface_Encapsulation RedCell Config Interface_IfIndex RedCell Config Interface_DeviceDescripti on RedCell Config Interface_InterfaceNumbe r RedCell Config Interface_CommonType RedCell Config Interface_Mtu RedCell Config Interface_Name RedCell Config Interface_Notes RedCell Config Interface_PortNumber RedCell Config Interface_SlotNumber RedCell Config Interface_SubMask Best practice is to
116. Configurations Rae OAIE Link Mame y Link Type Equi Fi Date Saved Mano Flo Creator admin GigabitEthernet 0 47 Forc Ethernet Link RAF Text D 3 5421 21 PM 4 Bic Discovery Date 3 22 10 15 AM RAF Text Pr 3 5121 31 PM 4 6 Last Modified 3 212 10 16 AM Last Backup 3 512 1 31 PM Last Configuration Change Service Tag Asset Tag Reference Tree Monitor Status Summary a FR Force54810P_11 10 128 6 11 tai ai Two tact henea BH Loopbacks 2 Force ForceS481 3 61210 41 AM MNULLO ForceS481 3 6 12 10 39 AM 89 Port Channels 4 mp soto l ForceS481 3 6 12 10 33 AM g Sit h ForceS481 3 6 12 10 39 AM gp Slot 2 TenGigabit 3 6 12 10 40 AM B Slot 3 NULL OCF 3 6 12 10 38 AM BB Slot 4 Entitynot 3 6210 41 AM g Slots n2 3 4m O gp Slot 6 gt Details screens are available for a variety of things besides equipment too The Equipment Details screen and others can have the following sub panels e Performance Indicators e Interfaces e Top Configuration Backups see Top Configuration Backups on page 277 e Alarms e Ports e Details You can also right click to open further Details screens about some subcomponents like Interfaces and Ports These display a Reference Tree like Snap Panels Reference Tree on page 85 too You can even right click nodes in that reference tree to drill down to additional details A Forces4810P_11 10 123 6 11 ManagementEthernet 0 0 ManagementE
117. Core Router Northern Telecom Ltd M40e Core Edge Router Red Hat Inc N e Router QUSE Hint AN Ina Select 8 Cancel Select multiple devices by clicking repeatedly selecting a single device each time You can also make several templates for each device See Multiple Performance Templates on page 289 for the way that works 6 Click on a vendor to see the device types for that vendor Then click on a device type to see the models available for that vendor and device type Select the model you want and click on the select button 7 To select the attributes that you want to appear by default in a performance dashboard for the selected device click on a monitor to see the attributes available for that monitor Click on the right arrow button to move the selected attributes from Available to Selected Those are the attributes that will appear by default in dashboards for the selected device 288 Show Performance Templates Monitoring 8 When you have selected all the parameters you want click Save It then appears in the template list agana perioaganes Temnolsies Template Hame TestPerfTemplate x Close To edit or delete your template use the buttons in the action column of the table Now when you click on show performance Dell OpenManage Network Manager checks whether a template for that device type exists If one exists then that template guides what appears in the performance vi
118. Dell OpenManage Network Manager version 5 0 Web Client Guide Notes and Cautions Z A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer or software A A CAUTION indicates potential harm to your data or hardware if you proceed as indicated Information in this document is subject to change without notice 2012 Dell Inc All rights reserved Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc is strictly forbidden Trademarks used in this text Dell the DELL logo PowerEdge PowerVault PowerConnect OpenManage EqualLogic KACE FlexAddress and Vostro are trademarks of Dell Inc Microsoft Windows Windows Server MS DOS and Windows Vista are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Red Hat Enterprise Linux and Enterprise Linux are registered trademarks of Red Hat Inc in the United States and or other countries Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this publication to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products Dell Inc disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own 2012 4 Rev A01 Contents DP ti id 9 Why Dell OpenManage Network Manager ooooocococoo oo 9 Key Features s ones a onde a he ae A 9 Networks with Dell OpenManage Network Manager
119. Device Access example creates a specific device access event for user login logout login failure or configuration change Select the Access Type Config Change Login Failure User Login User Logout from the pick list for that field Specify Settings for Device Access Access Type User Login xl User Name Variable test User Name RegEx Suppress Correlated M Enter the User Name Variable and or User Name RegEx match string in those fields This confines rule response to the selected users Check Suppress Correlated events if you do not want to see events correlated with this one Frequency Throttle This rule type changes event behavior based on the frequency of the selected event Specify Settings for Frequency Throttle Time Period specified in seconds 5 Maximum events to publish within time period 2 Event action to take when throttle exceeded Reject Suppress Publish frequency start and stop notifications r Changes event behavior based on occurrence frequency Enter the Time Period seconds and Maximum events to publish within time period for the event then select an Event Action to take when throttle exceeded Reject or Suppress the event and check Publish frequency start and stop notifications if you want it to register for Dell OpenManage Network Manager If you Reject an event it does not appear in Event history if you Publish it however listeners for that event will hear it Reject Event This s
120. Discovery Date Ping Rate ms and the device s Description information K NOTE The default filter for this portlet displays only recent events If you do not see events expand the period for which they appear Event History Key Portlets Vendor Discovery Date Ping Rate ms Description 10 0 20 3 lis up E 1710n Dell Inc 06 09 10 04 34 PM C1 0 00 Dell Laser Printer 1710n Expanded Event History Portlet Clicking the plus in the upper right corner of the initial portlet view displays the expanded Event History As in other expanded portlets you can use the filtering capabilities at the top of the screen to further limit the default view of all events sy Event History Return to previous Default Event History Filter Advanced Filter Search Refresh Settings JB Receive Time y Entity Name Event Name Device IP Message Protocol 81541 9 58 AM y JunipermM5 10 1 adaptiveCLIRunSuccessNotifica Managed Equi 10 128 315 Success Juniper JUNOS show 81511 9 58 AM de JuniperM5 10 1 serviceResyneNotification Service 81511 9 58 AM y5 JuniperM5 10 1 adaptiveCLIRunSuccessNotifica Managed Equi 10 128 315 Success Juniper JUNOS show 84541 9 58 AM a JunipermM5 10 1 serviceResyncNotification Service 845M1 9 58 AM El JuniperM5 10 1 serviceResyncNotification Service 85M1 9 58 AM y JuniperM5 10 1 adaptiveCLiRunSuccessNotifica Managed Equi 1
121. General 154 Inspect 65 159 Network 65 156 Results 66 161 Discovery Profile Editor 64 154 Discovery Profiles 153 Discovery Profiles Expand ed 161 DISPLAYED LEVELS To pology 210 DNS 23 Dock 73 Domain 367 Domain Name Servers 23 Dynamic Group 165 E Edit Custom Attributes 89 Email Action 120 Email Action Variables 122 Encryption 367 Equipment 367 Equipment Details 178 Equipment Icons 166 Equipment Name 102 Error Condition 350 Ethernet Access Point 368 Ethernet Access Service 368 Ethernet Service 368 Ethernet Trunk 367 Ethernet Trunk Port 368 Event 368 Event Definition 368 Event Definition Editor 128 Event Definitions 128 Correlations 132 General 129 Message Template 131 Event History Portlet 106 Event History Snap Panels 108 Event Instance 368 Event processing filters 112 Event Processing Rules 108 Event Template 368 Event Threshold 368 Executing Change Determi nation 328 Expanded Actions Portlet 336 Expanded Alarm Portlet 102 Expanded Audit Trail Portlet 94 Expanded Authentication Portlet 145 Expanded Event History Portlet 107 Expanded Location Portlet 137 Expanded OS Images port let 234 Expanded Portlets 82 Expanded Reports Portlet 203 Expanded Resource Monitor 247 Expanded Vendor Portlet 140 Export Import 86 Exporter Registration 295 Exporting 368 F Feedback 13 File Handles 31 File Management 223 File Server Editor 222 File server port conflict 69 File Servers Portlet 221 Fi
122. Java Groovy Specify the match string or regular expression Regex in the text editor below the pick list E treating New Compliance Policy General Targets ED Editing Compliance Policy Criteria EN Input Source Properties Select Criteria Match Type does not contain contains L l snmp 2 community public match Regex does not match Regex match Regex for each line does not match Regex for each line count number of occurences Perl Groovy Y Apply Cancel Tip With the Add Criteria button you can configure multi criteria policies with several lines For example configure one saying a maximum of four lines containing name server can appear lt 5 in any order Match Regex for each line and another that says the configuration must containno ip domain lookup domain Notice the radio buttons Match Any of the following and Match all of the following Selecting Any means that if either of the lines matched the policy would succeed Selecting All says that both lines must pass before the policy is successful For more complex scans you can also enter Perl or Java Groovy language policies See Perl Java Groovy Language Policies on page 322 for details about these K NOTE The does not operators are just the negative of the match without does not Click the Apply green check button to accept your term or the Cancel button to abandon your edits 314 ProS
123. M Prerequisites 27 Web Based Enterprise Man agement 26 Why share a schema 342 Windows Management In terface 24 Windows Server 2008 16 Windows Terminal Server 16 Index 379 380 Index
124. Manage Network Manager does not like the polling interval to be very small especially when monitoring many devices Example poll every 10 secs for 10 000 devices with Packet Size 64 bytes Packet Count 3 Timeout secs 1 and configure Unreachable attempts 1 with polling interval 10 seconds This polls the device every 10 seconds and emits a down event on the first failed attempt Retain Availability Data Check to activate You must Retain availability data to enable alarms If you define thresholds you should retain availability data Retain availability data stores the Boolean values of whether availability data was in the range your defined metrics Retain Polled Data Check to activate If you uncheck Retain polled data only calculated data remains you cannot view data retrieved from monitored entities Turning off Retain polled data discards the data as it arrives from the device Retain Calculated Data Check to activate Retain calculated data complements Retain polled data If checked it stores the calculated results which came from the raw poll data received from the device Update Network Status Check to activate reporting the network status of the target device s The results of this monitor s activity then appear in the Network Status column of the Managed Resources portlet Only one monitor and no monitors on interfaces or child components should ever update networks status Any monitors on child compo
125. Options Available 5 Add Schedule ig Execute x Close Notice you can Add Schedule to schedule this deployment rather than Execute it immediately Click Save if you schedule this deployment or Close to abandon your edits Deploy Firmware xX How To Deploy Firmware To deploy firmware follow these steps 1 Make sure you have an FTP TFTP server correctly configured See File Management on page 223 2 Right click a device in Managed Resources or the groups or Image Repository pages and select File Management gt Deploy 3 The Deploy Firmware screen appears You can Select OS Image in the top panel and configure deployment with the following fields OS Image Select an image It must already have been uploaded in the Image Repository Description A text description of the image Version The image version Device Driver The device driver associated with this image Image Type A read only reminder of the type of image Select Targets for Deployment Select targets for deploying the image This defaults to the device right clicked in Managed Resources to initiate this action or devices that match the selected file you want to deploy You can then click the Add Equipment but ton again restricted to devices that match the deploy file s type You can also remove devices from the target list with the Remove All button Notice the Status column in the table of targets shows whether the OS deployment is suppo
126. P leases If you do change your host s IP address To accommodate a changed IP address first delete the contents of oware temp Change your local IP address anywhere it appears in owareapps installprops lib installed properties Then restart your machine Alternatively in a shell after running oware to set the environment you can run ipaddresschange n followed by the new IP address K NOTE If you change your host s IP address you must also change the Virtual host IP to the new IP address in Manage gt Control Panel gt Portal If you do change your server s IP address you must also change the URL for web client access in your browser Authentication For successful discovery of the resources on your network this software requires authenticated management access to the device To get this access you must provide the correct SNMP community strings WMI login credentials and any other command line Telnet SSH or browser HTTP HTTPS authentication and SNMP must be turned on if that is not the device s default Some devices require pre configuration to recognize this management software Consult your network administrator or the device s manuals for instructions about how to enable those See Authentication on page 143 for more Supported PowerConnect Models Refer to release notes for a list of supported devices You can also look at the HTML files in the SupportedDevices directory of your installation source fo
127. Panel on page 33 Discovering Resources After you install the application you must discover the equipment you want to manage and model it in the Dell OpenManage Network Manager database See Discovery Profiles on page 64 Resource Management See Managed Resources on page 66 and Chapter 4 Resource Management in this Guide Configuration Management Use Dell OpenManage Network Manager to backup restore and compare configuration files See Top Configuration Backups on page 277 Problem Diagnosis See Alarms on page 100 for information about Fault Management Network Troubleshooting See Alarms on page 100 and Chapter 7 Monitoring for details of Dell OpenManage Network Manager s performance management capabilities Reports Run reports to clarify the state of your network and devices See Reports on page 200 for details Real time Diagnosis thru Collaboration Collaborate with others about network issues both by sending them messages that display the device conditions of concern and with online chat within Dell OpenManage Network Manager See Sharing on page 87 and Status Bar Alerts on page 75 for details Unified View You can scale your Dell OpenManage Network Manager installation to handle the largest most complex environments with distributed deployment Consult the Administration Section of the User Guide for more about installing distributed and even high availability systems Finally do not neglect what Com
128. ProScan Portlet Change Management ProScan Label Ending Number Character Word Pattern d w w One or more w Zero or more Whitespace st One or more s Zero or more String w o space S One or more S Zero or more Newline n FormFeed f Tab t Carriage Return r Backspace b Escape e Backslash B URL http ftp mailto a Awt w OLMEDA HTML Tag O Here are some examples of such expressions Label Pattern Email address U S A Za z0 9 _ A Za z0 9 A Za Z 2 4 MAC Address 0 9a fA F 1 2 5 0 9a fA F 1 2 Time hh mm ss 0 0 9 1 0 2 0 5 0 9 0 5 0 9 IP Address d 1 3 3 d 1 3 Validated IP Address restricts what matches 25 me 5 y 4 0 9 01 0 9 0 e 25 0 better than the previous example 51 21 al 01 0 9 0 a 25 0 5 ao 4 0 To IP 0 9 0 9 25 0 5 2 0 4 0 9 0 110 917 MIB2 OID 1 2 6 IDAS The following are examples of the kinds of matching possible Z CAUTION Cutting and pasting from notepad into OpenManage Network Manager may cause carriage return or line feed issues Best practice is to compose these within OpenManage Network Manager ProScan Portlet Change Management ProScan 321 Perl Java Groovy Language Policies In addition to regular expressions you can enter Config Terms that use either Perl or Java Groovy language capabilities
129. Q xX How To Create a Custom Dashboard View The following steps create a custom dashboard view 1 In the Dashboard Views portlet select the New Custom Dashboard command An empty default view with twelve components appears Btresting Custom Dashboard View Properties View Name TimeFrame 2 within last 30 Minutes y Data Source Layout ato 3Columns Dashboard Component Grid Lela led Save x Close The Properties panel contains the following controls View Name The name of the dashboard view Required Time Frame The period over which to display the data May be either relative like last 30 minutes or absolute between specific dates and times The specified frame applies to all charts in the dashboard Data Source Source for the data Current displays current raw data Hourly displays rolled up hourly data Daily displays rolled up daily data Auto default determines which data source to use based on the selected time frame 282 Dashboard Views Monitoring Layout Select the desired layout style used to display the dashboard components 2 To select a layout style click on the button next to the current layout The layout chooser appears Layout 3 Columns 2 Columns 50 50 1 Column 2 Columns 30 70 2 Columns 70 30 1 2 1 Columns 1 2 Columns 30 70 1 2 Columns 70 30 Close 3 Click on the desired layout or click Clos
130. Right click gt Edit the promoted configuration in the Image Repository Name the file and if necessary configure a filter In the General Parameters tab of the editor In the Configuration tab locate the parameters you want to preserve in discovered devices when you restore this file This can include items like the device s DNS Hostname IP Address and so on Delete the file s specifics and double click to insert the Target Params in place of these variables Save the configuration Right click to deploy this configuration You can check Generate and save for configuration only if you simply want to configure deployment for later and save for now You can also optionally name a label for the deployed files Select the devices or groups of devices to which you want to deploy Click Save Execute or Add Schedule depending on your desired outcome If you click Execute you will have to confirm this action When Dell OpenManage Network Manager performs the restoration deploy it reads the Target Params from those discovered for each device inserts those in the config file then restores it device by device skipping any that do not pass the filter set up in step 4 Deploy Configuration File Management 241 242 Deploy Configuration Monitoring This section describes Resource Monitors as they appears in Dell OpenManage Network Manager s web portal The following describes these monitors e OpenManage Network Mana
131. SIS Information L Juniper ISIS Template Isis Juniper ISIS Interfaces Juniper ISIS Interface Template ISIS Interfaces Juniper LDP Interfaces Juniper LDP Interface Template LDP Interfaces 16 item s returned K 4 2 PM Reference Tree 2 Report History ES B Juniper LDP Information Run Date y Row Count User Version Available columns are the same as the summary screen s The Reference Tree snap panel displays the selected report s connection to devices historical reports and any report template Right click to view the reports in the Historical Reports node Reports Snap Panels The Snap Panels for reports display a Reference Tree of connections between the selected report and target equipment and between the report and any Report Template The Report History Snap Panel displays the selected report s Run Date Row Count and the User who ran the report Right click a row in this panel and you can Delete Print the report history or Export the report history View the report or View Advanced If you View the report a message with a link to the report appears in the bottom left of the screen Reports Resource Management 203 xX How To Generate a Report The following steps configure then generate a report 1 2 3 4 o 0 1 0 10 12 In the Reports portlet right click and select New Name the report for example Test Powerconnect Router Report Enter a title subtitle for the report Powerconne
132. Schedule 2 Execute x Close When you select a group backup and the group contains devices of several types the Device Options panel displays a tab for each device type Select the backup parameters there before executing or scheduling backup Link Discovery Discover links between members of the selected group and others See New Link on page 175 and Link Discovery on page 176 for details Resync Resources Queries the devices in the group to update Dell OpenManage Network Manager s database Delete Remove the selected group from inventory The devices remain in inventory but this removes the grouping Import Export Lets you import from or export to file the group configuration Share with User Share the group with another user See Sharing on page 87 Managed Resource Groups Resource Management 163 164 Dell OpenManage Network Manager does not supports static groups that include members retrieved by dynamic filters You can configure membership with dynamic resource groups that include group memberships as filter criteria For example you can create a filter for members of ResourceGroupABC or members of ResourceGroupXYZ Expanded Managed Resource Groups The expanded Managed Resource Groups screen lets you see the summary screen s groups with a Reference Tree snap panel that displays a selected group s connection to its devices and any assigned monitors Static Group Selecting Static Grou
133. Search for Partition by IP Address IP to Search for 192 168 1 26 S Found 192 168 1 26 exists in partition TestPartition Search x Close Clicking Search locates the mediation partition that services the entered IP address although it does not determine whether that partition is up and running Control Panel Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 47 Redcell gt Filter Management This screen accessible from Go to gt Control Panel lets you manage the filters in OpenManage Network Manager Filter Management Available Filters AddFilter Import Namea Description Entity Type Owner Shared Actions All Cisco excluding PIX Managed Equip admin x 2 E lal Compliance Policy Violation Filter Compliance Poli Compliance Poli admin Q 2d Juniper VPLS MX Series Managed Equip admin Q 22d Dell PowerConnect Layer 3ISCLI Includes 70XX 63 Managed Equip admin Q L4 E lal Dell PCT I2 Switches Includes 34 35 Managed Equip admin Q 22d Cisco 10S 12 2 33 Cisco IOS 12 2 33 Managed Equip admin 5 GEA ISCLI Managed Equip admin O Ba Dell PowerConnect Layer 3 devi Includes 62XX M Managed Equip admin Q LA lal Cisco NotlOS 12 2 33 Managed Equip admin Q E ll PowervaultMD3000_filter Powervault Filter Managed Equip admin 5 Ed Juniper VPLS Juniper YPLS is Managed Equip admin x PEN EMC getall Managed Equip admin Q da Dell PCT L3 Stackable Manage
134. Server Host The IP address or hostname of your SMTP server SMTP Server Port The port used by your SMTP server Two settings for e mail servers appear in Control Panel one in the Control Panel gt Portal gt Settings Mail Host Names edit screen and another in Control Panel gt Server Administration gt Mail The Portal based e mail settings help Administrators limit signups to e mails only existing in their organization The screen in that panel provides a list of allowed domain names if that feature is enabled Control Panel gt Server Administration gt Mail is where to configure the Main server and authentication for routing mail Common Setup Tasks Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager Netrestore File Servers The Netrestore file servers provide FTP connections for retrieving and deploying devices configuration files and for deploying firmware updates to devices on your network See File Servers on page 221 for a description of the portlet that manages file servers If you want to configure servers from the Common Setup Tasks portlet a slightly different screen appears when you click Edit Roe rience File Servers are used during Firmware Deploy and Configuration file Backup and Restore operations new file server File Server Mode C Internal External IP Address Net Mask Enabled TFTP Enabled Action Internal FTP TFTP e Y BO Julia s FTP 192 168 1 31 255 255 255 0 15 bb
135. Severity Critical Upper Boundary Color Matching String Apply Cancel This screen contains the following fields Name The identifier for the threshold interval Severity The event severity for crossing this threshol7d interval informational indeterminate warning minor major critical Color The color to display threshold interval on graphs Lower Boundary The interval s lower boundary Upper Boundary The interval s upper boundary May be blank Matching String A Regex matching string Resource Monitors Monitoring Threshold Graph Background If you configure a set of thresholds the dashboard graph displaying the data monitored displays the threshold colors in the background When an upper or lower threshold has no upper or lower bound then those background colors may appear as white Inventory Mappings The inventory mappings panel allows the user to associate any of several predefined inventory Percent Packet Loss 43 06 49 49 55 43 03 33 FastEthernet4 21 FastEthernet4 22 FastEthernet4 20 EastEthernet4 5 E FastEthernet4 7 metrics with a monitor attribute The available metrics are CPU Utilization Memory Utilization ICMP Round Trip Time ICMP packet errors and Bandwidth utilization EEOAE TA N EET ACETA OTN EOT General Monitor Options Calculated Metrics Thresholds inventory mappings Conditions Inventory Mappings Add Remove All Metric Name At
136. Specify the Archive Location Those listed are the Repositories listed on the Repositories tab You can manage those on that tab Redcell gt Database Aging Policies DAP Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 51 5 In the Aging Policies Options tab specify either the archiving and retention you want or further specify Sub Policies that refine the items archived and specify archiving and retention for those sub policy elements Which one you can specify depends on the type of DAP you are configuring 6 Click Apply until the displayed screen is the DAP manager Aging Policies Editor When you click Add Policy in the upper right corner of the Redcell gt Database Aging Policies DAP screen first a selector appears where you can click on the kind of policy you want to create then the editor appears If you click the Edit icon to the right of a listed policy the Aging Policies Editor appears with that policy s information already filled out ready to modify Repositories Adding new Audit Trail Logs Aging Policy ED Options Hame TestAuditTrailAgingPolicy Enter a aging policy name Description This is a test Optional Enabled M Check to enable this policy Schedule Interval Daily Recomended vi Select Schedule for this aging policy Base Archive Name AuditTrailArchive File name pre fi Compress Archive r Check to enable compression Archive Location Failover Repository x Select archive repository
137. Summary No Filter Specified Wed 28 Sep 2011 13 19 37 Run At Wed Sep 28 13 19 37 PDT 2011 SNMP Interface Report Data Collected Wed Sep 28 13 19 37 PDT 2011 Page 1 of 3 Polled Date Time 9 28 11 9 07 AM 9 28 11 9 12 AM 9 28 11 9 17 AM 9 28 11 9 22 AM 9 28 11 9 27 AM 9 28 11 9 32 AM 9 28 11 9 37 AM 9 28 11 9 42 AM 9 28 11 9 47 AM 9 28 11 9 52 AM 9 28 11 9 57 AM 9 28 11 10 02 AM 9 28 11 10 07 AM 9 28 11 10 12 AM 9 28 11 10 17 AM 9 28 11 10 22 AM 9 28 11 10 27 AM 9 28 11 10 32 AM 9 28 11 10 37 AM 9 28 11 10 42 AM xp0 0 Juniperii5 10 128 3 15 10 128 3 15 fxp0 0 Juniperid5 10 128 3 15 10 128 3 18 fxp0 0 JuniperM5 10 128 3 15 10 128 3 15 xp0 0 JuniperhS 10 128 3 15 10 128 3 18 fxp0 0 JuniperMS 10 128 3 15 10 128 3 18 fxp0 0 JuniperhtS 10 128 3 15 10 128 3 18 fxp0 0 JuniperMS 10 128 3 15 10 128 2 18 fxp0 0 JuniperM5 10 128 3 15 10 128 3 15 xp0 0 Juniperht 10 128 3 15 10 128 3 18 xp0 0 JuniperS 10 128 3 45 10 128 3 18 fxp0 0 JuniperM5 10 128 3 15 10 128 3 15 xp0 0 Junipertd5 10 128 3 15 10 128 3 18 fxp0 0 JuniperM5 10 128 3 15 10 128 3 15 xp0 0 JuniperhtS 10 128 3 15 10 128 3 18 fxp0 0 JuniperMS 10 128 3 15 10 128 3 18 fxp0 0 JuniperhtS 10 128 5 45 10 128 3 18 fxp0 0 JuniperMS 10 128 3 15 10 128 3 18 fxp0 0 Juniperid5 10 128 3 15 10 128 3 18 fxp0 0 JuniperhS 10 128 3 15 10 128 3 18 fxp0 0 JuniperM5 10 128 3 15 10 128 3 15 Monitor Target 7 fxp0 fxp0 2 fxp0 fxp0 2 fxp0
138. WMI queries will succeed only if you add the User account to local admin group Refer to the Microsoft knowledgebase articles for the way to do this For example Leverage Group Policies with WMI Filters support microsoft com kb 555253 en us For user rights for WMI access see www mcse ms archive68 2005541196 html See also Service overview and network port requirements for the Windows Server system support microsoft com kb 832017 Web Based Enterprise Management WBEM Driver The Web Based Enterprise Management driver currently supports operating systems supporting the Web Based Enterprise Management interface WBEM WBEM is always installed on the following operating systems versions and later e Red Hat Linux 5 5 or 6 0 e VM Ware ESX with WBEM installed You can install Web Based Enterprise Management on some other systems if they do not already use it but monitored devices must have this installed K NOTE To verify WBEM is running on your system run the following command ps e grep cim You should see a process labelled cimserver Installing WBEM on Red Hat For Red Hat 5 the latest supported release for WBEM is tog pegasus 2 7 0 2 e15_2 1 1386 rpm and this is what you need to download once you have logged into the Red Hat network Install this as follows Install rom ih tog pegasus 2 7 0 2 e15_2 1 1386 rpm Upgrade rpm Uh tog pegasus 2 7 0 2 e15_2 1 1386 rpm To determine if wbem is running run ps ef
139. a JuniperM5 10 128 3 15 10 22 gt In addition to the summary screen s columns the following are available in this screen User IP The IP address of the user who created this audit trail Subject The equipment at the origin of the message traffic with Dell OpenManage Network Manager You can right click a selected item and either Delete it or View Job This last option displays a screen with the details of the job itself View Job The Audit Job Viewer displays the audit trail messages in tree form To see the contents of an individual message that appears in the upper panel select it and view its contents in the bottom panel The divider has the binoculars in the left corner and the Refresh icon in the right Click Refresh to clear an old message so you can view a new one Audit Trail Portlet Portal Conventions Click the binocular icon to Mx check info warning OF OF SO H oma00213Pm error filters that limit the UNRNOWNO No HTTP Authentication credentials found for polling ser types of visible messages Notice that the date and time of the message appears to the right of the binocular icon Schedules To schedule an action for example using a i ese Sepeelile aruba discovery profile right click and select s Schedule The Schedule panel appears Starting On where you can create a new schedule LOLs AM entering a Starting On date and time and Grecinenen
140. abled check box Schedules Portal Conventions 95 Disable Schedule Appears on an already enabled scheduled item Execute Executes the scheduled item If the scheduled item is an activity based or discovery Eee nee profile based scheduled item an audit viewer appears progress of the selected item wih GrouplD Scheduled Task Sequence NetConfig Backup 1 2808793381 56 rask s g Task NetContig Backup on target J2300 244 192 168 0 244 For other types of scheduled actions a dialog appears saying The scheduled item s has been sent to the application server for immediate execution You can monitor its progress in the audit trail portlet see Audit Trail Jobs Screen on page 91 New This lets you initiate new schedules for a variety of actions selected from a sub menu The subsequent screen s appearance depends on the action selected See Managed Resources on page 166 for more about available actions See Scheduling Actions on page 361 for the details of scheduling actions that require parameters Open This appears for an activity based scheduled items It opens the activity editor and lets you modify the activity s data properties and schedule parameters To edit an existing schedule for an already scheduled action like a Discovery Profile just right click the item in its portlet and select Schedule This displays the schedule information for the discovery profile and lets yo
141. activity If you have attached a Schedule Dell OpenManage Network Manager also saves the activity as a scheduled item in the Schedules Portlet Equipment Details Resource Management 187 188 Direct Access Direct access provides less mediated access to the device in the following ways MIB Browser Terminal e Ping ICMP e HTTP HTTPS The following sections describe those direct options in more detail MIB Browser As part of the Direct Access menu the MIB Browser lets you examine SNMP data available about devices RFC Standard MBs MIB Information RFC 1215 Results for ifindex E RFC1155 SMl niece E RFCI213 Me 1 RFC1243 MIB 2 RFC1414 MIB 3 0 RIPY2 MIB E RMON MIB 7 RMON2 MIB RFC1213 MIB Nodes mib 2 system interfaces 16 ifNumber M ifTable ifEntry ifindex 16 ifDescr 0 fType le ifttu jo ifSpeed zi Refresh Cancel The screen that opens when you select this option displays MIBs available in Dell OpenManage Network Manager in a tree on the left Notice that a pick list at the top of the left column narrows what appears in the tree K NOTE A progress bar at the bottom of this screen indicates a query for the selected information is in progress Use the menu described in Event Definitions on page 128 for loading new MIBs Direct Access Resource Management Select a MIB and expand it to see the contents for a s
142. ake a screenshot e Group Operations have been deprecated replaced by Adaptive CLIs e Command monitors must be recreated and monitors must be re configured to monitor Adaptive CLIs that run external scripts User Names Passwords and User Groups Roles are not automatically reassigned and must be created manually Supported Operating System Versions The following are supported operating system versions Microsoft Windows The supported operating systems are Windows 2003 Standard Enterprise and Web and Windows Server 2008 including R2 and Enterprise Edition This is a 64 bit application it has been tested for Windows on 64 bit operating system versions K NOTE Windows Terminal Server is not supported The installer becomes non responsive with Data Execution Prevention enabled This option is disabled by default on Windows Server 2008 but is enabled ona Windows Server 2008 machine running Terminal Server e You must disable User Account Control if you are installing Windows Server 2008 e Installer may halt when pre existing bash sessions or cmd sessions are left open Close all such sessions Linux This application supports Red Hat Enterprise version 5 5 or 6 0 Linux 64 bit only See 32 bit Linux Libraries on page 18 for additional requirements Z CAUTION For Linux you must install no more than a single instance of MySOL the one installed with this software Before you install remove any MySQL if it exists
143. al1 has execute permissions 7 Log in as user redcell Z CAUTION Do notinstall root During the installation a prompt appears to execute a script as root This means you need root password and must open another shell where you act as root 8 Execute linux_install this begins the installation process and follow the prompts Installation and Startup Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 31 Perl If you install Perl to take advantage of this application s use of Perl Scripting capabilities you must install it on the path on the application server and mediation server host Best practice is to use Perl version 5 10 or later because some applications also require Perl as well as the Perl module Net Telnet This application does not package Perl If you want to use the Perl scripting features you must make sure your system has Perl installed You can find information about Perl at www perl com Follow the downloads link to find the recommended distribution for your specific platform See Adaptive CLI Script Language Syntax on page 358 One of the recommended Perl packages is from ActiveState which can be found at www activestate com activeperl Starting Web Client You can also open the client user interface in a browser See Supported Web Browsers on page 19 The URL is http application server hostname or IP address 8080 The default login user is admin with a password of admin The first time you
144. alarm event Alarm State The state open closed of the alarm Date Cleared The date and time that the alarm was closed UpdateDate Time The time stamp for when this alarm was updated for an additional count the time the last duplicate was received Notification OID The identifier of the notification displayed as an alarm Equipment The name for the entity emitting the alarm Acknowledged True or False Alarms Key Portlets Assigned User The user who has been assigned this alarm right click or click Action to do this Date Assigned The date and time that the alarm was assigned Ack Time The time the alarm was acknowledged Cleared By The user who cleared the alarm MIB Text The alarm s MIB Text Rather than filtering with the pie graph the expanded portlet lets you either the pick list at the top left or create custom filtering by clicking Advanced Filters Menu ae Edit Details gt PRo1a57 Unknow Right clicking an alarm lets you select from the following menu items Acknowledge Alarm Edit Access the editors for Event Definition see Event 2 sinuse OWAdmin Definition Editor on page 128 or the Details screen JE Clear Alarm A ownedserver for the entity emitting the alarm see Equipment 5 Email Alarm 2 Pubic Details on page 178 for an example MT E Details Open a Details screen for the alarm itself not the 6 view as PDF 2 a entity emitting it This contains i
145. algorithm to a string or block of unencrypted text to produce encrypted text The length of the key generally determines how difficult it will be to decrypt the text in a given message KEY MANAGEMENT The establishment and enforcement of message encryption and authentication procedures in order to provide privacy enhanced mail PEM services for electronic mail transfer over the Internet MANAGED OBJECT A network device managed by the system MEDIATION Communication between this application and external systems or devices for example printers Mediation services let this application treat these devices as objects MEDIATION AGENT Any communication to and from equipment is handled by the Media tion Agent This communication includes SNMP requests ASCII requests and unsolicited ASCII messages In addition the Mediation Agent receives and translates emitted SNMP traps and converts them into events MEG Maintenance Entity Group MEP Maintenance End Point MIB Management Information Base A database repository of equipment containing object characteristics and parameters that can be monitored by the network management system OAM Operation Administration and Maintenance OID Object ID OSPF Open Shortest Path First routing protocol Poticy A rule made up of conditions and actions and associated with a profile Policy objects contain business rules for performing configuration changes in the netwo
146. alled Date Right clicking this ET TA screen displays the following menu items New Select either Firmware Image or Configuration Image Firmware Image displays the Firmware Image Editor screen Configuration Images originate from Configuration Files that are promoted to mass restore See the Configuration Image Editor on page 236 for its functionality Edit Displays the selected Firmware image in the Firmware Image Editor screen or the Configuration Image Editor if the selected line is a configuration image Deploy Deploys the selected file to devices and with the options you select in a subsequent selection screen For this to function you must have enabled a server as described in File Management on page 223 Download Firmware For Some devices typically Dell support downloading firmware from the internet These devices appear listed in a sub menu Select the type for which you want to download OS images and Dell OpenManage Network Manager automatically downloads them Delete Removes the selected OS image configuration from the list Image Repository File Management 233 Expanded Image Repository portlet When you click the plus this portlet expands to display the OS images list a snap panel Reference tree of the connections to devices and another panel listing the files within the selected image Image Repository Return to previous Detautt OS Image Fitter X Advanced Filter Search Re
147. ame E Managed Resources 10 20 1 171 is up Model we PowerConnect 5524P O Settings A Refresh Search Vendor fos Dell Inc Network Status Hame y IP Discovery Date 3 212 10 40 AM Responding R PcTs024_221 10 24 CPU 8 00 Responding fw PcTss48_173 10 2 O 3 de i Description Responding P PCT5548P_17 10 2 240 Ethernet Swich Responding P PCT5524P_17 nany 8 Not Responding we PCM8024K_24 10 20 342 fs Dell Inc PowerConnect M8 Responding qu PC7048_179 1 10 20 1179 Y Dell inc PowerConnect 7048 K 4 2113114 gt M Hovering the cursor over a listed device s IP address produces a popup with its alarm status in the headline both severity name and color the CPU Memory and Ping See the Managed Resources Expanded section for a description of columns and additional capabilities in that version of the portlet Icons that appear next to the equipment name have some significance For example Icon Device Type Switch RA pe Router or Switch gt vG Router Wireless Virtual Controller Wireless Access Point You can schedule actions selected here in addition to executing them immediately See Schedule Actions on page 186 for more about that Right clicking a listed resource can display the following menu items Edit This lets you use the following screens General e Authentication Managed Resources Resource Management e Management Int
148. ame The attribute name to be displayed for the calculation Resource Monitors Monitoring 255 256 Type Calculation Type Gauge or Counter Units Units string to appear in graphs Max Value Maximum value to be used in graphing 0 no max Formula The formula for the calculation using the assigned formula codes from the metric attribute legend Thresholds The thresholds panel allows the user to set threshold intervals on attributes in the monitor The table lists the attributes for which attributes have been configured Each row has an edit action and delete action The Add button allows thresholds to be specified for another attribute If all monitor attributes have thresholds defined for them the Add button will be disabled thingy onto i Dajanje nace Monitor General Monitor Options Calculated Metrics thresholds Inventory Mappings Conditions Configured Attributes Attribute Range Check Publish Events Apply To Series Discard Count per interval true false Errors and Discards Count per interval false false By Util per interval true false Percent Packet Loss per interval true false BW Xmit per interval false Error Count per interval false BY Recv per interval false lel Save O Cancel Resource Monitors Monitoring The Add or Edit buttons open a threshold editor blank or with existing configured thresholds respectively pelle Treine fusta Attribute llame Packets O
149. amie Sahin Fett Using that field the list narrows to actions matching PTI Tasosa VLAN your search string Select one and click Load Selected to run it manually Dell Force10 Enable Tagged VLAN on Port Channel Dell Force10 Enable Untagged VLAN Dell Force10 Enable Untagged VLAN on Port Channel Dell Force10 NoShutdown Interface K NOTE Dell Force10 Remove Channel Port Dell Force10 Remove IP Address Since menu items appear in alphabetical order this may be in a different location depending on the device vendor Dell Force10 Remove Port Channel Nell Force10 Remove Switch Port Y name Adaptive CLI This displays Adaptive CLls related to the selected device and opens with a screen where Sos you can enter any relevant parameters for those commands See the previous Action menu item s description and Chapter 10 Actions and Adaptive CLI for more about these Change Management Run Change Determination or Execute ProScan policies for the selected device See Chapter 9 Change Management ProScan for more about these capabilities If you want to execute a ProScan policy not already associated with this device then select Execute Proscan Policy A selection screen appears where you can select a policy and either execute or schedule it Direct Access This opens a sub menu where you can select the type of available direct cut thru access to the selected device or ICMP ping that device See MIB Browser on page 188
150. an run the Resolve DNS Hostnames activity to get the hostname This fetches the DNS hostname and resyncs the device Network The Network Panel collects the network IP range hosts and so on and the authentication information for the discovery profile Discovery Profiles Resource Management 3 After you click Next the Network panel appears Network Type and Addresses Select the type of entry in the pick list IP Address es CIDR Address Hostname SNMP Broadcast Subnet ME Decovery Profle Cece TD 3 Select Network Type and Address es IP Address es y 17216 01 Enter IP Address es IP Range s and or Hetwork s Add Existing Authentication To Resource Discovery Authentication Name Telnet SSH Netgear Protocol Type SSH Select Management Interface Parameters Timeout Retries Port vo Apply Cancel x Close The tooltips in the data entry field tell what valid entries look like K NOTE When specifying network addresses using the Subnet type you must specify the Network address at the beginning of the subnet since Dell OpenManage Network Manager assumes it is the starting IP address for the range If you specify an address in the middle of the subnetwork then Dell OpenManage Network Manager may discover devices outside of that subnetwork This also means that IP addresses in the network that precede the specified address are not discovered To avoid these issues use the CIDR specification of t
151. and locations in addition to groups with the appropriate permissions operators administrators and so on in these screens Users are individuals who performs tasks using the portal Administrators can create new users or deactivate existing users Users can be organized in a hierarchy of organizations and delegate its administration Control Panel Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 35 After creating them add Users to roles which configure their permissions for access and action 4 Control Panel Porta Users and Organizations Users and Organizations Users are individuals who performs tasks using the portal Administrators can create new users or deactivate existing users Users can be organized in a hierarchy of organizations and delegate its administration View y QAd y Search v Organizations Delete M Name Type My TestOrg1 O 1 Suborganization TestLocation3 Reqular Organization 4 Actions 2 Users Synergy Admin Test R User Showing 1 result v Users Deactivate Nousers were found K NOTE By default every user is assigned to the role User To assign a new user to specific permissions only remove all rights on the Userrole or confine its permissions to those that are universal first Even though you don t see that user assigned to the User role Best practice to spend some time designing your system s security before creating users organizations and roles When you are signed in
152. artportal sh stop located in the oware synergy tomcat x x x bin directory Installation and Startup Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 29 Starting the Client The client provides the user interface In Windows click Start gt OpenManage Network Manager gt Synergy or after starting the web server open a browser and go to the web address hostname 8080 where hostname is the name of the machine running application server or it s IP address See Starting Web Client on page 32 for more information N CAUTION If you are using Dell OpenManage Network Manager in an environment with a firewall ports 8080 and 80 must be open for it to function correctly If you want to use cut thru outside of your network then ports 8082 8089 must be open Dell OpenManage Network Manager uses the first one available so typically 8082 but if another application uses 8082 Dell OpenManage Network Manager uses 8083 and so on Start using Dell OpenManage Network Manager as outlined in Getting Started on page 27 or below See the Troubleshooting chapter of the Administration Section of the User Guide to solve Dell OpenManage Network Manager problems Linux Prerequisites If you are installing on Linux you must log in as a non root user Linux installation prompts you to run some additional scripts as root When installing to Linux ensure you are installing as a user with the correct permissions and are in the correct gro
153. ask Install Date In Use If Index Container Index Slot Number Speed MTU maximum transmission unit Port Icon Learned MAC Addr Count CLI Name Notes Operation Type Switch Mode Duplex Name Port Number Equipment Name Operational State IP Address MAC address Administrative State See Port Details on page 192 and Managed Resources Expanded on page 173 for an explanation of some of these fields Ports Resource Management Ports Expanded Clicking the plus in the upper right corner of the summary screen displays this expanded view of available ports Ports Default Port Filter E Equipment Return to previous Advanced Filter Port Type Encapsulation IP Address E Refresh Settings Ea E 17 Subnet Mask Port Description Date created M5 Juniperm5 10 M5 JuniperM5 10 ey JuniperJ2300 eb JuniperJ2300 M5 JunipermS 10 M5 JuniperM5 10 M5 JuniperM5 10 Reference Tree ww O MH fe 0Ni2 FF fe 01 2 512 FF te on 2 513 FF fe 0 1 2 514 FF te on2515 FF te on2516 FF te 0n 2 517 ATM Port ATM Port Fast Ethernet Port Fast Ethernet Port Fast Ethernet Port ATM PYC ATM PYC Ppp ppp Ethernet 4x FIE 100 BASE TX MAC ADDRESS 0090696afc21 Mon Aug 15 09 01 Mon Aug 15 09 01 created by Sally M Mon Aug 15 09 02 Mon Aug 15 09 02 Mon Aug 15 09 01 Seecoo Mon Aug 15 09 01 Learned MAC Address Learned MA
154. at you have verified the script is working you can create a monitor to see how this attribute is doing 1 In the Monitors portlet create a new ACLI Monitor 2 Uncheck Update Network Status recommended since the ICMP monitor is already doing this In Monitor Options select your example monitor configured previously 4 Confirm that Monitor Attributes displays the Status attribute configured previously 5 In the Conditions tab of the Monitor Editor create Status Up condition with the severity of Informational and check Alert 6 Create a criterion which is Status 0 7 Save this condition 8 Create a new Condition called Status Down 9 The criterion is Status 10 Apply and Save External Commands Actions and Adaptive CLI 357 11 Save your monitor K NOTE You may want to test your monitor in which case you may want to change the interval to 30 seconds 12 Right click to select View Monitor Data and you can see the results of your efforts i View Data for Monitor Example ACLI Monitor 4 Return to previous Default Example ACLI Monitor Fitter Y Advanced Filter Search Refresh Settings 4 8 Monitor Targetw Polled Date Time 0 DellEX8216 10201154 10 20 1 154 3 6 12 12 02 PM O DellEX8216 10201154 10 20 1 154 3 6 12 12 02 PM DellEx8216 10201154 10 20 1 154 3 6 12 12 03 PM DelEx8216 10201154 10 20 1 154 3 6 12 12 04 PM DellEx8216 10201154 10 20 1 154 3 6 12 12 04 PM DellEX8
155. ate User Opens New Window This allows you to see the effect of any configuration changes you have made on a user The new window typically a new tab also lets you click the Sign Out link in the upper right corner where you can return to your original identity impersonation concealed Deactivate Retires a user configured on your system You can also check users and click the Deactivate button above the listed users Such users are not deleted but are in a disabled state You can do an Advanced search for inactive users and Activate them or permanently delete them Control Panel Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 37 Your organization has a number of geographic locations and you plan to manage the network infrastructure for all these locations using RC7 Synergy You can define the geographic locations to which devices can be associated This will help you manage and view your network grouped by location or branches See Locations on page 135 for the specifics about the portlet where you can set up locations Tip To edit your own information as a signed in user simply click your login name in the upper right corner of the portal screen Organizations Create Organizations just as you would create Users You can create a Regular or Location type of organization K NOTE You must first create a Regular organization to be the parent for a Location xX How To Configure Organizations Follow these steps
156. ates portlet also includes a Reference Tree snap panel displaying a tree for selected templates connecting them to Report Groups and specific reports xX How To Create a Report Template The following steps create a report template 1 In the Report Templates portlet right click and select New Table template 2 Name the template for example Test Amigopod Report 3 In the Source tab select an inventory source for example Inventory resources A DD Amigopod Report Templates Resource Management 195 4 Select Inventory Columns by clicking the arrow s between Available and Selected columns for example Amigopod Administrative State Amigopod DNS Hostname Amigopod Equipment Name Amigopod IP Address 5 Inthe Layout tab configure the column order top is first bottom is last 6 Notice you can also configure the font size color alignment and so on when you select a column in this tab 7 Click Save You have successfully created a template Report Template Editors Dell OpenManage Network Manager has several report template editors Creating a New template can make Comparison Table and Trend templates m Ersan aig agunt females END Inventory Layout General Settings Name Description Chart Type Summarize By Group Advanced Settings Orientation Include Chart Details Report Summary Row Separator Page Header Position Auto Column Split Group On First Attribute
157. ation run against multiple resources following a scheduled group backup of these resources If you run backups every day the Configuration Change Report then shows the daily changes until they are purged from the database The application stores the specifics of what changed for future reporting xX How To Report on Change Determination Follow these steps to produce regular change determination reports 1 First insure the devices you want to scan are discovered and send change notifications to the application server Check your vendor s manuals to determine how to forward configuration change information to Dell OpenManage Network Manager for your system 2 When Dell OpenManage Network Manager receives a configuration change notification the device transmits an event to the OpenManage Network Manager mediation server When received this event automatically generates an event called OpenManage Network ManagerEquipmentConfigChangeNotification Event history displays that notification 3 When OpenManage Network Manager receives the OpenManage Network ManagerEquipmentConfigChangeNotification event it can initiate if enabled an event processing rule called Configuration Change This processing rule triggers a flag in the OpenManage Network Manager database saying a change has occurred in the device s configuration and that OpenManage Network Manager should run change determination against the device when requested 4 When you
158. ations Topologies 2 00eeeeeee 219 Links in Visualization 20 0 c cece cece eee eee eee 220 7 File Server File Management 0000ee 221 File SEVES cocinar a 221 File Sewer Editor o ia Beda ee 222 File Management 0 0c cece eee eee eee teen eas 223 How to Backup Configurations 0000ee eee 225 How to Restore Configurations 0 0 ecee eee aeee 227 ConfigurationFiles 0 00 229 Image Repository 00 cece cece eee teen e ees 233 Firmware Image Editor 235 Configuration Image Editor 2220202202 236 Deploy Firmware 0 ccce cece eee e cece eee teen ees 238 How to Deploy Firmware 0 0c cece ee cence eens 239 Deploy Configuration sanaan rnern errereen 240 How to Restore a single configuration to many target devices 241 8 Monitoring a 243 HOW Sto sida bd ia 243 OpenManage Network Manager Server StatisticS 244 Resource Monitors 00 cc cece cece cece e eee eee 245 Retention Policies 0 0 0 0 248 Monitor Editor o o 251 How to Create an SNMP Interface Monitor 262 How to Create an ICMP Monitor 0 000 ee oo 263 How to Create a Key Metrics Monitor 5 264 How to Create a Monitor Report 0 e cece aces 265 Monitor Opti
159. ations You can configure this to run on groups of your choosing if you create a new Change Determination Process group operation p Initiate Change N S Determination p E Back up device con fig and add it to label Change Deter mination i Check internal con fig changed flag Yes No Is there a configuration change Compare configura Make equipment Copy config in tion labels change records for Change Determina Change Determina gt later reporting m gt tion label to Current tion and Current label Reset internal config changed flag i a End Change N S Determination p This process records what is removed updated or added since it last ran on a scanned device s configuration If you run the Change Determination Process on equipment it first backs up the devices configuration s and stores those with the Change Determination label Change Determination Process Change Management ProScan 327 Change Determination Process then looks for Config Changed Flags and if it finds such flags indicating a change occurred on the device it then compares the device s changed configuration in the Change Determination label to the one in the Current label storing the difference for future reporting At its end the Change Determination Process re labels the configuration with the Change Determination label to the Current label an
160. ave DNS you can also assign hostnames in Swindir System32 drivers etc hosts on Windows etc hosts in Linux Here you must assign a hostname in addition to an IP address somewhere in the system Here are some example hosts file contents including two commented lines where you would have to remove the sign to make them effective 102 54 94 97 rhino acme com source server 38 25 63 10 x acme com x client host IDO OL localhost Protocols OpenManage Network Manager uses the following protocols TCP IP SNMP HTTP S UDP Multicast Overriding Properties Dell OpenManage Network Manager lets you fine tune various features of the application Rather than lose those changes if and when you upgrade your application best practice is to override changes To do this first change the provided file oware synergy conf server overrides properties sample to server overrides properties and enable the properties within it by uncommenting them and altering them to fit your needs The comments in this file provide more information You can also override application server related properties in owareapps installprops lib installed properties Sizing for Standalone Installations Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 23 Fixed IP Address OpenManage Network Manager includes a web server and application server which must be installed to hosts with fixed IP addresses or permanently assigned Dynamic Host Control Protocol DHC
161. ave received including generated reports in My current Archived Date Details E Alerts Click the magnifying glass to the right of reports and Job Status notifications to open a separate elos 11 o8 104m Report completed a 08 08 11 07 59 AM v Discovery Profile Execute is complete viewing window The panel includes Current and Archived messages tabs Tip You can see the portal when web server is up but application server is not When application server runs after web server has started and you have already started the portal an alert appears letting you know it is up 2 08 08 11 08 10 AM Report is now ready for viewing Status Bar Alerts Portal Conventions 75 Chat Conferencing This portion of the message bar lets you send and receive messages to colleagues who are online at the same time you are Colleagues 1 Julia Ou o ps Mark Sanders o Milan Adamek o Join ES Ranjan Bonthala o Conference Name Suman Sarkar e Tex Pubs s Conference Synergy Admin o F This is a private conference Vicki Crozier e amp Invited Participants E 0 participants have been invited edit 7 a collesinues a Invite Message Settings Create admin is Show me as online Vv Play a sound when I receive a new message in a hidden window Save you are testing Y ad Colleagues This has the following fields and other possibilities for you to con
162. bandon them The right portion of the title bar 78 Status Bar Alerts Portal Conventions contains several editing controls Clicking on the wrench icon produces a menu that leads to editors for the Configuration of this portlet user permissions to view and configure Sharing and so on Tip Some portlets like Site Map let you import or export lar files of their setup and user preferences The plus or minus or icons Minimize displaying only the title bar or Maximize displaying an Expanded Portlets and X removes the portlet from the page Tip To see information about listed items in a portlet hover your cursor over the row until a question mark appears A mini query about the selected item appears in a large tooltip See Portlet Toolbar below for a description of the buttons at the top of portlets K NOTE Portlet summary screens support displaying up to 200 rows the expanded portlet supports 1000 Using the portlets filtering capability makes more sense than trying to see more rows See How to Filter Expanded Portlet Displays on page 85 Portlet Toolbar Buttons on portlet toolbars let you do the following Py Settings a Refresh Search The Question Mark icon accesses online Help opening the page appropriate for the portlet Refresh Isolates the browsers page refresh to the selected portlet Settings Contfigures the portlet s filter size and so on In portlets like Alarms t
163. be connected to a network for the application to start successfully Firewalls or even SNMP management programs using the same port on the same machine where this software is installed can interfere with communication with your equipment 22 Sizing for Standalone Installations Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager Dealing with any network barriers to communicating with OpenManage Network Manager any required initial device configuration to accept management and managing security measures or firewalls all are outside the scope of these instructions Consult with your network administrator to ensure this software has access to the devices you want to manage with the Protocols described below Tip One simple way to check connectivity from a Windows machine to a device is to open a command shell with Start gt Run cmd Then type ping device IP address atthe command line Ifthe device responds it is connected to the network If not consult your network administrator to correct this No useful information comes from disconnected or powered down devices Name Resolution OpenManage Network Manager server requires resolution of equipment names to work completely whether by host files or domain name system DNS The application server cannot respond to hosts with IP addresses alone The application server might not even be in the same network and therefore the host would be unable to connect If your network does not h
164. can Portlet Change Management ProScan You can edit already listed compliance tests by clicking the Edit button pencil and paper in the list row You can delete them by clicking the Delete button next to the criterion Match Regex for each line In using this type of term OpenManage Network Manager processes each line separately comparing the input source to the match criteria This returns a true value only if the criteria find a match in the source The order of matching is not important since OpenManage Network Manager processes each line separately Count number of occurrences This operator lets you specify a less than greater than or equal mathematical operator lt gt and a number of lines a Emo after you provide regex or string criteria Select Criteria Match Type count number of occurences El with the operator and count value eae secre eT Editing Compliance Policy Criteria This returns true if the criteria as a whole match the input source count and operator combination On the other hand for couse Les tren O example if you choose a match criterion that includes 9 lines as the operator and the scanned configuration has ten lines that match the scan returns false Apply Cancel Input Source Grouping Configuration files often have repeating sections or groups of parameters OpenManage Network Manager scan configurations by section using Start Criteria and End Criteria Regex group criteria patt
165. can Targets before running a scan particularly if your network has changed since the last scan You can also schedule this See Schedules on page 95 Modify Targets Lets you modify and or select target equipment for the policy Schedule Configure a policy to run on a schedule Audit Opens an Audit Viewer with the results of a selected policy s runs This is one way to see the historical results of proscan policy runs Another is to consult the Compliance Policy Summary snap in in the Expanded ProScan Portlet Delete Deletes the selected policy Select the item to remove and click Delete The application prompts you for confirmation Import Export Lets you import policies or export the selected policy ProScan Portlet Change Management ProScan 307 Expanded ProScan Portlet The expanded ProScan portlet lets you see the Compliance Policy Summary a reference tree of the connections between a policy and its targets and a Compliance Policy Chart snap panel i ProScan 4 Return to previous Default Compliance Policy Fitter Advanced Filter Search Refresh Settings B Description Target s Overall Compliance Monitored Enabled Proscan Type Input Source Scheduled Next Execution Date Reference Tree 2 Compliance Policy Summary Compliance Policy Chart c Force10SNMPNotPublic Equipment v Last Run Date Explicit Targets R Forces60_0 3 5112 1 31 PM PA Forces4810 3152 1 31 PM In Co 10
166. ce lets you do the following New Displays the File Server Editor screen z File Servers 17 File Server Mode Internal External Enabled Hame y Description IP Address Julia s FTP 192 168 1341 TFTP Enabled Edit Displays the selected File Server in the File Server Editor screen Disable Disables the selected file server When file servers are disabled they are not used in a Backup Restore or Deploy operation This too appears only for External File Servers Enable Activates the selected file server Again exposed for External file Servers only Test Tests the selected file server by sending and retrieving a file Delete Removes the selected file server from the list This appears for External File Servers only K NOTE You can select whether Dell OpenManage Network Manager is in Internal or External File Server Mode with the radio buttons at the top of this portlet Checking Show All Servers displays the internal file server CAUTION Port conflicts prevent having an external file server and internal file server operate on the same machine Columns in this manager identify the server and describe whether it is enabled and has TFTP enabled File Servers File Server File Management 221 File Server Editor This editor lets you configure new and existing file servers lios Fila Sanap General Parameters Name koss Description Unique identifier Jorns ext
167. cense permits it such management may be possible but more limited than for devices with drivers installed N CAUTION If your license limits the number of devices you manage discovering such generic devices may count against that limit Discovery Profiles Resource Management 155 156 The Filters by Location Vendor or Device Type let you narrow the list of devices discovered by the selected item s As the screen says this filtering will not have any impact on the processing that occurs during the Inspection step K NOTE Fields like Location query the database for current information so even though its field may appear empty Locations may exist Click the Search button to the right of this field to populate it Keeping such fields empty until you use them enhances performance The buttons at the bottom of the Profile Editor let you navigate through this series of panels Previous Next move back and forth between screens Save lets you preserve whatever stage you have configured and close the editor Inspect moves directly to the Inspection screen described below and Execute triggers the discovery profile and opens the Results panel displaying message traffic between Dell OpenManage Network Manager and the device s Click the X in the top right corner of these screens to close them without saving Tip If you discover devices without retrieving their hostnames and that hostname is needed later you c
168. ceptions appear in application server log every fifth minute To prevent this alter etc security limits conf Here administrators can set hard and soft limits for the file handles for users and user groups These settings take effect on reboot Best practice is to set the following for OpenManage Network Manager on a single machine lt Installing User gt soft nofile 65536 lt Installing User gt hard nofile 65536 lt Installing User gt is the installing user login Set these higher for more heavily used systems You can also check set file handles temporarily using the ulimit H Sn command Like the following ulimit Hn ulimit Sn xX How To Set Linux Permissions These following ensures appropriate permissions exist so that the install succeeds on Linux Your steps may vary slightly depending on the version on which you install 1 Create a user for example redcell 2 Typically the redce11 user s home directory resembles export home redce11 3 In any case ensure that user redcel1 owns its home directory the export home redcell directory 4 Create dell openmanage networkmanager and ensure that your user redce11 owns dell openmanage networkmanager de1l openmanage networkmanager is Dell OpenManage Network Manager s installation root 5 Ifnecessary unzip the downloaded installation package into a subdirectory under user redcel1 s home directory 6 Ensure the unzipped script file linux_inst
169. change color to display the Columns can be re ordered by dragging the column up or down in the list below Service ID columns you want You can also ae drag and drop the order in which DS columns appear to re arrange the Customer display Click Apply to change the columns that appear on screen by default Abandon any changes and Close this screen The changes appear instantaneously when you return to the expanded portlet Target Y Apply xXx Close Pages Most portlets use the recorder icons to page through a list that occupies more than one screen The right left arrows go forward and back one page The icons at SL either end go to the beginning or end of the pages Exports Excel and Acrobat icons appear at the top right corner of the expanded portlet Click ap these to export the list contents as either an Excel spreadsheet xls or a pdf file These Ea download to the default download location you have configured on your browser Some browsers display the pdf before you can save it 84 Status Bar Alerts Portal Conventions Snap Panels Reference Tree These vary depending on the portlet but the convention of Reference Tree displaying a Reference Tree panel is common This displays E Router oware net 192 168 0 17 items related to the selected list item in tree form Click the JE C3825 Chassis Slot 0 plus to expand a node on the tree A C3825 Chassis Slot 2 Click Retu
170. creen contains a list of Audit Records Click one of this list to see the Job details as you would in the Audit Trail Jobs Screen 92 Audit Trail Jobs Screen Portal Conventions Audit Trail Portlet The audit trail summary portlet displays an archive of the message traffic between Dell OpenManage Network Manager and monitored devices as well as OpenManage Network Manager s reaction to failed message transmission W Audit Trail 17 Settings gt Refresh Search Creation Date v 8 8411 9 10 AM 8 8411 9 07 AM 8 811 9 03 AM 8 811 8 33 AM 8 811 8 33 AM 8 811 8 33 AM Subject Action 2 admin 2 admin 9 CiscoCat60 amp CiscoCat60 E Router 10 1 2 a op User Modifi Proscan Tar gp User Modifi gt Pool Synchr D Equipment R Pool Synchr 3 14 x User ID Status amp OWsystem B A admin 2 owsystem B A admin amp admin A admin The Creation Date Subject Action the summary message of the audit trail User ID the login ID of the user whose actions resulted in this trail and Status of the messages appear in the table hover the cursor over the icon for a text message describing status Right click to Delete a message manage its Aging Policy or View as PDE See Redcell gt Database Aging Policies DAP on page 50 for more about such policie Tip S To see the audit trail for recently completed pr
171. creen presents the Specify Event Filtering portion of the screen without any Settings in the lower screen Specify events to reject with this selection and filtering Event Processing Rules Key Portlets 113 Set Severity This rule overrides the default alarm severity of an event selected and filtered in the upper screen Specify Settings for Set Severity Set Severity Cleared gt Overrides the default severity of the event State Flutter This type of rule changes event behavior on transient state change events like a series of LinkUp and LinkDown events for the same interface Specify Settings for State Flutter Interval 5 Action Reject Suppress C Publish Event E Changes event behavior on transient state change events such as a series of linkDown and linkUp events for same interface After you select the event and filtering enter the Interval seconds the Action Reject or Suppress the event and check Publish Event if you want it to register for Dell OpenManage Network Manager If you Reject an event it does not appear in Event history if you Publish it however listeners for that event will hear it Suppress Alarm This screen presents the Specify Event Filtering portion of the screen without any Settings in the lower screen Specify events alarms to suppress with this selection and filtering Syslog This screen presents the Specify Event Filtering portion of the screen without any Settings in the low
172. ct Routers Select a template for the report in the pick list For example the template configured in How to Create a Report Template Tip If you create a template the first report you create after making that template automatically selects the newly created template In the Filters tab you can create a filter to confine the reports input to certain devices locations and so on Here select the existing All Powerconnect Routers filter Click Save Locate the newly created report in the Reports portlet Right click and select Execute Click the My Alerts panel in the lower left corner of the portal Click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Report is now ready for viewing message The report appears onscreen Hover your cursor over the lower right corner of the report to see a set of icons that let you expand zoom out and in save l ka a A A or print the report K NOTE Some reports may appear pre seeded in the portlet that are not supported by your package For example pool reports may appear for programmatic restrictions on pooled assets like IP addresses or Route Targets not supported Report Editor This editor configures reports and their targets It has the following screens and fields General Filter 204 Reports Resource Management General This screen configures the Name Title displayed text in the report Subtitle and lets you select the Report Template for the repo
173. cy by right clicking in the ProScan portlet selecting New gt Policy In the General tab name this policy MyTestContactScan and as an input select the Configuration Label gt Current label as the Input Source In the Targets tab select the equipment from which you exported the config file In the Criteria tab click Add Criteria enter contains MyTestContact as the Match All of the following criteria Click Save Right click the new policy and select Execute Compliance The audit screen that appears should indicate Success Right click and Open the MyTestContactScan policy and change the Criteria to does not contain MyTestContact Save Introducing ProScan and Change Management Change Management ProScan 305 16 Re execute the policy 17 The audit screen that appears should indicate Failure Alarms Events Once you have a ProScan policy that has failed the redcellProScanFailureNotification alarm appears in the Alarms portlet Success produces and event not an alarm visible in the Event History portlet called redcellProScanClearNotification To create a response create processing rules for the event alarm see Event Processing Rules on page 108 For example you could restore the Compliant labeled configuration file if redcellProScanFailureNotification occurs or send an e mail to a technician among many other responses Some Limitations in this Example Note that this example does not change authenticati
174. d Adding New SNMP Table Attribute Oid Row Identifier instance Name Foreign Key Series Name Rowldentifier Units Meta Syntax Counter lal Save o Cancel It has the following fields Oid A field where you can enter the object identifier This also has an integrated search function Click the magnifying glass icon on the right to activate it A successful search populates the rest of the fields for the object identifier Row Identifier T his mandatory field defaults to instance The OID instance Name The text identifier for the OID Foreign Key Enter the foreign key if any Series Name This defaults to Rowldentifier Units Enter the units of measurement Resource Monitors Monitoring 275 Meta Syntax Further refine the variable type with the pick list For example you can select Counter32 a 32 bit counter For Counter types the monitor computes change from previous readings and for Gauges it does not NOTE If a message appears saying Device fault Return packet too big in the Monitor Status Summary then you have selected too many SNMP attributes to poll in a single request Please modify your monitor to request smaller numbers of attributes Scheduling Refresh Monitor Targets Because monitors can address targets that are members of dynamic groups refreshing these ensures that group memberships are up to date To do this you can create or alter the schedule for Moni
175. d austin other If you select Visualize a map of the selected location s connection to equipment appears See Chapter 5 Visualize for more The Update Coordinates option lets you revise a location s longitude and latitude See Tag on page 138 for more This screen has the following columns Icon The icon for this location Name The name for this location Details A description for this location Type A designated type for the location Locations Key Portlets 135 Location Editor i Editing Location Folsom Lab When you click New or Open General Location Information an editor appears The Name field is mandatory iii Folsom Lab Name A unique name for Gan Ha the Location If you alter the name of an existing location already in use by existing equipment the Postal Address editor creates a new location To change a location name you must e delete the original zo location and the equipment using it then re make it You can change the name of an unused location without deleting anything Details Type area hub y Additional fel Save Cancel Parent The parent of this location the location to which this location is subordinate Select a Parent Location from the pick list The maximum number of levels supported is 15 Details A text description of the location Type Type of location as selected from the drop down menu Available type
176. d or the to remove an existing one Click and drag icons to locations on that image after it has appeared onscreen The selector looks for images on the machine where the browser is located The size and appearance of images depends on the resolution of the monitor and the layout of the page in the browser For example setting the screen to1280 by 1024 pixel resolution with a one column layout for the page where topology appears a background graphic can be as large as 800 x 650 pixels 212 Visualize My Network Visualize VIEW DETAILS This panel displays the saved status of the current View and has buttons to let you Save or Load Existing saved views The View Name defaults to Not Saved when the display has not yet been saved Clicking Save displays a screen where you can Name and enter a Description for the view you are saving You can also configure a saved view for Dell OpenManage Network Manager to Use as Default so it appears by default whenever you see a topology view My View My Main View Saving preserves Views and current Layout Level Node Edge Settings Top Level graphic elements Name Description Owner Dates and Filters Clicking Load Existing loads other saved views selected from a screen that also lets you Delete a selected view Users who do not own the retrieved view can save a copy Deletion is only possible for views you own Id Name iptis Created 6 MyView My Main View 05 22 11 18 25 PM
177. d 71 Portal QvernvieW ter iue dt pi 71 TOMOS ada th or oe he a haha de 8 OA 72 Refresh meg Av de ets tele ae eee ee e ey 72 The BackButtod o 72 Show Versions 0 0 0 o 72 The Dock sess Seca asee o orca eens bacon ee 73 Status Bar Alerts 00 ccc cece cece ence ent e nent ne en eens 75 Chat Conferencing a 76 Ment Bat ua oa da ae ee eed Re Se RS 71 Site MAD sox ve wan aes e nate we eee a ee Sete 77 Graphss ctahn a aa be a a a Be g 77 PortletS 22 3 wee nran ee SRA BOR Pe leg 78 Expanded Portlets 82 How to Show Hide Reorder Columns 84 How to Filter Expanded Portlet DisplayS 85 Common Menu Items 00 0 c cece cece cece cece nannan 86 Import Export ear ir Oe eee Be eee E Pi 86 SMANING 56 2105 24 yas ee De nee au at RAMS ay tb A oda han as doe 87 How to Share a Resource cc cece cece ence nanna 88 Edit Custom Attributes 0 0020 000 89 Viewas PDF zia a 3 a tte het Soe wie oe we A 90 MaG paias outa cut eyes eit Chee 2 Bet ates Soph eae cage 90 Audit Trail Jobs Screen 0 cece ccc ccc eee cence eens 91 Audit Trail Viewer 92 Audit Trail Portlet avion iii 93 Schedule cc a i n a 95 Schedules Portlet 0 o o 95 A E 99 Overview of Key Portlets oooooooococococcoccrrrro 99 AMS cies Dona Me ads E 100 E
178. d Adaptive CLI If P_ MASK is true and SUBNET is false then OpenManage Network Manager accepts one of the 32 valid subnet masks The widget displays pick list for user to choose from For example 255 255 255 0 If IP_MASK is true and SUBNET is true then OpenManage Network Manager accepts a subnet id the first IP address within a subnet For example 10 10 10 0 24 with 10 10 10 0 as the first address within the subnet spanning 10 10 10 0 to 10 10 10 254 Entering an IP address within the subnet say 10 10 10 4 24 the attribute would convert that to 10 10 10 0 24 ALLOW_32_BIT_MASK Valid subnet values are between and 31 To extend this to support a 32 bit subnet which is essentially a single IP address 10 10 10 4 32 set the ALLOW_32_BIT_MASK property ALLOW_ANY_VALID_IP To accept either an IP address IP address and subnet or subnet then IP_MASK remains false SUBNET is true With the ALLOW_ANY_VALID_IP true the subnet field is optional and OpenManage Network Manager disables any requirement that a subnet id be specified Basically the only validation is that a valid IP address is entered For example in this configuration 10 10 10 4 10 10 10 4 24 and 10 10 10 0 24 would all be valid Scripts This screen manages the Adaptive CLI scripts created to query show devices or configure them Dell OpenManage Network Manager runs only one script per target General Attributes cya Script Settings Add Hew Script Na
179. d Equip admin x 2E n 2 gt n Click the Delete icon to the right of a listed filter to remove it from the system Click the disk icon to export the filter Clicking the Import button at the top of the screen lets you import previously exported filters Tip To find a particular filter click the Search magnifying glass icon in the lower left cor ner of this screen 48 Control Panel Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager Clicking the Edit icon to the right of a listed filter or clicking the Add Filter button opens the filter editor y Traein NEW Alter Name Entity Type TestFilter Managed Equipment Description Shared Test E Allow fiter to be shared by all users Filter Criteria Add Group Delete Group T AND Match All of the following Vendor is Dell Inc T OR Match Any of the following Vendoris Juniper Networks Inc Criteria Group or x Vendor i Juniper Networks Inc O al Save o Cancel Use this editor to configure filters Enter a Name and Description and use the green plus to select an entity type If you check Shared to make the filter available to all users You can add groups of filter criteria click Add Group that logical AND or OR with each other Configure the filter in the Criteria Group panel as described in the How to Filter Expanded Portlet D
180. d User gatester Acknowledged false Ack By Ack Time Cleared By Date Cleared MIB Text Monitor session was skipped due to resource constraints Typically this implies one or more monitors should run less frequently This may also be caused by a large number of timeouts which force executions to take longer to complete than normal Advisory Text Alarms Key Portlets 105 106 Event History Not all events appear as alarms Event History preserves all event information for your system aj Event History P X O Settings gt Refresh Search Receive Time y Entity Name Device IP Event Name A 8 81 10 07 AM 7 QA XP 004Partition 1 10 201 157 bgpBackwa A 8 811 10 07 AM 9 QA XP 004Partition 1 10 20 1157 bgpBackwa A 8 811 10 07 AM QA XP 004Partition 1 10 20 1 157 bgpBackwa A 8 811 10 07 AM 7 QA XP 0D4Partition 1 10 201 157 bgpBackwa A 8 811 10 06 AM QA XP 0D4Partition 1 10 201 157 bgpBackwa A 3 811 10 06 AM 7 QA XP OD4Partition 1 10 201 157 bgpBackwa K 4 211314 PM The initial portlet view displays an icon whose color reflects any alarm state associated with the event It also displays the Receive Time Entity Name Device IB and Event Name You can right click to Share with User in this screen Tip Hovering the cursor over the DevicelP column produces a tooltip that lets you know the device s current state up down and that contains Model Vendor
181. d it un sets the Config Changed Flag on scanned resources so the flag will not signal change occurred when Change Determination runs again After running the Change Determination Process you can run the Configuration Change report to display what changed for a defined period The contents of that report depends on the report filter and the specified period This report lists changed attributes in the configurations You can also execute CD as a scheduled operation Find it in the Schedules portlet where it is disabled by default Open and enable it CD runs with the All Devices group as its target You can also execute CD as a target action of an Event Processing Rule so it runs against the device that generated the trap triggering that Rule See Event Processing Rules on page 108 In either case Dell OpenManage Network Manager determines incremental configuration changes for resources by comparing the latest backup version against the version to which a resource s Change Determination label points Before making this comparison Dell OpenManage Network Manager determines whether it made configuration changes that have not yet been backed up If such changes exist Dell OpenManage Network Manager backs up the resource configuration before running the CD process Dell OpenManage Network Manager always flags configuration changes made in Dell OpenManage Network Manager between backups clearing these flags following a config file backup Once
182. dCell_Config_EquipmentManager_Contact a unique identifier for the database s Contact field wherever you put the cursor Image Repository File Management 237 238 Now when you deploy this config file to the devices that pass the filter in the General Parameters editor screen Dell OpenManage Network Manager first updates this parameter with discovered data retrieved from the device before restoring the configuration This facilitates deploying the same config to many devices while retaining individual Target Params like contacts DNS Hostname and so on K NOTE Target Params include all available discover able parameters Some may not apply to the specific device or configuration file Deploy Firmware This screen lets you configure a deployment whether triggered from resource groups individual resources or the Image Repository screen Deployment validates the selected image is appropriate for the selected devices or appropriate devices within a group 1 DEDO Frasers Deploy Options Results Selected OS Image OS Image PowerConnect_5324 2013 Description PowerConnect 5324 Firmware Device Class Dell PowerConnect Version 201 3 Device Family OSVersion Select Targets For Deployment Add Equipment Add Groups Remove AI Hame Software Version Firmware Version Status Action Dell3324 172 20 7 11 172 20 7 11 1 0 0 06 1 0 0 52 p Lo Device Options No
183. de a Reference Tree panel that displays the interface s root equipment and its sub components The Details panel also appears with the following fields Creator The user that created this interface Slot Number This interface s type For example Loopback Name The interface name Equipment Name The name of the equipment that contains the interface Administrative State The state of the interface Port Number The port for this interface IP Address The interface s IP address CLI Name The command line interface name Interface Number A numeric identifier for the interface Interface Description A text description for the interface Interface Icon An icon for the interface Equipment Details Resource Management Interfaces Mame y Operational State F vlan10 Router oware n Enabled TF vlan1 Router oware ne Enabled TF loopback70 Router ow Enabled Tr loopback454 Router o Enabled TF SigabitEthernet0 0 100 Enabled Max items displayed Details Creator Slot Humber Encapsulation LOOPBACK Notes index Install Date MTU Operational State of Enabled Subnet Mask Date created Wed Jun 09 15 33 40 PDT 2010 Container Index Interface Type Loopback Interface Name loophack454 Equipment Hame Router oware net 192 168 0 17 Administrative State Port Humber IP Address CLI Name Interface Number Interface Description ACLI Soak test Interface Ic
184. discovery Described in Inspection on page 159 Quick Discovery Opens discovery wizard displaying network and authentications Click the Execute button once you open this screen to quickly discover equipment See Network on page 156 for more about the screen this displays Schedule Opens schedule editor where you can create and or modify the schedule for a discovery profile s execution Audit Displays audit trails for the selected profile See Audit Trail Jobs Screen on page 91 Delete Deletes a discovery profile after you confirm deletion A notification message appears when deletion is completed on the application server The remaining menu items include Import Export Selection Export All and if other users exist in the system Share with User K NOTE Dell OpenManage Network Manager discovers Aruba Access points through the controllers to which they connect discovery does not find stand alone access points Discovery Profile Editor This editor lets you create or modify profiles It has the following sub sections e General e Network e Actions e Inspection e Results xX How To Edit Discovery Profiles 154 Here are the steps that appear in Discovery Profile Editor General The General Panel collects all required data for a discovery profile Dell OpenManage Network Manager validates each field one at a time Hints and tooltips appear if you hover your cursor near a field or label Disco
185. e Configuration AL Silver Group O O MR Community Member 0O Bg Now check View for the relevant roles for example Silver Group Click Save You should now be able to log out as admin and log in as Guest or other community members and confirm you cannot view the portlet you just configured xX How To Configure Resource Level Permissions You can provide permission for a user group role organization on a defined resource The following outlines the steps Create a Container for each Customer Configure Membership for Container resources that customer can access Set Authorization for User Container Set up a Page for Device Level View Redcell gt Database Aging Policies DAP Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 59 Create a Container for each Customer 1 In Container Manager Portlet right click to select New 2 Create a container for the desired customer naming and describing it 3 In the Authorizations tab for this container delete authorization for ALL non portal Add authorization for Synergy Admin Add authorization for Power User Role and delete the Vendors Child Container General Membership Authorizations Container Authorizations Add User Add Group User Group Hame Inherited From Action 2 Power User lt Not Inherited gt 21 E inherit Authorized List entries from parent container and combine them with any that are explicitly
186. e Expression Enter a regular expression for Parse Expression and the Parse Algorithm Extract or Match used when evaluating the device output on a given script execution Click Apply to accept your edits or Cancel to abandon them Click Add new attribute extraction to add more such patterns to your script Attribute Appearance and Validation Invalid schema attribute names appear in the script in red italics This indicates that you cannot use such attributes in the script Valid attribute names contain alphanumeric characters and underscore _ They must begin with either an underscore or a letter A Za z All blank space characters in the schema attribute name are converted to underscore _ by default A schema attribute name that is invalid in Adaptive CLI may still be valid in other entities so you can specify them in the schema but they are not usable by Adaptive CLI Click Apply to accept your edits for the script or Cancel to abandon them Actions Portlet Actions and Adaptive CLI 351 Comparison Selecting ctrl clicking two Adaptive CLI runs within the Execution History portlet lets you compare the two execution results Right click and select Compare Lines that differ between the two configurations appear highlighted green Lines that are missing in one but that appear in another appear highlighted red Added lines appear highlighted in yellow Use the right left arrows at the bottom of this screen to page through
187. e labels appears onscreen once you click this option or Restore a specific Configuration File The latter lists available files and lets you click to select Click Apply to configure the selected target or Apply to All to configure all targets Click one of the buttons at the bottom of the screen to initiate the next backup action Add Schedule opens the scheduling screen to let you automate the restoration you have configured on a specified date time or repetition See Scheduling Actions on page 361 Execute performs the restoration immediately The Results tab in this screen opens displaying the message traffic between Dell OpenManage Network Manager and the device s See Audit Trail Portlet on page 93 Save preserves this configuration without scheduling or executing it Close closes this screen without saving the configured restoration File Management File Server File Management Configuration Files One place backed up configuration files can dd Coirrigiiratin Fies SE appear is in this portlet Right clicking offers you the following options all options listed i Settings 1 Qrotresh y Search may not be available Equipment v File Hame Date Saved Version we JuniperMmM5 10 12 E DefaultConfig 8 811 8 26 AM 1 View Edit See or edit the backed up configuration file if it is not a binary file See File Management on page 223 and Configuration File Editor on page 231 for a description of these capabilities
188. e to keep the current layout The components displayed to reflect the selected new layout PR Creating cistom Dashboard View Properties View Name TimeFrame 7 ette last 2 30 Minutes y Layout 1 2 Columns 30 70 Dashboard Component Grid If no dashboard components have been configured yet a default configuration appears with three or four rows depending on the dashboard style If the dashboard components have been configured it will create at least enough rows to display all the configured dashboard Dashboard Views Monitoring 283 components Add more rows by clicking on the Add Row button An individual dashboard component can be deleted by clicking on the delete button on the component Moving Dashboard Components 4 To move a dashboard component to another location click and drag it over another component When you release the mouse the components exchange places Configuring Dashboard Components 5 To configure a dashboard component click the Edit button in the upper right corner of the component The component editor appears Editing Dashboard View Component General Properties Title Show Title O Component Type Line x Monitor aCLiqatest x Monitor Targets Attributes Remove All Monitor Targeta Actiona No data is available to display lel Save Cancel The following properties appear in the General Properties sectio
189. ed actions Cisco XR Router Series Drivers Change Management Brocade restricted actions Edition Expiration Date Valid IP User Version COMMON 12 Jul 2012 4 DoradoSoftware 7 0 ALL 12 Jul 2012 DoradoSoftware 7 0 ALL 12 Jul 2012 t DoradoSoftware 7 0 CORE 12 Jul 2012 o DoradoSoftware 7 0 COMMON 12 Jul 2012 DoradoSoftware 70 COMMON 12 Jul 2012 DoradoSoftware 70 ALL 12 Jul 2012 DoradoSoftware 70 SH E A z a N Active Config License Details Product License for AC EDITION COMMON DESCRIPTION Active Config USER DoradoSoftware Ip EXPIRATION 11 Jul 2012 EXPIRATION DATE 12 Jul 2012 VERSION 7 0 KEY AMW 43198010 17280 E IS VALID APPPROPS APMType ACMonitor true Permissinn AC idantiveCIT FFFF Click Close to return to Dell OpenManage Network Manager You may find Licenses in a name slightly different from the one you expect For example the Reports portlet is licensed as part of the Inventory Manager product 62 License Viewer Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager xX How To Register a License To register a license click the Select File button at the top and use the subsequent screen to select a license file Tip To import a license when application server is not running type Licenseimporter license file name onacommand line You must restart application server or wait up to 15 minutes before a license modificat7ion takes effect Product L
190. edcell gt Database Aging Policies DAP Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager Sub Policies Some types of Database Aging Policies can have sub policies that further refine the aging for their type of contents Aging Policies Repositories Adding new Audit Trail Logs Aging Policy General Audit Trail Sub Policies Add Sub Policy Component Action Type Retention Days Archive Action al All 30 o gt m FileXter API FTP Get Activated 30 Y aia ov Apply Cancel Redcell gt Database Aging Policies DAP Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 55 56 These appear listed in the Aging Policies Options tab Click Add Sub Policy to create them Notice that you can Edit or Delete listed policies with the icons in the far right Action column in this list Aging Policies Repositories Editing Audit Trail Sub Policy Component Action Type Retention Days Archive S Apply o Cancel FileXter API xl Filter by Component FTP Get Activated zl Select Action Type to apply sub policy te 30 Enter number of days Vv Check to activate archiving of data removed from the database Such sub policies contain the following types of fields Component Select the component for the sub policy from the pick list Action Type This further sub classifies the Component Retention Days The number of days to keep the aged item before archiving it Archive Check this to act
191. edit your user information by clicking the link with your username in the top right corner of the screen Your user name does not appear in this screen Notice that if you select View gt Hierarchy you can see organizations grouped together with their component locations groups and users xX How To Add Users and connect them to Roles Add Users with the following steps 1 Click Go to gt Control Panel and navigate to Portal gt Users and Organizations 2 Click the Add gt User menu item at the top of the Users and Organizations screen 3 Enter the details of the new user If you are editing an existing user more fields appear Screen Name and Email Address are required Optionally you can enter Name Job Title and so on 4 After you click Save notice that the right panel expands to include additional information Make sure you specify a Password 36 Control Panel Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 5 Notice that if you are editing an existing user or creating a new one you can use the links on the right to configure connections with Roles Roles in particular configure the OpenManage Network Manager functional permissions for that user For example the group of Operators would likely have more limited capabilities than Administrators 6 Click Save again and the user you just configured should appear listed in the Users and Organizations screen when you select View gt All Users 7 To assign a user t
192. efresh Collected Data ATM B Vv Ethernet D z Fibre Channel E Vv SONET E d E Advanced Options TF Archive Data The selection of data archiving will archive off current data before data collection and link creation occurs Ignore Links with Incomplete End Point Information Include Links with Incomplete End Point Information A Add Schedule ig Execute When you elect to discover links from a right click menu the Network Link Discovery screen appears Check the type of links you want to discover or from which you want to refresh collected data Other options available on this screen include the following Layer 2 Layer 3 checkboxes Select the layer for which you want to discover links Depending on the layer selected the available types appear as checkboxes below this tab selection Tip Click All None to select all or none of the displayed types for each layer Remember selecting more link types consumes more time and processing power 176 Managed Resources Resource Management Advanced Options Archive Data Checking this archives current data before collecting information about and discovering links Ignore Include Links with Incomplete Endpoint Information Select the option best suited for your network Click Add Schedule to schedule link discovery or Execute to run it now and confirm you are willing to wait for results in a subsequent screen The Job Viewer tab in the link discovery scree
193. eir color reflects the highest alarm state on that device Icons that appear on the right in the summary tree view displays the highest alarm severity for that type of device Visualize My Network Visualize 215 Layout The layout tab lets you select and configure the type of automated node layout that appears in the topology display E Layout A CURRENT LAYOUT Balloon Minimal nodes spacing A 99 Child angular sector A 369 _ _ _ Root angular sector messi 366 Overlap avoidance method Approximative O Even angle distribution Cluster Policy Horizontal Clusier Spacing porra 20 Under CURRENT LAYOUT use the pick list to select the type of layout The fields and selectors that appear below depend on the selection Here are the available layouts and the fields that go with them Balloon Balloon layouts display links between managed objects in a balloon tree structure The root is typically whatever device you have expanded or drilled into You can specify the following in the settings for this layout Minimal nodes spacing Use the slider to determine how close nodes Oo are to each other Child Root angular sector 0 Use the slider to determine the angular sector The root sector determines how much of an arc around that root the child nodes fill and the child sector determines the orientation around the child nodes Overlap avoidance method Select App
194. elected node appear on the right In addition to the Device Results tab which displays what the currently selected device uses from the MIB the MIB Information tab displays the parameters available for the selected node S Mis Browser titled SNIE Tecan RFC Standard MIBs E RFC 1215 RFC1155 SMI E 2 RFC1243 MIB E RFC1414 MIB E RIPv2 MIB 7 RMON MIB RMON2 MIB SE RFC1213 MIB LJ Nodes mib 2 e system interfaces ifNumber ifTable le ifEntry ifindex 6 ifDescr 16 fType 16 ifMtu e ifSpeed sl Device Results MAI gt gt ifindex 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 Hame ifindex oD 1381 212211 Type OBJECT TYPE Status mandatory Syntax INTEGER Access read only Comments Notification Variables Valid Values A unique value for each interface Its value ranges between 1 and the value of ifNumber The value for each interface must remain constant at least from one re initialization of the entity s network management system to the next re initialization Notice that the Description Comments Notification Variables and Valid Values tabs appear at the bottom of this screen Direct Access Resource Management 189 Terminal This opens a terminal shell connected to the selected device amua secaos Caa 2a x File Edit Terminal User Access Verification admin Default domain is not set Name address lookup uses domain service Name servers are
195. em contains Dell OpenManage Network Manager s content Click a node to see available portlets See Portlets on page 78 Manage This menu lets you alter the following Page page order note that you can drag and drop pages within the Pages tab permissions appearance and so on You can create Children pages and can Import Export page configurations as described below Manage Page x a RC Synergy Pages Services Add Child Page Y Permissions Q Delete Copy Portlets from Page 4 Pages RC Synergy Performance E SEO Resources Name Required Look and Feel i Services ES Other Languages 0 Y Alarms HTML Title Other Languages 0 e Friendly URL Admin http 192 168 1 31 8080 web guest services Save Cancel T Hidden Type Portlet y sl The Dock Portal Conventions 73 Use the screen that appears after selecting Manage gt Page to configure add or delete pages and to manage their appearance and permissions You must refresh any altered page before edits take effect Tip You can create a new page then Copy Portlets from Page you can duplicate another page s portlets on the selected page Page Layout Configure the page s columns This menu item does not appear if you have an expanded portlet open because the focus is not in the context of a page Tip The Freeform page layout may stack portlets on top of one another Toggle the Fullscreen icon in the upper right c
196. enManage Network Manager provides local resolution of autonomous system numbers ASN based on static mapping of AS number registrations It also supports user overrides to the default mappings To do this configure properties you can find in the owareapps trafficanalyzer lib ta properties file Remember best practice is to override properties as described in Overriding Properties on page 23 xX How To Use Traffic Flow Analyzer 1 Register the device s you want to analyze As in Exporter Registration A message confirms registration s success 2 Look in the Traffic Flow Portlet for the flows captured 294 How does it work Traffic Flow Analyzer 3 Remember you can Drill Down to specific data and Search for specific devices monitored For more about Traffic Flow in context of network management see Traffic Flow Analyzer Example on page 300 Exporter Registration Before you can collect traffic data from a device you must Register it as a traffic flow exporter If a device is not registered the Register command appears in the menu If it is registered the Unregister command appears When you successfully register an eligible device a success message appears otherwise a failure message appears and no registration occurs The Show Traffic menu option opens a drop in full screen Traffic Flow Portlet with a pick list of available information types This displays the Exporters Detail Top 5 Applicatio
197. ent On the left you can enter text Search by clicking the magnifying glass and use Cut Copy Paste Undo Jump to Line reformat The Attributes appear under Target Params on the right of this text entry screen Double click an attribute to insert it unless you are writing a Perl script this feature does not work for Perl Right click the previously configured attributes in this panel to designate them as Mandatory Optional Not Applicable or Non Configuration in a context menu that appears when you right click Tip The Non Configuration attributes you select are not sent to the device with the script but can serve to remind users of critical information For example you can make Non Configuration boolean attributes into a checklist for someone executing a script and the history of this script records whether these checks were made when the script executed Notice that the Search also permits Regular expressions You can also enter two types of script language here See Adaptive CLI Script Language Syntax on page 358 for a description of the internal If capabilities If you need more elaborate scripting you can also use Perl scripts to send text to devices See Perl Scripts on page 360 for a description of those capabilities Actions Portlet Actions and Adaptive CLI 349 350 Error Conditions The error condition lets you configure errors for your script Script Content Error Conditions Continue Patterns e Error C
198. entications and the Status column displays whether a valid authentication exists whether it has been tested and whether the test is successful When authentications are unsuccessful click the icons to their right to remove or edit them You can also click the wrench screwdriver fix it icon in the Discover column to open an editor where you can revise the authentications for that device a Jarlig Disenyery rolls Wise yer ilai jaar General Network Actions inspection Result 6 Inspect Network using current settings optional Device Auth Tests 10 128 4 230 Test Device Create New Choose Existing Close Protocol Type Auth Name Auth Params Status Actions No data is available to display Auth Test Status Auths Add Existing Authentication To Resource Discovery Authentication Name SNMPv1iv2c snmp_QA gt Protocol Type SNMPv1 xl Select Management Interface Parameters Timeout Retries 2 Port 161 SL Apply Cancel dy Execute x Close Previous M Inspect Clicking Create New lets you create new authentications Choose Existing lets you select from existing authentications Test Device lets you try out the authentications you have selected and Close closes this screen Notice that you can configure new or existing authentications port retry and timeout settings before you click Apply or Cancel in the authentication editor that appears after clicking t
199. ents Clicking on the button brings up the entity selector Attribute The attribute to get data for Max of Entities The number of entities to display Order Select either Ascending Bottom n or Descending Top n Convert Simple Dashboards to Custom Dashboards To convert a simple dashboard to a custom dashboard use the Convert command on the Dashboard Views menu You cannot convert custom dashboards to simple dashboards Show Performance Templates By default the Show Performance command displays data for the first twelve attributes it finds You can control which attributes appear when you select Show Performance by creating a performance template A performance template lets you set dashboard parameters and associate them to one or more device models Then when you execute Show Performance on a device of that type those dashboard parameters display the dashboard for that device xX How To Create A Performance Template 286 To create a performance template follow these steps 1 Right click in the Dashboard Views portlet and click on the Performance Templates menu item 2 The Performance Templates manager appears Show Performance Templates Monitoring 3 To create a new performance template click on the Add button The Performance Template Editor appears sileling ess Harunun feolata General Template Parameters Template Name duniperRouterMaxRTT Show Composites Time Frame within la
200. er Service Resynced 2 admin 815111 9 49 AM Redcell Service Center ig Service Resynced A admin 8 15 11 9 49 AM Redcell Service Center 5 Service Resynced A admin 8M5M1 9 49 AM Redcell Service Center 5 Service Resynced 2 admin 81511 9 49 AM Redcell Service Center 59 Service Resynced A admin 81541 9 49 AM Adaptive CLI gt Adaptive CLI Device 2 admin 815411 9 49 AM Adaptive CLI Adaptive CLI Command 2 admin 81511 9 49 AM Redcell Service Center amp Service Resynced 2 admin 8511 9 49 AM Redcell Service Center 1 Service Resynced 2 admin 81541 9 49 AM Redcell Service Center 59 Service Resynced 2 admin 192 168 1 31 Es JuniperM5 10 128 3 15 10 192 168 131 E JuniperMS 10 128 3 15 10 192 168 1 31 Ls JuniperMS 10 128 3 15 10 192 168 1 31 E JuniperMS 10 128 3 15 10 192 168 1 31 E JuniperMS 10 128 3 15 10 192 168 1 31 JuniperM5 10 128 3 15 10 192 168 1 31 Es duniperMS 10 128 3 15 10 192 168 1 31 E Juniperm5 10 128 3 15 10 192 168 1 31 Ea duniperMS 10 128 3 15 10 192 168 1 31 E JuniperMS 10 128 3 15 10 192 168 1 31 SY JuniperM5 10 128 3 15 10 192 168 1 31 2 JuniperM5 10 128 3 15 10 192 168 1 31 JuniperM5 10 128 3 15 10 192 168 1 31 Juniper JUNOS show interf 192 168 1 31 JuniperM5 10 128 3 15 10 192 168 1 31 2 JuniperM5 10 128 3 15 10 sa K sa wy sa 157 sa wy sa wy sa K ra wy ra 15 sa wy ra wy sa wy sa K sa 157 sa wy sa 5 192 168 1 31
201. er screen Specify events to select Then click Next to go to the Escalation tab Post processing automation rules let you modify the Specify Event Filtering portion of the screen without any Settings in the lower screen Specify events to select Then click Next to go to the Actions tab See Actions on page 116 for more about that feature 114 Event Processing Rules Key Portlets Syslog Escalation Criteria This tab of Syslog Event Rules lets you manage events based on matching text and configure messages in response to such matches General Filtering Escalation Adding New Syslog Escalation Criteria criteria Message Test Syslog Match Text Message Match Text Match Any o Y match any or all entries in the Match Text List test ze test2 Syslog Event Setup Category TestVarBind syslogCategory var bind value Event Severity Indeterminate y syslogSeverity var bind value Message Pattern CA Regex pattern for formatting syslog messages optional Message Template TestTemplate Template for composing syslogText value optional S Apply 8 Cancel Criteria Syslog Match Text In this tab enter the Syslog Match Text Click the plus to add matching text to the list below the Message Match Text field Check the Match Any to match any or all of the entered match text rather than one or more specific strings Criteria Syslog Event Setup This portion of the Criteria screen sets up the event emitted when match
202. erface Click Save to preserve any changes made in these screens to Dell OpenManage Network Manager s database or Close to abandon any changes made in editor screens Unless the device is a printer changes to these screens typically make database changes not changes on the device General This screen may vary for different kinds of devices Its General Details panel displays the Name Description Vendor Location Contact and Equipment Icon for the selected device PEA 7 ED Management Interface Authentication General Details Equipment Hame 6248P_Kinnick_80 10 20 1 80 Description Powerconnect 6248P 3 2 0 7 VxWorks 6 5 Dellinc Folsom Vendor Location Contact Click to Select Equipment Icon A y Service Tag Asset Tag Extended Details tetwort Properties Settings IP Address 10 20 1 80 DNS Hostname Manage By Hostname O Network Status Responding x lad Save x Close The Extended Details panel includes Network Properties and Settings tabs These let you view or alter things like IP Address DNS Hostname Manage by Hostname Network Status Model and Equipment Type Serial Number Software Version Firmware and Hardware versions The Settings tab lists the System Object ID Date created the date this managed device entered the database Creator the user who discovered or created the device Install Date Administrative State Operational State
203. ernal file server Text description Enabled IV Enables the file server for use Server Type FTP Server Secure FTP SCP Server C TFTP Support M Checkwhether you want TFTP Support Authentication Settings IP Address Login 192 168 0 118 IP Address used by the application admin Login for this server External IP Address Password IP Address used by the devices Password for this server Net Mask 255 255 255 0 Used to determine which file server to use Save Cancel Test This is where you specify the Name whether the server is Enabled whether the connection is secure Secure FTP SOP Server supports TFTP internal and external optional IP addresses and Net Masks and the login and password for the file server Once you have configured a server you can test the file server credentials by clicking on the Test button at the bottom of the screen Click Save to preserve your changes Tip FTP servers typically must be on the same side of the firewall as the devices with which they communicate If you have several such servers the specified Net Mask also determines which server communicates with devices in which portion of the network Notice that you can now configure an IP address used by Dell OpenManage Network Manager and another External IP Address used by the devices If you configure multiple file servers Dell OpenManage Network Manager selects the server with the Net Mask whose subnet is clos
204. erns A configuration can contain multiple start and stops This is especially useful when the criteria provided might occur multiple times in the input source but you want to find only the instances which are preceded by a particular line in the source ProScan Portlet Change Management ProScan 315 Click Add new group in the Input Source panel Genet Toone ET and the grou ping editor Editing Compliance Policy Criteria appears Click the red criteria CEET icon to the source grouping s left to delete o Input Source Grouping z Start at It Start Criteria e G 5 Include in source Exclude from source Enter the starting and BRAR ending regular expressions End Criteria G c Start at End at e and Include in source Exclude from source elect whether the O Aadnew group beginning or end of the source group includes or excludes what that expression matches Click Apply to accept your edits or Cancel to abandon Y apply Cancel them You can create multiple group criteria OpenManage Network Manager applies the group criteria in order from top to bottom When you have defined a Start and Stop OpenManage Network Manager finds the information between these OpenManage Network Manager logically extracts the data from the main config essentially creating sections and then does the audit For example if your configuration has one section of router bgp and multiple sections for each bgp neighbor
205. es in that category in the topology Click on a list item to highlight that device and its network connection in the topology view A circle highlights the device and a colored glow highlights its network connection s Notice that the listed inventory changes if you drill in Tip To make sure the selection appears in your view select Center view around selected item at the bottom of this panel This tab also lets you Search for nodes by Keyword Search results highlight specific items within the topology Visualize My Network Visualize Icons The the icons next to listed devices mean the following Icon Type Alarm Indeterminate Status B Topology Alarm Triangle Explanation This shows the alarm state of the devices listed In a composite list like appears in Inventory it shows the highest alarm state No alarm information is available for this device Green means the device is Online red means Offline and yellow means indeterminate These appear next to the device icons The upward pointing triangle indicates the icon attached is a top level device The color in the circle is connection status color described above The color in the triangle the device s alarm state If the triangle points down it indicates the triangle s alarm state color comes from a child component of the node In the GRAPH INVENTORY tab not the topology the icons to the left of the devices are alarm icons and th
206. escription Default monitor to collect bandwidth utilization and error counts for interfaces optional Polling Interval 5 Minutes xl time between polling cycles Retention Options Retention Policy Default gt amp Retain Availability Data Retain Calculated Data of Unreachable Attempts before update Vv default false Vv default true 1 between 1 and 100 la Save Cancel General Monitor Options Name The identifier for this monitor Description A text description for this monitor Resource Monitors Monitoring 251 252 Polling Interval Use these fields to configure how often the monitor polls its target s Retention Options Retention Policy This configures how long Dell OpenManage Network Manager retains the monitor s data Manage these by right clicking in the Resource Monitors portal and selecting Retention Policies You must make retention policies before you can select them here Enabled Check to enable Emit Availability Events Check to activate emitting availability events The monitor does not emit an event until the monitored entity s state has changed All monitors can generate events on failure to contact the monitored device port and so on For example by default ICMP monitor updates the network status after a selected number of consecutive failures You can configure the monitor to generate an event in addition to updating network status but Dell Open
207. est to the device s with which it communicates 222 File Servers File Server File Management File Management In addition to letting you back up and restore configuration files and deploy firmware updates to devices this menu manages viewing and comparing configuration files backed up from the selected devices Details about these capabilities appear below Compare and View options have the following limitations e If you select a config file that is a single file without any historical precedent no comparison option appears on the menu since the selected version does not have a prior version e Ifyou select a single config file of version two or higher comparison is an option When selected OpenManage Network Manager automatically compares against the prior version for that device and file name e Ifyou select two config files of any version compares is between those two versions e Ifyou select three or more config files no comparison option appears e The View option appears for a single selection only and only lets you view files that are not binary Tip The icon to the left of the File Name listed in the portlet lets you know whether a configuration file is binary ha and not viewable or text and viewable The file management menu contains the following View Edit This opens a panel displaying the configuration file s contents Use the browser s Find function as demonstrated o
208. eterminate or greater severity See Alarms in Visualizations Topologies on page 219 for a description of how alarms appear in the 0 Managed Equipment Rack15 topology portlet The next section Expanded Alarm Portlet describes alarm actions and additional alarm capabilities Configuring the Alarms Chart Turn the chart on or off in the Settings screen s Chart Options panel If no data exists for the chart and the Chart option is on the portlet returns to no chart mode E3 Columns Max Results Page Sizing When you enable the chart Filtering is disabled since the chart in effect provides the filter When the chart is disabled then filtering options are available Settings are saved if you have Admin rights or the Portlet Max Items Returned 25 Max Items per Page Filter is on your Public Private pages like standard behavior K NOTE Changes appear after you click Apply The Filter panel Current Filter Open Alarms Chart Options disappears when you check the Show Chart checkbox Show Chart when data is available of Apply x Close Alarms Key Portlets 101 Expanded Alarm Portlet The expanded Alarm portlet appears when you click the plus in the top right corner of the smaller screen 102 G Alarms Alarm Details Reference Tree Laf Total Occurrence s By Date DEVICE IP 10 128 3 16 Event History 4 Re
209. everity then it closes any existing alarm to which it correlates Otherwise if a new alarm severity does not match the existing severity then the existing alarm is closed and a new alarm opened for the new severity MIB Name The MIB with which this event is associated Default Behavior The options for behavior Undefined Alarm Suppress Reject Alarm means Process at the mediation server generate event history and an alarm Suppress means Process at the mediation server and generate an event not an alarm Reject means Reject at the mediation server do not process Propagation The propagation behavior for the event Default Impacts subcomponents Impacts top level Not service effecting Only service effecting alarms are propagated By default events are service effecting provided their severity is indeterminate or above Select the propagation type from the pick list An event definition configures Impact Propagation distinct from Alarm propagation based on the event type Does the event impact the overall device Impacts top level subcomponents Impacts subcomponents or just the correlated inventory entity Default Event Definitions Key Portlets 129 130 Not Service Effecting means that alarm propagation ignores alarms for this event In other words no impact to associated entities occurs This also means alarms created for this event type appear as Not Service Effecting in the alarm manager
210. ew for the device Multiple Performance Templates The template name appears in the upper right corner Template Juniper General Template of dashboards that appear when you select Show Performance No Template Juniper Inbound If other templates for that device type exist they also Juniper Outbound 1 ck list in th ai Juniper General Template appear in a template pick list n the upper right corner You can pick another template to display its attribute selection The No Template selection displays the default dozen attributes that would appear if you selected Show Performance without a template defined for the device Key Metric Editor When you select Performance gt Show Key Metrics this editor appears for devices that have such metrics It displays the available Metrics and a Chart panel where you can configure their display Key Metric Editor Monitoring 289 Metrics This panel s display depends on the selected device date loft Attribute Memory Largest Block Memory Utilization Inbound SNMP Traps Otraps TCP Connection Attempt Failures 9 failures UDP Inbound Errors O errors Outbound IP Discards 407 datagrams Inbound IP Discards 0 datagrams Inbound TCP Errors O errors Inbound IP Address Errors 0 datagrams Inbound IP Header Errors 260530 datagrams Total IP Discards 0 datagrams Memory Used Available Memory Outbound IP No Route Discards 5578081 datagrams Uptime 1145 Hours CPU Monitor 5 Minute
211. f the group and member policies Any policy execution also update its parent group history records ProScan Portlet Change Management ProScan 325 Change Determination Process If you run the Change Determination CD Process it collects all the configuration changes that occurred on the target resources since the last time the CD process ran It also associates these changes with the date and time when the CD process runs After running CD you can then produce a report see Compliance and Change Reporting on page 329 outlining all such changes by date and time This report comes seeded with installation Dell OpenManage Network Manager stores incremental changes as RedcellConfigC hange Records by device timestamp The ConfigChangeRecordsDAP Database Aging Policy DAP manages how long the OpenManage Network Manager database retains these records This DAP s default setting stores incremental records for 30 days then archives or purges them Reporting shows only records in the database therefore by default the Configuration Change Report shows only resource changes made in the last 30 days but no older Change this default by changing the number of days to retain such records with the DAP The next section describes Change Determination Process Workflow 326 Change Determination Process Change Management ProScan Change Determination Process Workflow Change Manager seeds the Change Determination Process and ProScan group oper
212. fault profile whether the profile is Scheduled and Next Execution Date for scheduled discovery K NOTE When Dell OpenManage Network Manager discovers unknown devices it examines the RFC1213 MIB for hints of the device s capabilites determining if it looks similar to a layer 3 router or a layer 2 switch Since some device can do both Dell OpenManage Network Manager classifies such ambiguous devices as routers Menu Options When you right click a profile the following menu options appear in addition Es 4 Delete to the Common Menu Items New Opens Discovery Profile Editor in new profile mode see General on Sp Penis page 154 amp Inspect L New Edit Opens Discovery Profile Editor 3 Open Copy Opens Discovery Profile Editor and renames the selected profile as y Quick Discovery CopyOf Original Name SABES Execute Executes a discovery profile This also produces an Audit trail see fal Import al Export Selection q Export all va Share with User Audit Trail Jobs Screen on page 91 A message appears indicating the success or failure of discovery execution Tip Discovery execution continues in the background even when you close the audit trail jobs screen but the message indicating success failure still appears when the discovery process is done Discovery Profiles Resource Management 153 Inspect Validate the profile s credentials and that the device pings and is licensed for
213. figure Saying Configure this text in the menu produced by the Settings icon the next item gi Settings This configures your user settings for any online chat with your colleagues including the saying whether your online presence appears and whether to play a sound when messages arrive Tip When you have a message from another user that user s name appears on the status bar to the left of this icon Conferences This configures your user settings for any online chat with multiple colleagues The Create tab lets you edit to invite colleagues configure an invitation message and check to make a private conference that only invites can attend The Join tab becomes active when you are invited to a conference An online chat window appears after you join 76 Status Bar Alerts Portal Conventions Colleagues n A green dot indicates others are online it is red when you are alone and n is the number of colleagues online Click to open the chat screen Click on a colleague and enter text at the bottom of the popup that appears to send messages Previous chat history also appears above any current text on that chat popup Click the minus icon in the top right corner of these screens to close them Menu Bar The Menu Bar appears on the left side of the screen It consists of Menu items that lead to separate pages configured with Manage gt Page The pages that appear on this bar can vary depending on which Dell Ope
214. figured restoration xX How To Restore Configurations The following are the steps to restore a config file to a device 1 Make sure you have configured an FTP or TFTP server to handle the backup See Netrestore File Servers on page 69 2 Right click a device in the Managed Resources portlet 3 Select File Management gt Restore File Management File Server File Management 227 228 4 Configure the subsequent Restore Device screen estar Cap iiguration fils a E Driver Options Results Select Targets for Restore Add Equipment Add Groups Remove All bel Selection Action Select what to apply to the selected target above C Restore a Label or Restore a specific Configuration File Select Configuration File to Restore File Name y Date Saved Version DefaultConfig 6113111 8 46 AM 4 DefaultConfig 61311 8 50 AM 2 Apply Showing the last 2 backed up configuration files S Add Schedule Execute x Close This screen lets you configure the following Select Targets for Restore This portion of the screen lets you Add Equipment Add Groups or Remove All target devices Listed targets and their Restore Config Label Selection Click the icon in the Action column to remove the listed target Select what to apply to the selected target This portion of the screen lets you select either a label like Current Compliant and so on a selector listing availabl
215. file after entering the required information on the General and Network panels you can skip this step and just click Execute at the bottom of the panel 6 Inspection This screen lets you preview the discovery profile s actions and access to devices If you clicked Next rather than Inspect at the bottom of the previous screen click Start Inspection in the top right corner of this screen to begin the inspection process that validates the device s credentials Petting ira polls Discover later General Network Actions inspection Result 6 Inspect Network using current settings optional O Actions Stop Inspection O 10 128 4 32 10 128 4 30 10 128 4 25 10 128 4 22 10 128 4 23 10 128 4 48 10 128 4 49 10 128 4 46 10 128 4 28 10 128 4 47 10 128 4 44 10 128 4 26 10 128 4 45 10 128 4 27 Hostn Auth Mi Protocol Type otnames ame nal 2 2 4518 7 39 om Vendor Auth Params Status y Licensed i Pending 132 Pending gp Pending ge Pending 3 Pending No Response No Response No Response No Response No Response No Response No Response No Response No Response Inspection Status 4 Ping 96 210 3 Hostname Pending 3 Auths Pending Previous la Save x Close Discovery Profiles Resource Management 159 Notice that the Inspection Status fields at the bottom of the screen indicate the success or failure of Ping Hostname resolution and Auth
216. firewall on the application server ports 80 and 8080 must both be open for topology to work Click the double arrows in the upper right corner to open the Legend for this screen which describes the link colors and their meaning Hover the cursor over a link to see its type described See Icons on page 215 for an explanation of the icons that appear in these screens The screen to the left of the map displays the following panels e Control and Styles which includes VIEW DETAILS e Data Node Finder e Layout Visualize My Network Visualize e OVERVIEW Click on the title bars when these appear collapsed on the left of the screen to expand them Click the blue left arrow at the top of them to re collapse them In addition to the screen components immediately displayed you can right click an icon or component and Drill in or Expand a device to see its subcomponents If you expand then its subcomponents appear onscreen with the rest of the topology If you Expand w o Filtering then any filtering you have applied in the Data Node Finder tab does not apply to the subcomponents that appear If you drill in other components do not appear Finally you can select Actions to execute The Layout selected in determines the arrangement of such expansions or drill ins When you drill in the path back to the top level appears below the topology Drill in Path l TUN Y Cisco9120 192 168 0 121 Click the level where you want to drill o
217. following steps create an ICMP ping monitor 1 In the Resource Monitors portlet and create a new monitor by right clicking and selecting New 2 Select the type of monitor from the submenu for this example an ICMP monitor Resource Monitors Monitoring 263 9 10 In the General screen enter a name Test ICMP Monitor and a polling interval 5 minutes is the default For this example check Retain polled data and accept the remaining defaults for checkboxes and the retention policy Select an entity to monitor by clicking the Add button in the top portion of the Monitor Options screen Select devices you want to ping Ctrl click to add more than one then click Add Selection then Done to confirm your entity Define packets in the ICMP Monitor Options panel including Packet Size Packet Count and timeout You can accept the defaults here too In the Thresholds tab select an attribute MaxRTT or maximum round trip time and add the following thresholds by clicking Add Name High color red Lower Boundary 15 and Upper Boundary blank Severity Critical Name Fine color green Lower Boundary 0 and Upper Boundary 15 Severity Cleared Notice that this example does not emit a notification If you checked that checkbox an alarm of the configured severity would accompany crossing the threshold Accept the other defaults and click Apply Click Save Test ICMP Monitor now appears in the portlet X How To Create a Key Me
218. for scans The following sections describe these e Perl e Java Groovy These scans are compiled at runtime and the Java scan uses the Groovy libraries included with OpenManage Network Manager As always you must install Perl on Windows application servers if you want to use that type of Config Term it typically comes with other supported operating systems Perl When you select Perl as the type of Config term an editor appears that lets you enter Perl scans Btresung New Compliance Policy General Targets ED Editing Compliance Policy Criteria EN Input Source Properties Select Criteria Match Type vPerl Use the following perl variable for input source finput_source Please use the following statements to indicate success compliant or failure out of compliance print Success print Failure l if input_source m shutdown 2 print Success 3 4 elsififinput_source m description 5 print Success 61 7 else 8 3 print Failure no description found 10 y Y Apply Cancel As the screen says input_source is what the code scans The following is example of the type of Perl you can enter that scans for contents like description in shut down interfaces and prints output Success visible in the Audit viewer when it finds a matching term like description in whatever source you select if S input_source m shutdown print Success elsif
219. fresh Settings 1 E Y Name Description File Name s Version Installed Date Type Device Class Device Family Status TestConfig This is a test Inetrestore nrarc 1 10 25 11 2 13 PM Configuration Invalid Device Cl PCM6348v3 15 2a PowerConnect PCMB348v31 5 31 5 2 9 8 11 11 42 AM Firmware Dell PowerConn OSVersion PCM6220v3 1 5 2a PowerConnect PCM6220v3 15 315 2 9 811 11 41 AM Firmware Dell PowerConn OSVersion PowerConnect_ PowerConnect 6 PowerConnect_ 2 0 019 9 811 11 39 AM Firmware Dell PowerConn OSYersion PowerConnect_ PowerConnect 3 PowerConnect_ 2 0 0 31 9 841 11 38 AM Firmware Dell PowerConn OSVersion PowerComnect5 PowerConnect 5 PowerConnect_ 2 0 0 41 9 811 11 39 AM Firmware Dell PowerConn OSVersion PCM8024v3 1 3 12 PowerConnect PCM8024v313 3 1 3 12 9 811 11 43 AM Firmware Dell PowerConn OSVersion 11 item s returned Reference Tree gt PowerConnect35xx_V 20040 powerconnect_35xx 20040 ros powerconnect_35xx_boot 20000 rth 234 Image Repository Firmware Image Editor When you open or create an OS image its configuration appears in this editor The General Semi Oo Image General Parameters Image Files Readme File General Parameters OS Image Name Description Version Device Class Unique identifier rio anew DE aa General Parameters Image Files Readme File Choose the method of
220. g the same value as others is not graphed properly but mousing over the graph displays the value xX How To Create a Simple Dashboard View Follow these steps to create a simple dashboard view See How to Create a Custom Dashboard View on page 282 for more complex monitor creation 1 2 In the Dashboard Views portlet right click to select New gt Simple Dashboard Select a name for example SNMP Interface to display the monitor configured in How to Create an SNMP Interface Monitor on page 262 Click Add Entity in the Entities panel In the filter that appears select the type Interface Filter for the IP address of the entity monitored in the previous SNMP interface monitor creation select it and click Add Selection and Done Select the ifInErrors attribute and click the right arrow in the Dashboard View Attributes panel Click Save The dashboard view you have configured should appear in the portlet To launch it right click and either Launch Popup or Launch Maximize If you want to convert this simple dashboard to a custom dashboard so you can alter it further right click and click Convert Performance Dashboard This portlet lets you install and configure Dashboard Views as permanent displays rather than portlets When you initially install this portlet it appears empty The message No Dashboard View has been set appears with a Select button Click that button to open the Dashboard View Selection screen
221. ge Tit le K a x Close External Commands Actions and Adaptive CLI 353 Results can also appear in the audit screen messages and in the Results panel of the Action job viewer screen Action sos vero ES Target Name show switch 3624_Ryan_116 10 20 1 116 Management Standby Preconfig Plugged in Switch Code SW Status Status Model ID Model ID Status Version 1 Mgmt Sw PCT7024P PCT7024P oK 4 2 0 1 6 Unassigned PCT7024F Not Present 0 0 0 0 x Close You can also extract parameters for these external commands as is described in Attributes Extraction on page 351 Seeded Scripts Several external perl scripts come with Dell OpenManage Network Manager as examples of the kind of commands you can execute These are in owareapps performance scripts under the installation root To run these the scripts panel in the Adaptive CLI editor should contain something like the following 354 External Commands Actions and Adaptive CLI perl owareapps performance scripts http_test pl Petite AO Gol seus conus duel pet General Attributes ED Script Settings Name Script 1 Target Filter Attribute Delimiter lt gt zj Optional Attribute Delimiter zj ECEE RATAS ELLE CEED oore l perl owareapps performance scripts http_cest pl lt _BquipmentManager Parameter a Resut Tokens OB RETO Adapove Gil Achon command pen Http General Attributes cya Script Set
222. gent Despite this description many vendors defined a trap for SNMPv2 and then had to support sending as SNMPvl protocol The assembly of v2 OID from v1 enterprise and specific is supposed to include an extra 0 enterpriseOID 0 specific However if a v2 trap is defined that has no 0 in it so it cannot be sent as vl and converted back following the specifications Send as Proxy This application can forward a trap as though it came from device sourcelP spoofing or act as an agent proxy according to the SNMP COMMUNITY MIB If not sending as proxy we forward trap from application server cluster as an SNMPv2 notification as though it is coming directly from the originating agent device This is a common and desired behavior Some operating systems prevent packet spoofing as a security measure so this behavior is necessarily optional If sending as proxy the trap is forwarded from application server using the application server IP as sourcelP The relevant snippet from SNMP COMMUNITY MIB is the following The snmpTrapAddress and snmpTrapCommunity objects are included in notifications that are forwarded by a proxy which were originally received as SNMPv1 Trap messages Event Processing Rules Key Portlets snmpTrapAddress OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX IpAddress MAX ACCESS accessible for notify STATUS current DESCRIPTION The value of the agent addr field of a Trap PDU which is forwarded by a proxy forwarder applicatio
223. ger Server Statistics e Resource Monitors Top Asset Monitors pre configured monitors that come with your installation by default Finally this chapter contains a reminder about scheduling refreshes of monitor target groups See Scheduling Refresh Monitor Targets on page 276 Monitors and Discovery Not all monitors are enabled for devices discovered by default Typically discovery adds devices only to ICMP ping monitoring If you enable an SNMP monitor during discovery for example performance degrades if discovery finds devices with many interfaces that the monitor attempts to process To improve performance such behavior is disabled by default so processing occurs only for the ICMP Monitors To re enable processing for other monitors during discover assuming they are enabled set create the following property in owareapps installprops 1lib installed properties pm monitor process implicits true By default this is set to alse Monitors automatically refresh all implicit targets when a rule executes independently of discovery in roughly six hour intervals Alternatively you can select the monitor s right mouse click and select Refresh Monitor to manually refresh the target How to s This chapter contains the following step by step instructions for these features e Create an SNMP Interface Monitor e Create an ICMP Monitor e Create a Key Metrics Monitor e Create a Simple Dashboard View You can see Performance Optio
224. ger automatically selects the latitude and longitude of the address entered for a location To update or make these more accurate select Update Location by right clicking a location in the Locations portlet Beerclicntess jols Search for a general area below Click on the Map to relocate the marker Search oor i A gto Or oe flown Center da ES Shopping Center H 5 Mercy Hospital 4 2 nia Hills borhood ark Crossing Way Blue Ravine 19 avoisyug 19 aU0sana Bentley Square West h Be f Tb Duval 2 Sque y E row Duval ek E K an ct Map data 2011 Google Terms of Use SY Apply DeleteTag Cancel The location created by default is the address entered in the Locations editor You can also enter the address in the Search field or click and drag the marker that appears on this screen Click Apply to accept the re location A Delete Tag button appears when you have created a tag and lets you remove it Cancel closes the screen Tip You can zoom in or out on the displayed map with the and buttons in the upper left corner of this screen 138 Locations Key Portlets Vendors In its summary form this portlet displays the available vendors for network resources Vendors t 17 Settings o Refresh Search Hame y Enterprise Number S Xerox 253 A VMware Inc 6876 P Unknown 0 4 SUSE Linux AG Inc 7057 Samsung Electronics Co LTD 11 e Ricoh Printi
225. grep cimserver in a shell To start stop get status of the WBEM service tog pegasus start stop status If the system is running Fedora then you can access tog pegasus updates at this site https admin fedoraproject org pkgdb packages name tog pegasus 26 Sizing for Standalone Installations Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager WBEM Prerequisites The following are common prerequisites Credentials WBEM credentials have a role in discovering the device Your system must have access to the computer using Administrative only credentials These are the same credentials as the user installing WBEM on the device Telnet SSH credentials are necessary for other supported applications For full functionality this WBEM device driver requires administrative root access Many devices may only allow root logins on a local console In such cases configure the Telnet SSH authentication for these devices to login as a non root user and in Authentication Manager enter su in the Enable User ID field and enter the root user s password in Enable User Password in that same authentication This enables full device management functionality with root access K NOTE Credentials for Telnet SSH should have a privilege level sufficient to stop services and to restart the computer system Firewall Some firewalls installed on the computer may block Web Based Enterprise Management requests Allow those you want
226. gs Is Collection Check to classify this attribute as a collection Allow Duplicate Values Check to enable allowing duplicates Allow Reordering Check to enable allowing reordering Collection Min Max Length Enter the minimum maximum number of characters in this attribute Properties Upper Lower Case Check to validate on case Case Insensitive Validation ignores case Multi Line Text Check to enable multiline text One Way Encrypt Check to encrypt Actions Portlet Actions and Adaptive CLI 343 Truncate Truncate the attribute Attribute Settings You can create new attribute schemas See Attribute Editor Panels below for information about different datatypes fields Once you create a set of attributes they remain available for re use as a schema or collection of attributes To identify schemas enter the following fields Label A unique mandatory identifier for the collection of attributes Description A text description of the entity Click New to create or select an attribute in the displayed tree and click Edit to open an editor where you can create or modify attributes Select an attribute and click Remove to delete it from the list Attribute Editor Panels The following panels appears depending on the attribute type selected from the pick list The fields in the editor depend on this selection Available types include Boolean Coded Value Date Decimal IP Address Integer Long Invento
227. gured filter s for the selected rule xX How To Create Event Processing Rules To create a rule in this portlet follow these steps 1 Right click and select New then select a rule type These can be Pre Processing correlation or Post Processing automation rules If Pre Processing is your selection Device Access Frequency Throttle Reject Event Set Severity State Flutter Suppress Alarm and Syslog are the types available See Filtering Event Processing Rules Key Portlets 109 Settings on page 112 Syslog Escalation Criteria on page 115 and Actions on page 116 for more about the differences available between rule types 2 For this example we select Pre Processing gt Device Access The Rule Editor screen appears Enter a Name to identify the rule an optional Description and check Enabled if you want this rule to begin working immediately 3 Click Next to open the Filtering Settings tab arial aire orrasa Bree Urryesssine le conr CITED Specify Event Filtering Event Definition Filter Conditions o Device IP and C Clear Filter Specify Settings for Device Access Access Type User Login User Name Variable User Name RegEx Suppress Correlated Vv Creates a specific device access event for user login logout login failure or configuration change Previous led Save Cancel Specify Event Filtering In this panel select the Event Definition Click pick list to find available eve
228. handy to help clean up noisy alarm views since you can filter to conceal these Propagation policies configure Alarm Propagation associations based propagation paths to generate calculated alarm states against associated entities like links and services See Event Processing Rules on page 108 for more about configuring these For example link propagation works like this If one or both associated endpoints have an impacting alarm then OpenManage Network Manager generates a calculated alarm for the corresponding link at the highest severity of either endpoint If both endpoints are clear then the resulting calculated event is clear This means alarm correlation removes any existing calculated alarm against the link If you upgrade Dell OpenManage Network Manager all alarms migrated to from previous versions appear as service effecting regardless of severity To alter multiple events impact propagation export the event definitions and alter the XML export to reflect the kind of propagation desired for events Search for the paired lt Impact Propagat ion gt 0 lt Impact Propagation gt tags and alter the numbers within them as follows Default 0 Impacts Top Level 1 Impacts Subcomponents 2 Not service effecting 4 Re import the altered event definition file to update your event definitions Advisory Text The Advisory Text appears with the event Configure it in the text box here Event Definitions Key Por
229. have a more complete description appear as a popup 6 Click Browse to display the MIB Browser For the sake of this example we elect to monitor ifInErrors in RFC Standard MIBs RFC1213 MIB gt Nodes gt mib 2 gt interfaces gt ifTable gt ifEntry gt ifInErrors 7 Inthe Thresholds screen configure thresholds by first clicking Add 8 Click Add above the threshold levels list for each threshold you want to add 9 In the threshold editor enter a name Examples Low Medium Overload an upper and lower boundary 0 10 10 100 100 a severity Informational Warning Critical and color BLUE YELLOW RED In this case no string matching is necessary When the data crosses thresholds the monitor reacts Resource Monitors Monitoring Attributes available depend on the type of monitor you are creating Notice that you can also check to make crossing this threshold emit a notification an alarm that would appear on the Alarm panel You can also configure the type of calculation and so on You can even alter existing thresholds by selecting one then clicking Edit to the right of the selected threshold 10 Click Apply for each threshold interval you configure then Apply for the entire threshold configuration K NOTE If a threshold s counter is an SNMP Counter32 a 32 bit counter monitoring can exceed its capacity with a fully utilized gigabit interface in a relatively short period of time The defaults configured in
230. he Fix it button 7 Save Click Save to preserve the profile You can then right click it to select Execute If you select Execute from the profile editor Dell OpenManage Network Manager does not save the profile to execute later 160 Discovery Profiles Resource Management Results 8 Execute Clicking Execute begins discovery and the message traffic between Dell OpenManage Network Manager and the device appears on the Results screen This produces a standard Audit Trail Jobs Screen screen displaying the message traffic See also Audit Trail Jobs Screen on page 91 for more about retrieving archives of such screens 9 A message Discovery Profile Execute is complete appears in the Messages at the bottom left of the status bar 10 Click the X in the top right corner of the discovery profile editor to close it Discovery Profiles Expanded This larger view offers a Reference Tree snap panel where you can see the connection between a selected profile and the authentications and discovery tasks it includes Discovery Profiles Return to previous Default Resource Profile Fiter Advanced Filter Search Refresh Settings JB Y Mame y Description Scheduled Next Execution Date Discover juniper devices 42300 10 128 3 16 admin DOrado J2300 192 16 No e Discover IPMI DISCOVER Need snmp disc Need to 1 discover as snmp 2 add IPMI MGMT i No Discover Dell All Lab Dell devices No Discover C
231. he network to discover rather that the subnet ID 4 Authentication You can create new or add existing authentications See Authentication on page 143 for the way to create such authentications outside the discovery process Notice that authentications appear with Edit Delete icons and Up Down arrows on their tight The Edit icon opens the authentication editor Click the arrows to arrange the order in Discovery Profiles Resource Management 157 which credentials are tried top first Ordering only applies when two credentials are of the same type Tip If you have imported a discovery profile without importing or creating the authentications it uses editing authentications is an exercise in frustration If you cannot import authentications or have not created them when you do attempt to edit them the easiest solution is to delete the un imported un created authentication the profile refers to and create a new one Actions 5 When you click Next the Actions panel appears MESA Discovery Hinila Gatse General Network Actions Inspection Results 5 Selected Discovery Actions Listed in Execution Order Add Action Remove All Action Hame a Resyne Previous gt Next le Save amp Inspect ig Execute x Close You can simply accept the default actions that appear here like Resync and Learned MAC discovery by clicking Next to the Inspection portion of discovery or you can d
232. he software without impacting the application server Device monitoring stops when you stop the application server or turn off its host machine The client can also be on a different machine than the application server K NOTE See Starting Web Client on page 32 for more information about using web access to this software 64 bit Since Dell OpenManage Network Manager has a web server demands on 32 bit system resources are near their limits A standalone 32 bit system with Application server Web server and database requires nearly all addressable memory and is therefore not supported Applications like Traffic Flow Analyzer and Performance Monitoring require even more memory For these reasons and for future scalability do not install the this software on 32 bit systems Tablets phones and iPads Dell OpenManage Network Manager detects mobile devices and pads For smaller screens the Navigation bar collapses to the left hand side and the page only displays a single column Some limits apply e Since touch devices do not support right click the first time clicking on a row selects it A repeat click launches a menu displaying the available actions Click the one you want e Charts that require flash may not work some have HTML5 backup e Visualize Topology is unavailable e Phones may limit views further Network Basics OpenManage Network Manager communicates over a network In fact the machine where you install it must
233. he summary and expanded portlets The following columns appear in this screen by default Severity The alarm severity indicated by the color of the leftmost icon The severity only has meaning for Alarms and Security Alarms Informational Alarms get a severity level of Indeterminate Closed alarms appear without color Date Opened The date the alarm appeared Entity Name The entity emitting this alarm often within the Equipment DeviceIP The IP address of the equipment where the alarm appeared Alarms Key Portlets Event Name The event associated with the alarm Tip If you hover the cursor over a row in the portlet display a tooltip appears with information about the alarm This can include the alarm s Entity Mame Date Opened the Entity Name any alarm Meseene Message Event Name Alarm and Entity Type Event Name its status as Service Effecting Notification OID Equipment Equipment Severity whether the alarm was Device IP Suppressed or Acknowledged and the Device Severity Date Opened 041441 11 43 07 AM NetgearGSM7248V2_2410 128 4 24 Result Success redcellEquipmentResynchNotification NetgearGSM7248V2_24 10 128 4 24 10 128 4 24 IP Acknowledged Not Acknowledged 4 Alarm Type 4 Entity Type Location If an alarm is Service Effecting reflect an impact on a service it can propagate to appear as components of service and link related alarms Service effecting alarms are of ind
234. he traffic data A list of all entities found matching the string appears below it Search Search Pattern Type Mame Endpoint cisco7505 3 oware net AutonomousSystem CISCO EU 109 Cisco Systems Glob Application cisco FNATIVE Application TNATIVE Application cisco SYSMANT Application Cisco TOP Application Cisco IP SLAs Control Protocol Application cisco net mgmt Application cisco license managemert Application cisco RSRB Priorty 1 port Application cisco RSRB Priorty 2 port Application cisco STUN Priory 1 port Application cisco STUN Priority 2 port Application cisco SNMP TOP port Application cisco serial tunnel port nO gt an Entity found in the search support the following actions View Top Conversations Displays the top n conversations for the selected entity Show Detail View Displays a top level detail view of the selected entity Add to Current View Adds the entity to the current view and drills down to it Tip The Settings button the gear in the upper right corner lets you confine the search by types All Applications Protocols and so on Traffic Flow Analyzer Example The following describes typical situations where flow is useful When ports are over utilized because of intermittent performance problems diagnosis of the problem sometimes difficult Turn on flow traffic data collection to evaluate who what applications and so on are responsible for the traffic on the affected ports This avo
235. heir upper right corner and can expand to display more information and permit multi selection of listed items Return to the smaller portlet by clicking Return to Previous in the expanded portlet s upper right corner Tip If you want to multi select within listed items in a portlet you must expand it The one exception to this rule the File Management portlet User permissions may limit access to the expanded portlets For example OpenManage Network Manager can have many communities and limit users memberships Such users can lightly browse other Communities screens without full privileges K NOTE Screen size limitations may require you to expand the browser to see expanded screens correctly You must have at least 1250 pixels in width Status Bar Alerts Portal Conventions See Control Panel on page 33 for more about setting up user privileges for portlets Discovery Profiles Return to previous Default Resource Profile Filter x Advanced Filter Search Refresh Settings B Y Mame y Description Scheduled Mext Execution Date e Discover juniper devices 42300 10 128 316 admin DOrado J2300 192 16 1 e Discover IPMI DISCOVER Need snmp disc Need to 1 discover as snmp 2 add IPMI MGMT i Q Discover Dell All Lab Dell devices Discover Cisco All LAB cisco Devices Brocade _Foundry Brocade Foundry Reference Tree e 0 Better Juniper Discovery Fh Authentications o doradol
236. his also can configure whether charts graphs appear Search Locates an item in the portlet When you click this the columns filtered in the database appear indented For example Name and Model appear indented in the Managed Resource portal Similar functionality is available in Expanded Portlets when you click these buttons in the upper right corner The Settings button also lets you configure the columns displayed and their order See How to Show Hide Reorder Columns on page 84 Status Bar Alerts Portal Conventions 79 Settings The Settings button opens a screen where you can configure the Max Items that appear in and the Filter applied to the summary portlet with an Apply button to activate any changes you make there The Settings screen also includes a tab where you can Show Hide Reorder Columns lt Settings K Refresh Search SAREE Filter Results Columns Max Results Page Sizing Max Items Returned 25 Max Items per Page 6 Filter Current Filter Default Resource Profile Filter S Apply x Close For performance reasons Max Items are set to relatively low defaults Settings in expanded portlet does not include the Filter item See Filter Expanded Portlet Displays on page 85 for information about the alternative Tip As an Administrator you can configure a portlet s default display filter then click the portlet name and re name it For example
237. ic Panels 266 Monitors 276 Monitors and Discovery 243 Multiple Performance Tem plates 289 N Name Resolution 23 Navigation 71 Netrestore File Servers 69 Network Basics 22 Network Considerations 22 Network Requirements 23 Network Topology 207 New link creation 175 newlink ConfigImageEditor 236 Non Configuration attributes 349 O OAM 369 OID 369 OS Image Editor 235 OS Images Portlet 233 OSPF 369 Portal gt 42 Overall Compliance 307 P PDF 90 Performance Dashboard 279 Performance Dashboard Portlet 279 Performance Indicators 179 Performance Note 13 Perl 32 Perl Java Groovy Lan guage Policies 322 Permissions when installing to Unix 31 Policy 369 Policy Enforcement Points PEP 369 Policy routing 370 Policy Rules 370 Port Details 192 Port Expanded 193 Portal gt Roles 41 Portal gt Settings 41 Portal gt Users 35 Portal Overview 71 Portlet Instances 81 Portlet Level Permissions 38 Portlets 78 Ports gt Details 181 183 Ports Expanded 193 Ports Portlet 191 Ports required 30 Post processing rules 114 PPTP Point to Point Tun neling Protocol 370 Printing manager contents 87 Private Key 370 Profile 370 ProScan 303 Compliance 329 count number of occur rences 315 Editor Compliance 313 Editor General 310 Java Groovy 323 Perl 322 Supported Regular Ex pressions 320 Use Cases 303 Use paradigms 303 ProScan Editor 310 ProScan Manager 306 Proscan Moni
238. ice Managed Resources Resource Management 173 174 IP Address The IP address of the device Vendor Name The vendor for this device Model The model of the device Equipment Type The type of equipment Firmware Version The firmware version of the device Software Version The software version of the device Last Backup The device s last backup date Location Name The device s location Hardware Version The hardware version for the device Backup Result The result the device s last backup Restore Result The result the device s last restoration This screen has several snap panels some compressed windowshade style Click the title bar for these snap panels to toggle expand collapse These display information about the device selected in the list at the top of the panel Reference Tree This displays the device and connected components tree style General Details This includes information about the Equipment Name Vendor Location Contact Icon and its Last Modified and Discovery Date General Properties This tab includes the IP Address DNS Hostname Firmware Version Hardware Version Model Serial Number Software Version Managed by Hostname if active this resolves a DNS name rather than use an IP address to manage this resources and Equipment Type information General Settings This includes the system Object Id Date Created that is discovered Creator the user wh
239. icenses This portion of the License Viewer lists the products for which you have licenses already displaying the Product Edition Expire Date whether the license is Valid any IP restrictions the User who installed the product and or license and the Version of product for which the license is valid License Details Product This portion of the screen displays the details of a license selected in the Registered Product Licenses portion of the License Viewer screen It is blank if you have not selected a license in the list above this panel Device Licenses This tab displays the Maximum Allowed number of licenses for devices the Count Managed the Variance between maximum and managed and Type of license along with sums of the maximum and count managed License Viewer Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 63 Discovery Profiles Discovery profiles configure equipment discovery for Dell OS OpenManage Network Manager O settings GRefresh Search The summary view displays the Mame y Description Default Scheduled Next Execution Date Name Description Default the O QAFTP_T Shared FTPAF No green check indicates the default Printers Discover Printers No profile whether the profile is Powervaut o Ne Scheduled and Next Execution Netecreen 9 T Date for scheduled discovery MMCLab MIMIC simulatio Y No The Expanded portlet adds a Discover This profile wil Y No Reference
240. icichernccovo is up line protocol is up Internet address is 10 128 2 11 24 GigabitEthernet0 1 is up line protocol is down Internet address is 7 5 1 1 30 GigabitEthernet0 1 1 is up line protocol is down 10 Internet address is 21 1 1 34 29 11 GigabitEthernet0 1 2 is up line protocol is down 12 GigabitEthernet0 1 3 is up line protocol is down 13 Internet address is 18 8 8 1 30 14 GigabitEthernet0 1 5 is up line protocol is down 15 Internet address is 9 5 1 1 30 16 GigabitEthernet0 1 6 is up line protocol is down 17 Internet address is 9 6 1 1 30 18 GigabitEthernet0 1 7 is up line protocol is dom 19 Internet address is 5 5 3 1 30 zi VOTAR x Close In the Results top of screen panel click to select the device for which you want additional information and the Execution Details panel displays the Results of execution in one tab and the Sent Commands in another Notice that you can Find text within a result click Go to repeat the find You can also see the bottom panel if you right click a single execution within the Execution History snap panel in the Expanded Actions Portlet 338 Actions Portlet Actions and Adaptive CLI If you select two executions in the top panel or in the Execution History snap panel and right click a comparison appears SACO Sxseution rigtyey STO ENON TOTOGO SY Results Device Name v Execution Date Status Result Version User ID Router yourdomain com 10 128 2 11
241. ids getting overwhelmed with collection of traffic going in all directions Follow these steps to do this 1 From the Resources monitor select a desired router that has support for NetFlow Traffic Flow Analyzer Example Traffic Flow Analyzer 2 Enable NetFlow on most impacted routers that support NetFlow Also register a number of exporters to enable an efficient and scalable data collection environment K NoTE You can disable NetFlow and unregister exporters 3 After NetFlow has been running for a while verify that bandwidth utilization is within expectation This will help insure optimum performance of critical business applications 4 Select the Top 5 Applications portlet or add it to the page 5 From the list of the Top 5 Applications you ll typically see most bandwidth is being consumed by the key applications in our organization Alternative 1 6 To ensure bandwidth is not being hijacked by unauthorized or unwanted video or music streaming applications select the Top 5 Conversations 7 Often the top conversation is video streaming software 8 To answer Where and who is running this rogue application drill down into the conversation to see End points involved in the conversation This identifies the user running the streaming application You could now go and stop or block this rogue application Alternative 2 An alarm indicates port X is surpassing its threshold If the port has become a bottleneck i
242. ike those that appear in the portlet described in Managed Resources on page 166 For some portlets for example Top CPU Utilization Top Interface Errors and Top Memory Utilization the right click Performance menu items include Key Metrics The menu can include Performance which displays Dashboard Views related to the selected monitor Top Configuration Backups This panel lists the most recent configurations backed up from devices The la nis pick list in the upper right corner lets you Top 10 select not just the top 10 such backups but Equipment y File Hame Date Saved Version the top 5 10 15 20 and 25 MS JuniperMS 10 12 E DefaultConfig 8 8 11 8 26 AM 1 J Juniper 10 E efaultContic Right clicking a backup offers the same SSS stele options as the portlet described in Configuration Files on page 229 The Dashboard Views portlet lets you assemble several monitors into a single M Doshboard Views Zz te display or dashboard You can create and l a ns display dashboards by right clicking items in _ I ee See Managed Resources selecting Show Testview System 8 8 11 10 52 AM Simple Performance or by selecting New in the Dashboard Views portlet Right click the listed dashboards and a menu appears that lets you Copy and rename Delete Edit create a New simple or custom dashboard or Launch a Dashboard View cither Maximize a larger view or as a Popup See Dashboard Editor on page 281 for informa
243. il Clicking Cancel ends this operation Email Recipients without sending e mail See SMTP Configuration on page 67 for instructions about setting up e mail test test com from Dell OpenManage Network Manager See Alarm Email on page 105 for an example of what the content looks like Send Email Cancel Show Performance Displays a performance dashboard for the alarmed equipment See Dashboard Views on page 277 for more about these Aging Policy This lets you select a policy that determines how long this alarm remains in the database See Redcell gt Database Aging Policies DAP on page 50 for information about configuring such policies View as PDF Create an Acrobat PDF document containing this portlet s contents Share with User Selecting this opens a screen where you can select the user you want to send the selected alarm and can enter a message you want to send with it See Sharing on page 87 Clicking Share Asset sends a chat message to the selected user with a link that opens to display the Alarm Snap Panels for the selected item Tip Hover your cursor over the Device IP Address column and a tooltip appears with information about the alarm source s Model Vendor Discovery Date and a Ping Rate bar graph Model BD 3045 This can also include other device dependent items For vendor eae RESIS IED 0 AH fi Discovery Date 06 09 10 04 12 PM example bar graphs to display the
244. iles as follows You must modify two web xml files with the same values to alter the session timeout One controls the overall server and the other is the push servers for Async based views These web xml files are in the following directories dorado oware synergy tomcat XX webapps ROOT WEB INF web xml And dorado oware synergy tomcat xx webapps netview WEB INF web xml The xml element that contains the session timeout is lt session config gt lt session timeout gt 30 lt session timeout gt lt session config gt The portal properties file is in portal portal imp1 classes The property containing the session timeout in minutes is session timeout 30 Control Panel To configure access to Dell OpenManage Network Manager you must be signed in as a user with the permissions The default admin user has such permissions The Go to gt Control Panel menu item opens a screen with the following tabs of interest e My Account RCSynergy Domain e Portal gt Users and Organizations e Portal gt Roles e Portal gt Portal Settings e Portal gt Other Redcell gt Permission Manager Redcell gt Database Aging Policies DAP Redcell gt Data Configuration e Redcell gt Mediation e Redcell gt Filter Management Server Control Panel Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 33 Tips describing these screens and fields appear when you hover the cursor over fields or click the bl
245. ing alarm SNMP syslog etc Protocol Type Protocol Sub Type Inform Trap blank for internal events ProtocolSubType Receive Time RecvTime Region The mediation server partition name Region Severity 0 cleared through 6 critical from Alarm Severity Definition Source IP address The IP of the component sending the alarm SourceIP Event Processing Rules Key Portlets 123 124 The following section describes variables whose use may have a performance impact Managed Equipment Variables Attribute Custom Custom 2 Custom 3 Custom 4 Custom 5 Custom 6 Custom 7 Custom 8 Custom 9 Custom 10 Custom 11 Custom 12 Custom 13 Description DNS Hostname Description Note that although you can re name any Custom attribute you must use the variable s original name For example here that is RedCell Config Equipm entManager_Custom Description of the equipment Hostname of equipment Event Processing Rules Key Portlets Email Action Variable RedCell Config EquipmentManager_Cu stom RedCell Config EquipmentManager_Cu stom2 RedCell Config EquipmentManager_Cu stom RedCell Config EquipmentManager_Cu stom4 RedCell Config EquipmentManager_Cu stom RedCell Config EquipmentManager_Cu stom6 RedCell Config EquipmentManager_Cu stom7 RedCell Config EquipmentManager_Cu stom8 RedCell Config EquipmentManager_Cu stom9 RedCell Config EquipmentManager_Cu stom 10 Red
246. ing occurs Here are the fields Category The syslog category varbind value Event Severity Select the alarm severity of the event emitted when a match occurs Message Pattern An optional regular expression for the text to retrieve and transmit in the created event s message Event Processing Rules Key Portlets 115 116 Message Template The configuration of the message when sent For example the template 1 occurred on 3 for 2 creates a message with the first message pattern retrieved followed by the third then the second within the specified text Message Test This screen lets you test your message against the pattern and or template Click the Test button to the right of the top field to activate this testing Test Message Enter a message to test Test Message Result The text extracted for the event as it appears in the template Click Apply to accept these escalation criteria or Cancel to abandon them without saving Actions This screen catalogs the actions configured for the Post Processing Automation rule you have configured in previous screens lata ew pos POES EO COMA GON EVEN CRINE General Filtering EJ Specify Actions Add Action Remove All Hame Description Target Entity Type Actions 5 Forward Northbound Forwards event northbound as Lal 427 Send Email Sends an Email notification 1213 gr Resync Device Resync EquipmentManager lala Previous tal Save o Cancel
247. ining 32 bit libtcl8 4 so for the example below tcl 8 4 13 3 fc6 1386 rpm for Red Hat K NOTE Do not use any x86_x64 rpms these would not install the 32 bit libraries Any 32 bit tcl rpm that is of version 8 4 and provides libtcl8 4 so works You can download them from Sourceforge http sourceforge net Download these then issue the command rpm ivh force tcl 8 4 13 3 fc6 i386 rpm This forces the installation of the 32 bit libraries on a 64 bit system Ensure that your expect executable in your installation directory is properly linked by issuing the following commands Someone RHEL5 64bit which expect opt dorado oware3rd expect linux bin expect someonetRHEL5 64bit ldd opt dorado oware3rd expect linux bin expect linux gate so 1 gt 0xffffe000 libexpect5 38 so gt opt dorado oware3rd expect linux bin libexpect5 38 so 0xf7 d2000 libtc18 4 so gt usr lib libtcl8 4 so 0x0094c000 libdl so 2 gt lib libdl so 2 0x0033e000 libm so 6 gt lib libm so 6 0x00315000 libutil so 1 gt lib libutil so 1 0x00b8d000 libc so 6 gt lib libc so 6 0x001ba000 lib 1d linux so 2 0x0019d000 18 Overview Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager Make sure that 1ibtc18 4 so maps to lib libtc18 4 so An Alternative for Red Hat Linux 1 Copy usr lib libtcl8 4 so from a 32 bit RH system to usr local 1lib 32bit on your 64 bit Red Hat system 2 As root execute I
248. inke tuto loa Ge aon gtd aa eae de e 175 LinkDiscovery 2 02 2 000 176 Equipment Details 0 00 cece cece e eee een ees 178 Performance Indicators 179 Interfaces 3 ees aah ate fal oe Meek See Ew 180 Alarms 2 2 a 181 How to Schedule Actions 0 cece cece cece eee e eee 186 DireCt ACCeSS c2 canal 188 MIB Browser 0 222200 188 Terminal g osc cect ok Ge Bac Acne Bagh hte Ao A aa ead acd 190 Ping IGMP Lot ce ad te ite ae ee ae ae a 191 HTTP ATT S ih flee cs cand ae die he elt Geta nf ee de a 191 POPS 22 30 o da th AE Meal hh io acl obs 191 Port Editor anena O A eh a ot a as 194 Report Templates 00 0000 cece e eee cr 195 How to Create a Report Template 0000eeeee 195 Report Template Editors 196 RE POMS 2 sted ae aid hake ara nastch eds Muara aaa ne nee psa anes 200 How to Generate a Report 20 e cece eee ees 204 Report Editor aaa 204 Branding Reports a aaa o 206 07 Vis ali e m tiro aE eign in DE ARE S 207 Visualize My Network 00 0c c cece cece e eee aee 207 How to Create a Visualization 0 0 cece eee ees 207 Configuring Views 2000 208 Control and Styles o o 210 Data NodeFinder 213 EA ate ee ates Dae we dea weg 216 OVERVIEWS S02 ipa Geom oh aa Goad dre dde 219 Alarms in Visualiz
249. ipment Lg JuniperJ2300 10 128 3 16 10 128 3 16 Managed Equipment l Adaptive CLI Properties Select Adaptive CLI Q Cisco show switchport Input Parameters Monitor Attributes Results led Save Cancel The user can choose an Adaptive CLI to monitor and may have to configure both its input values and metric type for each output attribute The Input data depends on what is configured in the Adaptive CLI attributes Input Parameters In Active Monitoring all attributes of the schema appear in the Input Data for user entered values You must enter the data necessary for all selected targets scripts To enter data click Edit and then enter values Clicking Apply switches the panel back to read only mode K NOTE You must click Save to preserve input or output data configurations 364 Active Performance Monitor Support Actions and Adaptive CLI Monitor Attributes Configure Adaptive CLI output attributes for Active CLI Properties monitoring in this tab in the lower panel of the Monitor Editor screen You can monitor only Attribute Name e Attribute Type String exposed attributes of numeric or boolean pas types To change metric type select the row es E and click the Edit button to its right la Save Cancel An Adaptive CLI Properties screen appears that reminds you of the Attribute Name and Attribute Type where you can Enable the attribute
250. ipts This section describes the details of using Perl scripts within Adaptive CLI See Using Perl in Adaptive CLI on page 334 for more about why to use Perl The Perl output goes to the selected target device Typically this means creating lines like the following Or println show Sparam print show S param n You must specify parameters within the script like param in the screen described in Attributes on page 342 Unlike its internal scripts Adaptive CLI does not automatically create attributes You must also manually configure created attributes to be Mandatory or Optional in that screen A few things to remember when using Perl The normal output of your Perl scripts to stdout are the commands sent to a device by this application If your script produces an error message to stderr the job fails with that message and all script outputs are ignored You can validate a script before sending any command to the device by using die and warn functions in Perl to produce error messages to stderr Such messages trigger the script s failure For such scripts to operate correctly you must have Perl installed on the directory path for all OpenManage Network Manager servers Perl does not come with OpenManage Network Manager and must be installed on the server system independently for it to work with Adaptive CLI You can install your version of Perl and set the PATH environment variable accordingly so
251. ircles the color is the associated alarm color and Labels Only This last style overrides any previous selection to display labels only for problem nodes Visualize My Network Visualize 211 Edge Style Options This lets you configure the colors on connections between icons Enable Edge Labels Layer 2 Speed Styling Edge Speed styling allows color and thickness overrides against edges which have physical connections and speeds Use Style Overrides Speed Thresholds Thickness lt 1 5 Mbps 2 gt 1 5 Mbps amp lt 10 Mbps 2 gt 10 Mbps amp lt 100 Mbps 2 Color Thickness gt 100 Mbps amp lt 1 Gbps gt 1Gbps ADAN af lt gt lt gt gt ler Unknown Speed Apply Cancel First click to Enable Edge Labels To have the edge reflect speeds you can then elect Layer 2 Speed Styling enable Use Style Overrides Select colors for speeds by clicking the lower right corner of the colored boxes that appear next to speed range labels You can also configure the thickness of the edge next to that color selector Click Apply to enable your configuration or Cancel to abandon it and close this options screen K NOTE Revising colors does not mean the revision appears in the legend Background Image Click the to select an image typically a map that you want to appear in the backgroun
252. isco All LAB cisco Devices No e Brocade_Foundry Brocade Foundry Reference Tree Q Better Juniper Discovery Fh Authentications amp dorado amp gapublic Tasks SnapPanels X Close In addition to the right click available in the summary screen you can also click Settings to configure columns Discovery Profiles Resource Management 161 162 Managed Resource Groups These groups make acting on several devices at once more convenient making AE Managed Resource Groups Ze Es management of groups of devices possible The summary screen displays columns describing the group Name Type and Icon You can also right click to do the following Q Settings A Refresh Search Mame y Type Category i Storage Group Dynamic Group g NetScreen Driver Devi Dynamic Group New Lets you make either a Static Group BG Learned WAC adress DIT Oro one in which you select devices or a ila tind le seca Dynamic Group one in which a filter selects devices See details of these screens below B Juniper ERX Driver Dev Dynamic Group Uy Discover Cisco Static Group D220 2 gt 3 Edit This opens the same editors as New populated with the information for the selected group Edit Resources Lets you edit resources associated with the selected group like its location contact or whether to manage it by hostname Visualize Displays a topology map of the selected group See Cha
253. isplays on page 85 Delete filters with the Delete this entry icon next to the edit icon Server This portion of the Control Panel lets you manage the portal s web server Tooltips describing these screens appear when you hover the cursor over fields or click the blue circle surrounding a question mark in the title bar Here are some of its functions Server gt Server Administration Monitor resources and administer settings like logging caching search indexes file upload maximums e mail settings and so on See Search Indexes on page 34 for a description of a particularly important function Tip This panel is visible to administrators only and contains helpful settings and resource information related to the server Control Panel Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 49 Server gt Portal Instance Lets you configure more than one portal instance on your server Server gt Plugins Installation Configure portlet theme and layout plugins here This panel lets you add portlets besides those available from Dell OpenManage Network Manager You can install free portlets for Google Youtube Collab and more For Dell OpenManage Network Manager we include Wikis Journals Blogs so in addition to the collaborative features within Dell OpenManage Network Manager itself as in Sharing on page 87 and Status Bar Alerts on page 75 This means you can collect the knowledge and advice of those managing your network as
254. it expands or changes To experiment with this screen s capabilities click the Install More Portlets button near the top and explore the subsequent screens Server gt Updates Manager Plug in versioning uninstalling and updating K NOTE As long as portlets adhere to open source portlet specifications you can install them Redcell gt Database Aging Policies DAP Database Aging Policies prevent the Dell OpenManage Network Manager database from filling up by filling up by deleting old records You can also save designated contents to an archive file on a specified cycle Database Aging Policies configure which contents to archive the archive location and the configuration of that archive file 50 Redcell gt Database Aging Policies DAP Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager To view and manage such policies right click an item with them for example an alarm or click Manage gt Control Panel and under Redcell click Database Aging Policies Database Aging Policies PORC Repositories Current Aging Policies Add Policy Options Enabled Policy Name Details Schedule Interval Actions DataCollection_DAP Default Printer Data Collectic E Daily Recomended ES Inventory Change Tracking E Default DAP for Change Trac F Daily Recomended GE amp EventHistoryDAP Default Event History Recore 5 Daily Recomended Pa 2 AuditDAP Default audit trail DAP al Daily Recomended Pa a
255. ivated archiving according to this policy Redcell gt Database Aging Policies DAP Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager Repositories When you select a repository in the Aging Policies Editor the available policies come from what is configured in this tab of the editor Aging Policies Current Aging Repositories Add Repository Options Repository Name Description Virtual Path Online Actions Failover Repository Used when primary rep Jrepositories archive fai 2E Default Repository Irepositoriesfarchive de Pa AlarmsDAP repository Aging Policy Repository owareapps eventmgmi E RTCPSessionsDAP rep Aging Policy Repository Jowareappsirtcplarchive GE Adaptive CLI DAP repos Aging Policy Repository owareapps activeconfic GE Redcell gt Database Aging Policies DAP Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 57 Available repositories appear listed in the initial screen Like the Aging Policies Editor you can click Add Repository to create a new repository and Edit or Delete selected listed policies with the icons in the Action column Notice the listed policies indicated whether the archiving destination is Online with a green icon this is red when the destination is offline Aging Policies Adding new Aging Repository Repository Name TestRepository Enter a repository name Description Test Optional description Virtual Path Ampirepository Enter path for
256. k Name A text identifier for the link Link Type Select the type of link from the pick list A End Point Resource Address Click the plus to select a resource for one end of the link When you right click a selected resource it automatically appears here Click the minus to remove it Z End Point Resource Address Click the plus to select a resource for one end of the link When you have selected two resources they automatically appear as A and Z endpoints Tip Remember you can only multi select in the expanded version of the portlet Managed Resources Resource Management 175 Link Discovery This is an automated network link discovery feature that you can initiate from individual devices in the Managed Resources portlet or with the Link Discovery button on the home screen See Link Discovery Prerequisites on page 177 for a list of device features that provide link information Links discovered can also appear in the screen described in Links in Visualization on page 220 ME Discovery For Managed RESOUTeS D goa Job Viewer D Network Link Discovery Network Link Discovery will collect data from network devices allowing it to determine what types of links exist between them B o A Collects information from the Link Layer consisting of the Data Link Layer Layer 2 and the Physical Layer Layer 1 Select the link types to collect Refresh will retrieve new data from the devices All None Type R
257. ke or Cancel to abandon them Resource Monitors Monitoring 253 Monitor Options Monitor options contains two panels The entity panel lets you select the monitor targets The types of monitor entities allowed varies depending on the type of monitor The second panel contains options specific to the monitor type being edited RETA Moa ICETA CETA OTN EOT General Monitor options Calculated Metrics Thresholds Inventory Mappings Conditions Monitor Entities Add Remove All Entity Action Wg All Routers and Switches BeF SNMP Interface Properties Collect from ifXTable M Use not reachable as not available Skip Polling Interval SNMP Attributes Browse Add Remove All Name Oid Instance Syntax Meta Syntax View Type Action ifinErrors 1 361 212 2114 INTEGER Counter32 COLUMN 1214 1213 L L ifinNUcastPkts 1 3 6 1 24 22412 INTEGER Counter32 COLUMN ifinDiscards 13612122143 INTEGER Counter32 COLUMN ifinOctets 1 3 6 1 214 2 24 10 INTEGER Counter32 COLUMN ald ifinUcastPkts 1361 21 224 11 INTEGER Counter32 COLUMN Kd 2z gt n L L4 lad Save Cancel The entity and options panels for the various types of monitors appear below in Monitor Options Type Specific Panels on page 266 Calculated Metrics The calculated metrics panel lets you create attributes that are calculated from existing monitor attributes The metric attribute legend assigns a letter value
258. kground Auto Updates Availability overall q CPU Utilization interrupt Availability El user bp CPU Utilization system Available Memory bf CPU Utilization w Disk Space Used Disk Space Utilization Disk Temperature Established TCP Connections Fan Speed Inbound ICMP Echo Requests Inbound ICMP Errors ind Select the desired series and click the right arrow to move them to the Selected Attributes listbox If the attribute is not a composite then nothing appears in the Available Series listbox Here click the right arrow to move the attribute to the Selected Attributes listbox Dial Chart Properties Dial charts have the following additional properties Monitor Select which monitor the charted data comes from in the pick list Attribute The attribute to get data for Min Max Value The minimum maximum value on the dial Entity The monitor target to get the data for Clicking on the button brings up the entity selector Top Talkers Properties Top Talkers components have the following properties Monitor Select which monitor the charted data comes from in the pick list Attribute The attribute to get data for Max of Entities The number of entities to display Order Select either Ascending Bottom n or Descending Top n Dashboard Views Monitoring 285 Top Subcomponents Properties Top Subcomponents components have the following properties Entity The parent entity for the found subcompon
259. ks to move between pairs of files Tip You can use the browser s Find function typically initiated by Ctrl F to locate text within these views Backup Restore Select these to backup or restore a configuration file See How to Backup Configurations on page 225 or Restore Configurations on page 227 for step by step instructions Deploy Select this option to deploy an OS Image firmware SeeDeploy Firmware on page 238 for more K NOTE Some devices including the Dell Force10 C Series and E Series will allow then drop telnet connections during deployment or file restoration when you select restart as part of the process This can take from six to eight minutes though it can take as long as fifteen minutes for a fully populated chassis During that time you can pint the device however Dell OpenManage Network Manager cannot log in to the device until the reboot is complete Restoring configurations to Dell Force 10 devices may produce errors when individual commands already exist in the running config and cannot be overwritten Dell OpenManage Network Manager ignores such errors and reports success by default since the errors indicate a command was not applied not that restoration was unsuccessful Best practice is to restore to startup config to avoid these errors especially when scheduling backup or backing up a group on such devices Export Import Export lets you save a local copy of the selected config file Imp
260. l Command ACLI 2 Makea new attribute schema with attribute Status integer 3 In Scripts enter the following as Script Content perl C Dorado owareapps performance scripts http_test pl _EquipmentManage r_IP_Address Tip Several Perl scripts appear in this performance scripts directory by default You can try others in addition to the http_test pl script 4 In the Value Extraction panel enter the following d 5 Click Apply 6 Click Save 7 Right click and Execute the ACLI to test it 356 External Commands Actions and Adaptive CLI 8 Look in Job Viewer for the results eena Accon Example ACI Input Results e Y Processing Task Example ACLI e Processing Task Example ACLI on target DellEX8216 10201154 10 20 1 154 Executing Adaptive CLI Example ACLT oe Running script Script 1 click here to see command list Adaptive CLI execution completed click here for details Set attribute extraction results click here for details Completed Task Status Executed al MO MA MO 3012 11 44 Am Success Status 0 x Close Click Set attribute extraction results click here to see the results appear in the bottom panel Notice also that you must check informational messages for all these to appear and that several additional sets of messages besides the extraction results appear Create a Monitor for the External Script Adaptive ACLI Now th
261. l be used EJ sms Configure Email Recipients test test com Subject This is a test Email Header Testing 1 2 3 Email Footer _ Did you know that variables from the event can be substituted into the Subject Header or Footer using For example Name event with severity Severity was received at RecvTime Refer to help for a complete list of available variables ow Apply Cancel Notice that below the Description of the e mail action you can check to send this mail and or SMS to associated Contacts if any are available even if you specify no mail address destination The SMS tab is similar to the e mail tab but limits the number of characters you can enter with a field at its bottom The SMS tab is similar to the e mail tab but limits the number of characters you can enter with a field at its bottom K NOTE You must send SMS to the destination phone carrier s e mail to SMS address For example sending text to 916 555 1212 when Verizon is the carrier means the destination address is 9165551212 vtext com When enabled notification emails go to the Contact associated with the Managed Equipment for the notification event For the contact s email address mail goes to the first specified address from either the Work Email Home Email or Other Email fields in the Contact editor SMS messages go 120 Event Processing Rules Key Portlets to the Pager Email field for the contact If a Contac
262. l delivers powerful solutions to network problems and in addition to the OpenManage Network Manager technology documented in the following pages Dell OpenManage Network Manager offers the following capabilities e Message Boards Blogs Wikis e Shared Calendars Enterprise Chat Messaging RSS Feeds Tagging Ratings Comments The section Server on page 49 describes how to set up some of these features System Basics System requirements depend on how you use the application and the operational environment Your specific network and devices may require something different from the recommendations for typical installations Overview Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 15 Generally base the minimum configuration of any system on its expected peak load Your installation should spend 95 of its time idle and 5 of its time trying to keep pace with the resource demands Upgrading from a Previous Version When you upgrade your OpenManage Network Manager installation from a previous version keep the following in mind e Upgrading requires a new license to activate new features e Performance capabilities have been completely reconfigured When upgrading from previous versions you must re create dashboards from scratch The following require manual migration export then import from previous versions SMTP settings Some scheduled items e You must re create topologies as Visualizations suggestion t
263. lected Columns Related Alarm Data aj Alarm Suppression Description aj dD Related Alarm Data Alarm Severity al Resource Profile Alarm Suppression Mode bb zl z zl fed Save x Close 198 Report Templates Resource Management Click the green plus to select the Inventory Type The types of data available for that inventory type appear in the leftmost column in this screen Click on a Selected Type to see its Available Columns Click the arrows to move columns from Available to Selected The Selected Columns appear in the template s report Layout This tab outlines the column layout for the template MEA General Inventory E Column Configuration Name Font Size Horizontal Alignment Sort Priority Column Title Description 10 Center 1 Description Alarm Suppression Mode 10 Center 1 Alarm Suppression Mode A A Alarm Suppression Description gt Default tt a 1 Alarm Severity 10 Center 1 Alarm Severity 1 1 Alarm Suppression Description 10 Center Default 10 Center Next Execution Date 10 Center Next Execution Date t4 Scheduled 4 Scheduled 10 Center Name Column Text Name Font Size Horizontal Alignment Center xl Font Color Column Width 0 Background Color RF FFFFF Sort Priority 1 Calculation Type o la Save x Close Click on the up down arrows on the right of each row to re order data columns Click to select a row and the editor panel at the bottom
264. lets This is the one exception You do not need to open Configuration Files Expanded to select multiple lines File Management File Server File Management 229 230 Configuration Files Expanded The Expanded portlet lets you filter the list of displayed configuration files and displays the File Type Description File Size and whether the configuration file is Labeled in columns The Labeled column appears with green or red icons depending on whether the config file has a label When a label applies to a configuration you cannot Delete or Archive it 2 Configuration Files Return to previous Default Configuration Files Filter Search Refresh Settings JB Y Equipment File Type File Name Date Saved Version Description File Size Labeled E Router 192 168 1 138 Text DefaultConfig 911411 8 55 AM 1 3KB Mm JuniperM5 10 128 3 151 5 Text DefaultConfig 911111 8 55 AM 1 32 KB 3 item s returned Reference Tree f Labels Using Config File 5 DefaultConfig 1 Labelw L Current Assigned On 9MM1 8 55 AM 4 Change Determ 9 1 11 8 55 AM The Labels Using Config File snap in displays all labels connected to the selected configuration file and the date on which that connection was made The Reference Tree displays the configuration file name and lets you right click it to access the available operations it supports To see the most recent configuration files see Top Config
265. lter 12 369 Filter Settings Rule Editor 112 Filter Management 48 Firewall Issues 25 Firewall requirements 30 Fixed IP Address 24 Flash 19 Flash for 64 bit browsers 19 Forward Northbound 117 FTP Protocol Selection 69 G General Rule Editor 111 Getting Started 27 Graphs 77 Group Operations 225 GUI 369 H Heap 28 29 Help Tooltips 72 How to Add Remove Columns 84 Add User Roles 40 Add Users 36 Backup Configurations 225 Configure ProScan Groups 304 Configure Resource Level Permis sions 59 Create a Container for each Customer 60 Create a Custom Dash board View 282 Create a Key Metrics Monitor 264 Create a Monitor for an External Script 356 Create a Monitor Report 265 Create A Performance Template 286 Create a Report Tem plate 195 Create a Simple Dash board View 279 Create a topology view 207 Create a Visualization 207 Create Adaptive CLI Ex ample 361 Create an ICMP Monitor 263 Create an SNMP Inter face Monitor 262 Create Event Processing Rules 109 Create Source Group Criteria 316 DAP Workflow 51 Deploy an OS Image 239 Discover Resources 152 Discover Your Network 64 Do Change Management Example 305 Edit Discovery Profiles 154 Filter Expanded Portlet Displays 85 Register a License 63 Report on Change Deter mination 331 Restore a single configu ration to many target devices 241 Restore Configurations 227 Run Change Determina tion 329 Set Unix Permissi
266. lumns on page 84 This screen has the same columns available as the summary screen Ey Vendors Return to previous Defaut Vendor Fitter y Advanced Filter Search lt Refresh Settings JB Y Enterprise Number 674 A DoremiLabs inc 23 EMC Corporation Inc 3 Enterasys Networks eg Extreme Networks 5 F5 Labs Inc Fuji Xerox Co Ltd 297 Maa aasien Reference Tree 4 Dorado Software 140 Vendors Key Portlets Vendors Snap Panel The snap panel displays the icon for the selected vendor Vendors Key Portlets 141 142 Vendors Key Portlets Resource Management Introduction The Resource management portlets let you manage devices you have discovered or created on your network Resource Management portlets let you view device specific information both general name type location contact and technical vendor subcomponents and so on This chapter contains information about the following portlets Authentication Container Manager Container View Discovery Profiles Managed Resources Ports Reports Authentication The authentication summary screen displays credentials used to communicate with and manage devices E Authentication pAX 17 Settings Refresh Search Hame y Designated for EMS Type XXX EMC testipmi Q IPMI test3 EMC test Telnet SSH TELNET _Altiris Demo 8 Telnet SSH Telnet Cisco MDS Telnet SSH M 4 2 3 4 DW Introduction Resource Ma
267. many database actions 2 Network Size Devices lt 5 Users lt 20 Single site less than 10 lt 100 concurrent users Single site less than 25 lt 500 concurrent users Medium large network lt 1 000 up to 50 concurrent users Large network upto lt 2 000 100 concurrent users Application Constraints lt 2Mbs Internet egress and a 1 1000 sample rate lt 2Mbs Internet egress and a 1 1000 sample rate lt 10Gbs Internet egress and a sample rate of 1 1000 lt 50Gbs Internet egress and a sample rate of 1 1000 lt 200Gbs Internet egress and a sample rate of 1 1000 Installation Changes to Heap RAM Settings Use defaults 1 or 2GB application server heap 32 v 64 bit 512M database 768M Synergy 3GB application server heap 2GB database 1G Synergy 4GB application server heap 3GB database 3G Synergy 5G application server heap 4G database 4 5G Synergy 10G application server heap 8G database 9G Synergy 1 Assumptions Servers have at least four cores and are no more than four years old As memory and usage increases the number of CPU cores increase Two cores can work for the most basic installations but are not recommended 2 Each device is equivalent to a L2 or L3 switch with a total of 48 interfaces per device being monitored For each of devices not being monitored for 48 interfaces one can add another 50 devices to the overall inventory for ICMP only monitoring 3 Applica
268. me Description Partition IP Address Actions Informational 2 192 168 1 110 192 168 1 110 E LEGOLAS medPartition 192 168 1110 208 informational 2 192 168 0 178 192 168 0 178 DELL medPartition 192 168 0 178 008 Mediation server routing entries and partition entries appear automatically when mediation server connects for the first time You can test connectivity from appserver cluster and medserver partition Control Panel Getting Started with Dell Open Manage Network Manager 45 You can export or import both server and partition configurations Use the button on the right above the listed servers or partitions to do this Importing Partitions MedServers overwrites those in the database with the same names Exporting a partition exports contained medservers too Importing a partition looks for overlapping routing entries and saves the partition with only its unique entries If no entries are unique the partition is not saved K NOTE This panel does not appear if you install Dell OpenManage Network Manager in stand alone mode without a separate mediation server To make it appear add medserver support true to the portal ext properties Remember best practice is to override properties as described in Overriding Properties on page 23 In addition to automatically detecting mediation servers you can click Add Server to configure additional mediation servers Servers Partitions Mediation Server
269. me Type Action test Embedded CLI 34 lel Save x Close Notice you can order multiple scripts with the arrow s to the right of a listed script Dell OpenManage Network Manager uses the first script s filter to match the target In other words suppose there are two scripts the first with filter target type SWITCH and the second with no filter Then only SWITCH devices run the first script and quit All other devices will not run first script but run the second script since that script has no filter Actions Portlet Actions and Adaptive CLI 348 Script Settings Click Add New Script to create a new item in those listed at the top of this screen or select and item and click the Edit icon to its right to alter it When you create a new script you must select either Embedded CLI or Perl Embedded CLI scripts are command line interface CLI interactions See Perl Scripts on page 360 for more about using Perl PB Creating New Adaptive CLT Action General Attributes E Script Settings Name Script 2 Attribute Delimiter E Error Conditions 29 2 l Equipment Name LY Apply x Close RS gt Target Filter F Al Juniper Router 0 z Optional Attribute Delimiter Continue Patterns Parameter E CLI Name a Equipment Name Tokens omm Clicking the Delete icon removes a selected item Notice that the up down buttons to the right of the list allo
270. memory setting as appropriate For example for 8G export JAVA_OPTS SJAVA_OPTS Dfile encoding UTF8 Xmx8192m XX MaxPermSize 256m ZN CAUTION To manage Windows systems in single server deployments you must install this application on a Windows host In distributed deployments a mediation server that supports WMI must communicate to managed Windows systems Windows installation also installs Internet Information Services IIS formerly called Internet Information Server That installation does not turn IIS on by default Do not enable IIS on the host s running Dell OpenManage Network Manager Also Do not install if you are logged in as user admin Installation and startup include Running the installer responding to its prompts Starting application server In Windows you can use the Start button Start gt OpenManage Network Manager gt Start application server or type startappserver in a command shell or right click the server manager tray icon and select Start if you have installed Dell OpenManage Network Manager as a service and that icon is red not green o Starting web server If this does not auto start you can use the Start button Start gt OpenManage Network Manager gt Synergy Manager or right click the web server s tray icon to start it You can also double click this icon and automate web server startup On Linux start or stop the web server with scripts startportal sh start or st
271. mon Setup Tasks on page 67 describes Installation and Startup Application server produces the Dell OpenManage Network Manager information for web clients It monitors devices and produces the output which the web server then makes available for those web clients See Linux Prerequisites on page 30 for advice about installing to Linux Initiate installation by executing win_install exe Windows or linux_instal1 Linux Click through the installation wizard accepting the license and making the appropriate entries During some installations one screen lets you select the application s memory size Best practice is to select the largest available on your hardware while leaving sufficient memory for the operating system 28 Installation and Startup Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager Heap Memory ona single machine installation serves the operating system database and web server You can configure the selected application server heap memory size any time with the following properties in owareapps installprops lib installed properties oware server min heap size 8192m oware server max heap size 8192m To manually change Dell OpenManage Network Manager web portal heap settings change the setenv sh file JAVA_OPTS SJAVA_OPTS Dfile encoding UTF8 Xmx1024m XX MaxPermSize 256m The file is in opt dorado oware synergy tomcat x x x bin Add the export directive in front of the line and change the Xmx max
272. mp JobDAP Default job status record DA 5 Daily Recomended we K AlarmsDAP Default Alarm Records DAP 5 Daily Recomended DES Discovery Definition Data D Default DAP for archiving sta F Daily Recomended PIE RTCPSessionsDAP Default RTCP Session Recc 5 Daily Recomended YES InventoryReportDAP Default Inventory Report DAF F Daily Recomended GEES Adaptive CLI DAP Default Adaptive CLI Record a Daily Recomended YES ConfigFileDAP Default Configuration File D l Daily Recomended 48 8 ConfigChangeRecordDAP Default DAP for archiving cor ical Daily Recomended Pa amp Transparent Bridging Entry Default DAP for archiving sta Fl Daily Recomended pa 1D gt Enable All Disable All Execute All Policies appear in the Aging Policies tab of this screen with columns that indicate whether the policy is Enabled the Policy Name Details description Scheduled Intervals and icons triggering three Actions Edit Delete and Execute Notice that the bottom right corner of this page also lets you Enable Disable Execute All policies listed Cd X How To DAP Workflow The following are steps typical for implementing DAP 1 From the screen listing Database Aging Policies DAP click Add Policy and select a policy from the displayed list of alternatives 2 This opens Aging Policies Editor 3 Inthe Aging Policies gt General tab specify the name schedule interval whether this policy is Enabled and so on 4
273. n Title Title of this component required Show Title Check to display this title above the chart for this component This overrides the default title that is shown for some charts Component Type Combo Box which specifies what type of component to create These include the following chart types Line Dial Bar Top Talkers a line chart showing the top or bottom n components for a specific attribute on a specific monitor Top Sub components a line chart showing the top or bottom n subcomponents belonging to a specific device for a specific attribute See 284 Dashboard Views Monitoring Other controls appear depending on the component type selected These components also have a Monitor control a pick list where you can select from which monitor the charted data originates See Dial Chart Properties Top Talkers Properties and Top Sub components Properties below for specifics about those The line and bar components have two tabs under the general properties section Mon itor Targets and Attributes The Monitor Targets section lets you select the devices that are sources of data Click the Add button displays the monitor target selector 6 The Attributes tab selects the attribute s that appear in the chart If an attribute is a composite then its series appears in the Available Series listbox Monitor Tages EES Available Attributes Available Series Selected Attributes Active Processes idle a CPU Utilization bac
274. n displays the message traffic between Dell OpenManage Network Manager and the device s See Audit Trail Portlet on page 93 for more about Job Viewer screens Link Discovery Prerequisites Although Dell OpenManage Network Manager automates link discovery you must enable the sources for link discovery information on the devices where you do such discovery Data sources used to derive links appear listed below These sources are typically required for the network operations so if all the sources are disabled there would be no network to manage in the first place The more of the sources are enabled the higher is the quality of links discovered Data sources supported EEE Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP support e Cisco Discovery Protocol CDP support reserved for future use e Extreme Discovery Protocol EDP support reserved for future use VLAN support e Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE STP RSTP PVSTP PVSTP support AFT support Managed Resources Resource Management 177 178 Equipment Details This screen lets you drill down to display equipment details for resources You can see it by selecting Details in the right click menu for the Managed Resources portlet You can also install an Equipment Details portlet on a page and use the Container View portlet to select individual devices that appear in it In that case you must select an individual device before it displays data E Details fi ForceS4810P_11 10
275. n s usr local lib 32bit libtcl8 4 so usr lib libtcl18 4 so Supported Web Browsers Supported web browsers include e Chrome v 6 and above Safari v 5 and above e Firefox v 3 6 and above e Internet Explorer v 9 and above Screen resolution should equal or exceed 1280 x N pixels Users running Safari on an Apple machine must modify Java preference to run applets as their own process Java Preferences are under Applications gt Utilities on OSX K NOTE Internet Explorer versions 8 and older display alignment issues have slower JavaScript and Flash processing and some transparencies do not work Other anomalies include non rounded corners no alpha rendering scroll bars in performance indicators non working multi level menus a too large OS Images schedule form and others To fix these anomalies install the Chrome plug in at http code google com chrome chromeframe After it installs close IE and re open it The look and feel should improve Tip You can often resolve problems by refreshing the browser s display ZN CAUTION Opening Dell OpenManage Network Manager or links originating within it in multiple tabs on multi tab browsers is not supported To see multiple screens configure Dell OpenManage Network Manager s Menu Bar You can download and install updates if your browser or version varies from those supported To have all Dell OpenManage Network Manager functionality you must also install
276. n the overall network bandwidth we want to identify what applications are at cause and who is responsible for running them 1 Look in the Top 5 Traffic Flow Endpoints portlet 2 From the list of the Top 5 Endpoints you will typically see that port X is high on the list 3 Expand the portlet and drill down into the port X endpoint to see what are the top conversations going through port X 4 Drill down into conversations to identify any unauthorized applications 5 Drill down further to identify users of any unauthorized applications 6 Now go stop them Traffic Flow Analyzer Example Traffic Flow Analyzer 301 302 Traffic Flow Analyzer Example Traffic Flow Analyzer Change Management ProScan Introducing ProScan and Change Management Dell OpenManage Network Manager s change management utility is ProScan which lets you scan stored configurations to verify managed devices compliance with company department or industry standards This application automatically tracks all changes occurring to managed devices You can report on user specified values found in persisted backup configuration files for a group of devices This lets network managers security officers and external auditors generate detailed audit trail documents to validate compliance with both internal standards ISO 17799 NSA Guidelines as well as industry regulations Sarbanes Oxley GLBA HIPAA Compliance reporting lets you specify a text string regula
277. n the right to locate specific text within the Config File You can also select and copy text within this screen Notice that Selected Config and Live Config current version and storage dates appear at the top of this screen When you perform a backup that differs from the config that is Labeled Current that label changes to Live Config if changes are detected Selected Config appears when you open this screen from the Configuration Files Portlet but Live Config Current Config appear side by side when you open this screen from the Managed Resources portlet ERA Sogi ile tor OAA Selected Config DetautContig Live Config DefaultConfig czym Current Configuration Date Stored 04 14 11 02 10 40 PM 04 14 11 02 10 40 PM Version 1 Current Version 1 Date Stored Live Config Compare Files System Description G5M73523 NetGear GSM73525 48 GE 4 TENGIG Isystem Software Version 8 0 3 4 System Up Time 36 days O hrs 43 mins 48 secs Additional Packages FASTPATH QOS FASTPATH Stacking Current SNTP Synchronized Time Not Synchronized enable password Sbaac5fd928449990a01b5a19a7aa32559eb3ca073dfe7aa2d8fcfa6bc34f12a493e309d48d network protocol none MEN database vlan routing 1 1 exit configure sntp client mode unicast sntp server status is active sntp server time d netgear com 4 Eg Backup A Restore x Close File Management File Server File Management 22
278. n the same page as the Managed Resources Proscan portlet selecting a device in Managed Resources makes its ports appear in the Ports portlet These can get out of sync but clicking the browser s Refresh restores the correspondence between a selected device and the ports displayed You can also add Links to ports with the right click menu See Ports gt Links Existing links appear in the Reference Tree snap in for the selected port in the Expanded Ports portlet Other snap ins display port information and any learned MAC address es for the port Right clicking a listed port produces a menu with the following items Edit Details Visualize Event Management Links Performance and View as PDF See Ports on page 191 for more about a portlet exclusively for ports and Port Editor on page 194 for information about editing them K NOTE To resync a port resync the device that contains it Equipment Details Resource Management 181 Ports gt Links When you add or edit a link the Link Details screen appears A Ene Link Details Link Hame Test Link Link Type Logical Link A End Point Resource e xe 0 0 8 JuniperJ2300 10 126 3 16 1012 A End Point Address Z End Point Resource xe 0 0 8 JuniperM5 10 128 3 15 10 128 3 Z End Point Address la Save x Close It contains the following fields Link Name An identifier for the link Link Type Select the type of link to create in the
279. n to duplicate the listed condition 260 Resource Monitors Monitoring The editor has the following fields and settings to configure aladas Berichte r Condition Properties Name PacketOutBig Alert O Trendable LE Severity Warning xl of Occurrences I Description Packets Out Exceed 200 po Condition Filter Filter Criteria Add Group Desete Group 4 AND Match All of the following Criteria Gr oup Match All C Match Any Clear Conditions Te Packets Out Errors y greater than y 200 Y Apply o itspeed y greater than z o al lad Save Cancel Condition Properties Name Fnter a text identifier for the conditions Alert Check this if you want Dell OpenManage Network Manager to emit an alert when the monitor satisfies the conditions Trendable Check if the conditions specified are trendable Severity Specify the severity of the emitted alert if any of Occurrences Enter the number of occurrences of what is specified in the Condition Filter to satisfy the Conditions Description A text description for the conditions Condition Filter Minimally use this panel to select a condition an operator and a value If you want to use the logical AND or OR operators with a second condition click the green plus and select a second condition operator and value For example Packet Out Errors greater than 200 AND ifSpeed
280. n using an SNMP version other than SNMPv1 The value of this object SHOULD contain the value of the agent addr field from the original Trap PDU as generated by an SNMPv1 agent 1 3 6 1 6 3 18 1 3 snmpCommunityMIBObjects 3 snmpTrapCommunity OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX OCTET STRING MAX ACCESS accessible for notify STATUS current DESCRIPTION The value of the community string field of an SNMPv1 message containing a Trap PDU which is forwarded by a a proxy forwarder application using an SNMP version other than SNMPv1 The value of this object SHOULD contain the value of the community string field from the original SNMPvl message containing a Trap PDU as generated by an SNMPvl1 agent 1 3 6 1 6 3 18 1 4 snmpCommunityMIBObjects 4 Dell OpenManage Network Manager always adds snmpTrapAddress to every trap forwarded as proxy never adding snmpTrapCommuni ty It does not keep track of the community string on the traps received Event Processing Rules Key Portlets 119 Email Email actions configure destinations and messages for e mail and SMS recipients You can include fields that are part of the event by using the variables described in Email Action Variables on page 122 Description TestEmail Uniquely identifies this email action configuration Notify Associated Contact T Email SMS will be sent using the associated Contact record if available othenwise recipient addresses specified here wil
281. nManage Network Manager package you have installed The toggle on the right side of the The Dock makes this menu bar appear or disappear Tip You can drag and drop the menu bar labels to different positions and can click a label to rename the page or delete it with the x Site Map To see where pages and sub pages are within your installation look at the Site Map portlet Click the listed link s to go to the location s gt ies 22 Site Map t Graphs Graphs can appear in alarm and performance portlets These display the real time division of total alarms or performance metrics and you can change their appearance or associated data lists display See Alarms on page 100 for more graphs charts in that portlet o Alarms o o Admin o Summary Status Bar Alerts Portal Conventions 11 Hovering the cursor over a listed item in the column where a question mark appears indicates a tooltip with more information is available for this item An informational popup screen appears after a brief wait to query the application server These pop ups can include graphs of recent activity too TE Juniper E series 310 38 Juniper Networks Inc 06117M0 05 05 PM 15 00 35 45 40 45 45 45 50 46 55 45 00 45 ecu Juniper Networks Inc ERX 310 Edge Routing Switch SW Version 10 3 0 release 0 0 Buildld 11492 Build Date October 16 2009 12 1
282. nManage Network Manager s alarms help you recognize issues before your network users experience productivity losses Alarms can also trigger actions like email executing Perl scripts paging SNMP traps Syslog messaging and external application execution Traps and Syslog Dell OpenManage Network Manager lets you investigate network issues with traps and Syslog messages You can use Dell OpenManage Network Manager to set up events alarms and then receive process forward and send syslog and trap messages Reports and Graphs Dell OpenManage Network Manager comes with many pre configured reports and graphs to display data from its database You can archive and compare reports or automate creating them with Dell OpenManage Network Manager s scheduler Modularity With additional modules Dell OpenManage Network Manager can analyze network traffic manage services and IP address and subnet allocations OpenManage Network Manager modules save time adding to existing Dell OpenManage Network Manager deployments to add feature functionality without requiring additional standalone software Why Dell OpenManage Network Manager Preface Networks with Dell OpenManage Network Manager The beginning of network management with Dell OpenManage Network Manager is Discovery Profiles of the resources on a network After that occurs you can configure Visualize topology views Resource Monitors and Performance Dashboards Once you have done
283. nagement 143 This portlet displays credentials used in discovery and communication with network resources The Name column identifies the set of credentials Designated for EMS means it is available for all users and Type indicates the protocol for that authentication Functions common to many menus in addition to the Import Export and Sharing include the following actions are available in the right click menu New Edit Opens Authentication Editor where you can create a new authentication or edit the selected authentication You cannot change the Authentication Type when you edit an existing authentication Details Displays a reference tree associated equipment and the configuration created or altered in Authentication Editor Audit Opens an audit trail viewer for the selected authentication Delete Deletes the selected authentication If it is in use an error message appears saying that deletion is not allowed Import Export Imports or exports authentications to your Dell OpenManage Network Manager system Authentication Editor You can right click and select New or Open to create or modify credentials for your system You can also Delete and Share with User from that right click menu Creating New Authentication ED Equipment User Groups General Authentication Parameters 1D TestAuthentication Use for EMS Vv Authentication Type TeinetiSSH x User ID User Password Enable ID
284. nagement ProScan xX How To Do Change Management Example The following describes an example use of Change Manager This backs up a configuration file modifies it then scans the file for the modified text and acts according to the result The following steps describe how to do this 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 Back up a device configuration Select a device and click the File Management gt Backup right click menu in Managed Resources portlet Right click and Export this backup to a file in the Configuration Files portlet Edit this config file adding the word MyTestContact somewhere in its text that has no impact For example the snmp server contact or in comments Tip Some devices let you create descriptions within their configurations so you can enter a word without impact there Now import this edited file from the Managed Resources portlet after you have right clicked on the same device from which you exported it Renaming it something distinctive is helpful Right click this file and Restore to the device Since the name is a comment or description it should not interfere with the device s operations Right click the device and select File Management gt Backup This makes the MyTestContact file label Current Tip To confirm MyTestContact is labeled Current you can use an Advanced filter in the expanded Configuration Files portlet to view only Current labels Now create a ProScan poli
285. nd provide access to specific applications Sites can have members which are given exclusive access to specific pages or content Site Template Configures pages and web content for organizations Page Template Configures a page and portlets as well as permissions Password Policy Configure the security policies you want including user lockout and password expiration and assign them to users Custom Fields Lets you configure custom fields for Blog entries Bookmarks or Bookmark Folders Calendar Events and so on Monitoring Lets you see all the live sessions on the portal Click a session to see its details This is usually turned off in production for performance reasons Plugins Configuration Configure role access to portlets and features By default only administrators can add portlets plugins to their pages Redcell gt Permission Manager Manage Permissions to manage user access to different features T hese are configured as part of Roles which aggregate users regardless of community affiliation Create Roles with Portal gt Roles The Users editor screen accessible from the Action menu for users listed in Portal gt Users and Organizations lets you manage groups to which Users are assigned Permission Manager Role to Permission Settings Name Description Action User Portal Role Portal users with view a 2 TestRole1 2 test 2 Power User Portal Role Portal users with exten gt Admini
286. nds on the selected action you are scheduling Many actions have no parameters so this tab is disabled Enter the parameters for the action you are scheduling ee srira seen Guggan phd pro ie General Schedule Auto RP announce x Graceful Restart Duration 35 Disable O Dense Groups a 2 192 168 1 31 l VRF Hame Test VRF Static RP Address E a z 192 168 0 45 gt sl la Save x Close Tip Hover the cursor over fields to make their description appear in a tooltip Schedule This screen is a standard scheduler screen as described in Schedules on page 95 Active Performance Monitor Support You can monitor Adaptive CLI execution results with Active Performance Monitor To do this you must select Adaptive CLI as the monitored type when creating a new performance monitor see Resource Monitors on page 245 then select a target entities with the Add button in the top Active Performance Monitor Support Actions and Adaptive CLI 363 panel and a particular Adaptive CLI with the green plus in the Adaptive CLI Properties panel at the bottom of this screen Click the Edit page icon to select the Input Parameters to monitor once you have selected an Adaptive CLI E Editoras Olestab lim ositos General Calculated Metrics Thresholds Inventory Mappings Conditions Monitor Entities Add Remove an Entity Type Action y5 JuniperM5 10 128 3 15 10 128 3 15 Managed Equ
287. nents or interfaces are rolled up to the top level device so status may be erroneously reported For example the top level device is not necessarily down if the interace is down If two monitors report the network status of a single device on different intervals they must both agree it is down before that state appears in Managed Resources As long as one monitor says a device is Responding then that is the state displayed Resource Monitors Monitoring If ping fails an endpoint is down and update network status is configured then Dell OpenManage Network Manager tries to ping the switch router in front of the endpoint to determine if that device is reachable If that device also failed then the endpoint s status becomes indeterminate Tip For clarity s sake best practice has only one monitor per device updating network status By default ICMP monitoring enables Update Network Status and monitors all discovered devices K NOTE Migrating from previous versions automatically replaces any configured Heartbeats with ICMP monitors with Update Network Status enabled If your previous system had HTTP or SNMP heartbeats you must manually configure monitors to provide equivalent monitoring in this version of Unreachable Attempts before update The number of attempts to reach the device before Dell OpenManage Network Manager updates the displayed network status of the device 1 100 Click Save to preserve any edits you ma
288. nformation like the ju Share with User i Add Remove Columns MIB text any Event Processing Rules invoked and a Reference Tree for the alarm Visualize Display a topology map that includes the selected alarm s See Chapter 5 Visualize for more about these maps Acknowledge Unacknowledge Alarm Acknowledges the selected Alarm s The current date and time appear in the Ack Time field Unacknowledges previously acknowledged alarm s and clears the entries in the Ack By and Ack Time fields The red unacknowledged icon appears in the expanded portlet and turns to a green check acknowledged icon the alarm has been acknowledged Assign User Assign this alarm to one of the users displayed in the sub menu by selecting that user An icon also appears in the expanded portlet indicating the alarm has been assigned to someone Clear Alarm Clearing the alarm removes the alarm from the default alarm view and marks it as a candidate for the database archiving process DAP Essentially it is an indication to the system that the alarm has been resolved addressed If your system has enabled propagation policies clearing recalculates dependent alarms Alarms Key Portlets 103 Email Alarm E mail the alarm Enter a subject an e mail address to which you want to mail the alarm s content and click the to add to the list of Lala Email Subject addresses the minus deletes them Then click Test r Send Ema
289. ng Report Email Export Type Select the export file type from the pick list Options include CSV HTML PDF XLS and XLSM Overwrite Existing Check to activate overwriting any existing report Save Check to activate saving the report to the database Notify Check to activate emitting a notification event Email Address Enter an e mail destination for the generated report and click the plus to list it You can enter several such e mails Export Directory Enter directory destinations for saved reports as you would e mail destinations x Click Add Schedule to schedule the report for future or repeated execution Execute to run the report immediately or Save to preserve this report s configuration The Job Viewer tab displays the report s progress if you click Execute Reports Resource Management Expanded Reports Portlet Clicking the plus icon displays the expanded portlet the expanded portlet adds Add Remove Column to the menu options available in the summary screen B Reports Return to previous User Filter Advanced Filte Search Refresh Settings JB Y Report Hame Report Template Title Juniper BGP Groups L Juniper BGP Group Template BGP Groups Juniper BGP Information i Juniper BGP Template BGP Juniper Bootp 1 Juniper Bootp Template Bootp Servers Juniper Bootp Interfaces Juniper Bootp Interface Template Bootp Interfaces Juniper I
290. ng Systems Ltd 22163 M4 2113114 gt N Right clicking a row lets you do the following New Edit Opens the Vendor Editor where you can configure or re configure a vendor Details Displays a panel showing the alarms registered models and identifiers for the selected vendor Visualize See a topology of the network filtered to display only the selected vendor see Chapter 5 Visualize Import Export Common menu capabilities described in Import Export on page 86 This screen has the following columns Vendor Icon The icon for this vendor Enterprise Number The enterprise number for this vendor Vendor Name The name for this vendor Vendors Key Portlets 139 Vendor Editor This editor configures or re configures vendors New Vendor E It has the following fields Pers eo General Vendor Details Vendor Name A text identifier for the vendor reas avemr 3 Enterprise Number 123 Enterprise A numeric identifier for the vendor Vendor Icon Vendor Icon Select an icon from the pick list Contact Click the Add button to select from contacts in Dell al save x ctose OpenManage Network Manager to associate with this vendor See Contacts on page 133 for instructions about configuring contacts Expanded Vendor Portlet When you expand the Vendor portlet besides sharing you can also click Settings to configure the columns that appear here see Show Hide Reorder Co
291. ng over the graph displays the value The following controls appear in its title bar Select Chart Type Lets you change the chart type Available chart types include Pie Line Bar Stacked Bar and Column Select Timeframe Lets you change the period between Last 15 Minutes Last Hour Last 24 Hours Last 5 Days and Last 30 Days Search Displays a search dialogue to find specific traffic data Report Type Lets you change the report type between Top 5 10 or 25 and Bottom 5 10 or 25 Load View Loads a saved traffic flow view created with the Save button Save Saves the current view to a named view Below the title bar a navigation bar displays the context path See Drill Down below for more about this Below that navigation bar a row containing the following controls appear Entity Type Selects the type of entity to report on Conversations End points and so on Attribute Selects which attribute to graph Bytes Packets Bits Sec Traffic Flow Portlet Traffic Flow Analyzer 297 Refresh Refreshes the screen runs the report applying any new settings Drill Down you can drill down into a report by clicking on one of the links in the table This displays a detail view of the selected entity and the name of the entity appears in the navigation bar Detail for Application Syslog Bytes all el C A Application Syslog Applications Detal Y Bytes vw R Last Hour 2 000 0 06 50 09 10 09
292. nieor General Calculated Metrics Thresholds Inventory Mappings Monitor Entities Entity Type B Juniper JUNOS Driver Devices Group Key Metrics Properties Category commen Available Selected Available Memory a CPU Utilization Established TCP Connections Memory Utilization Inbound ICMP Echo Requests Inbound ICMP Errors Inbound IP Address Errors Inbound IP Discards Inbound IP Header Errors Inbound TCP Errors Inbound UDP No Port Memory Used Outbound ICMP Echo Replies Outbound IP Discards BYSV K3 Save Cancel The Monitor Entities Panel lets you select equipment group and equipment manager objects as described in ICMP on page 267 above The Key Metrics Properties panel at the bottom of this screen uses a pre defined list of key metrics It does not check if the key metrics selected are supported by the devices and groups selected in the monitor Resource Monitors Monitoring Proscan In this screen you simply select the Proscan policy to monitor In the Thresholds tab you can set thresholds for both in and out of compliance numbers Puau iaun General Monitor options Calculated Metrics Thresholds Inventory Mappings Monitor Entities Proscan Policy contains the list of entities to be monitored Proscan Properties Proscan Policy Cisco ACL Permit OSPF la Save Cancel The Proscan policy contains the target network assets Resource Monitors
293. non instanceable container portlet displays configured containers for Dell OpenManage Network Manager Because it E Container View zx is non instanceable only one can appear on a page Top Expand the container tree by clicking the plus to each o Wena container s left The container selected acts as a filter for a O mo E Top2 screen s other Dell OpenManage Network Manager portlets If you select Folsom as a location in the container portlet then only items related to Folsom devices appear in the other portlets on the page If you select a parent container that expands the selection to include all child containers selections It does not however select everything You can configure containers in Container Editor described in the next section K NOTE You may have to wait a few moments to see a container s contents accurately Portlets that respond to Container or Map Context filtering include the following Audit Trail Event History Locations Vendors Contacts Managed Resources Ports Authentications Discovery Profiles Monitors Services Tip If a container displays unexpected results right click it to refresh its membership or alarm state xX How To Use Containers 1 Create the containers you would like for filtering views of resources For example you can create a container for each customer or location 2 Create a page with Managed Resources or other container filtered portlets P
294. ns Top 5 Autonomous Systems Top 5 Conversations Top 5 Endpoints Top 5 Protocols Top 5 Receivers and lop 5 Senders related to the device selected before right clicking Select a type and click the Refresh double arrow to the right of the selector LF Managed Resources O Settings Refresh Search Network Status Hame y IP Address Vendor Responding q TurbolronTX24_177 1 10 20 1177 g Dell inc E Responding BeeT AA a New Responding w PCT5548_173 10 Pi Edit Responding R PCTS548P_172 1 BI Details Responding we PCTS524P_171 1 lt gt Visualize Q Not Responding we PCM8024K_242 13 Actions e Change Management P y 4 S Direct Access Event Management Ports File Management Links 17 Settings Refresh Searc Performance Name ig Resource Groups m Tet 0 Ey Resync Mm Tet 0 2 4 Service Log Tet03 Traffic Analyzer E Register mel Te1 0 4 3 Delete y Show Traffic Tet 0s A Edit Custom Attributes pa ml Tel 06 View as PDF 5 n 4 242 Share with User The screen that then appears has the features of the Expanded Traffic Flow Portlet described below See also How to Use Traffic Flow Analyzer on page 294 Traffic Flow Portlet Traffic Flow Analyzer uses several types of portlets one for each of the types of objects on which it reports These are Applications Autonomous Systems Conversations Endpoints Exporters Protocols Receivers and Senders Traffic Flow Portlet T
295. ns for post processing automation rules The following sections describe these in detail General The General screen is common to all rule types Ern New f Device Access Pre Processing Rule ED Filter Settings Specify Rule Properties Name Test Device Access Rule Unique Rule Name Description This is a device access rule Enabled Check to enable processing of this event rule p g It contains the following fields Name A text identifier for the rule Event Processing Rules Key Portlets 111 112 Description An optional text description of the rule Alarm Only This is visible only in post processing rules Check this to enable the rule only if an alarm is generated not suppressed Enabled Check this to enable the rule Filtering Settings For all rule types select the Event Definition Click Add to open a screen where you can select events to include in the event you are creating This incudes a filter at the top that you can use to search for specific events For example Event Name Contains You can then click Add Selection to include selected items in this filter or Add All to include all displayed events After you finish event selection click Done at the bottom of this selection screen Jeano ies pos epocas Aoa tion sent pnl General Fiterino Actions Specify Event s Add Remove all Event Definition MIB Hame Notification OID taExporterDown T
296. ns from a variety of locations by right clicking in Dell OpenManage Network Manager For example e Ports in the Ports portlet How to s Monitoring 243 e Interfaces e Ports Interfaces in the Details panels lets you Show Performance Right clicking on any of the above within a Reference tree displays Performance Options All Top Asset Monitors right click to offer Performance options OpenManage Network Manager Server Statistics This summary screen has no expanded view It displays the statistics for the OpenManage Network Manager application server ET Redcell Server Statistics LOCAL 3 000MB 4 000MB 5 000MB 6 000MB 7 000MB 8 000MB 9 000MB ml Total Memory E Used Memory a Free Memory Partition Name LOCAL A ae Server Type appserver pa 450 Hode Hame 192 168 53 60 E gt 300 Active Members 192 168 53 60 E 150 Options gt 3 Eo 281 The bar graph displays Total Used and Free memory on the server One such graph appears per server monitored Hover your cursor over a bar to see its reading in a tooltip Click the trio of bar graphs related to the server you want to monitor and its information appears in the text and in the thread count gauge The text displays the Server Type appserver the Node Name typically the IP address of the server providing information and Active Members more than one appears for a cluster K NOTE The graphs in this portlet do not start at zero 0 so the bars
297. ns to the original default magnification 100 The Autofit icon zooms to fit all devices in the topology DISPLAYED LEVELS Clicking 1 displays the top level Clicking 2 displays the top level and the one below it Clicking All displays all discovered levels from device to interface Tip The fewer levels displayed the more quickly the display appears Clicking the Filter button opens a screen that lets you further tune the Topology display It includes the following Levei 1 Fiters Level 1 Filters O Contact CB Vendor CB Location Level 2 Filters Excluded Association Types Contact Vendor Location lets you turn off those icons When these are activated the icons disappear Minimum Alarm Severity Critical Level 3 Filters Minimum Alarm Severity 4 Critical Condition Override s O Ignore severity filters on Nodes with Links Level 2 Filters Select a Minimum Alarm Severity to display from the pick list When you select a severity then only resources with that alarm level or greater appear in the topology display Apply Filtering Cancel Level 3 Filters Select a Minimum Alarm Severity to display from the pick list This restricts the display on a lower level than Level 2 Condition Override s When active this excludes level expands on nodes with links that do not match the severity filters 210 Visualize My Network Visualize Click the Apply Filtering button to implement y
298. nt Add Groups Remove All Name Software Version Firmware Version Action SEX DellSRX240 POE 10201155 10 20 1 155 M5 JuniperM5 10 128 3 15 10 128 3 15 10 1R2 A 11 AR2 a lt g gt Execute x Close It has the following fields Select Firmware Image Firmware Image The identifier for the image Description The description for the image Version The version for the image Generate and Save Configuration Only Check this if you simply want to configure for later restoration Label for Configuration Enter a label name if applicable Select Targets for Deployment Use the Add Equipment or Add Groups buttons to select individual devices or groups of devices both are possible together Use Remove All to delete all targets or use the delete icon in the Action column to delete individual equipment or groups K NOTE The listed targets must still pass the filter set in the editor s General Parameters Deploy Configuration xX How To Restore a single configuration to many target devices The following steps describe restoring a single configuration to many discovered devices without overwriting those devices essential information 1 10 11 Back up a single device s configuration that is nearest to the kind you would like to see generally Right click this backed up file in the File Management portlet and Promote it so it appears in the Image Repository portlet
299. nt with as few as two servers Minimum Hardware The minimum hardware specification describes what Dell OpenManage Network Manager needs at a minimum In such minimum installations traffic flowing from the network to OpenManage Network Manager may exceed the capacity of the hardware When estimating the size of a deployment it is important to understand the applications configurations in the target environment Applications that are typically the most demanding of resources are Traffic Flow Analyzer TFA Event Management and Performance Monitoring REQUIRED Minimum hardware 6GB RAM dual core CPU 200 GB 7200 RPM Disk Supports e Standalone installations Single Server is supported when high resource demand applications are used minimally RECOMMENDED Minimum hardware 8GB RAM quad core CPU 400 GB 10 000 RPM Disk Supports e Standalone installations non distributed 20 Single Server Sizing Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager Sizing for Standalone Installations The following are suggested sizing guidelines for your Dell OpenManage Network Manager system Operating System Disks RAM Hardware 64 bit OS with 6GB RAM or 32 bit OS with 4GB RAM All below are 64 bit OS s 8GB RAM single disk consumer level PC 12GB RAM single disk business level PC 16GB RAM multi disk server level PC 32GB RAM multi disk server level PC recommend fast disk array or SSD drive array for the
300. nts Typing a letter goes to that letter in the list You can then click to select from the pick list Click Add Filter to further filter the selected events See Filter Expanded Portlet Displays on page 85 for more about this feature Specify Settings for Selected Rule Type This panel s appearance depends on the type of rule you selected when you clicked New When you are editing an existing rule it defaults to that rule s screen For more about the available alternatives see Filtering Settings on page 112 110 Event Processing Rules Key Portlets 4 The Device Access example creates a specific device access event for user login logout login failure or configuration change Select the Access Type Config Change Login Failure User Login User Logout from the pick list for that field 5 Enter the User Name Variable and or User Name RegEx match string in those fields This confines rule response to the selected users 6 Check Suppress Correlated events if you do not want to see events correlated with this one 7 Click Save to preserve the event processing rule Rule Editor After you select between pre and post processing rules for new rules the following screens manage the event processing described in brief in the Create Event Processing Rules on page 109 The following screens and fields appear in this editor General e Filtering Settings e Syslog Escalation Criteria for pre processing Syslog rules e Actio
301. o performed discovery Install Date Administrative State Locked Device use is prohibited Shutting Down Only existing users can use the device Unlocked Normal use of device is permitted Operational State Disabled Inoperable because of a fault or resources are unavailable Enabled Operable and available for use Active Device is operable and currently in use with operating capacity available to support further services Busy Operable and currently in use with no operating capacity to spare OpenManage Network Manager Managed Resources Resource Management Network Details This displays network information like VLAN s by ID VLAN s by Port and STP Data Use the pick list in the upper right corner of this snap panel to select which to display Utilization Summary A graph of the device utilization typically for CPU Disk I O Memory and ping rate Bandwidth Utilization A graph of the device s bandwidth utilization Notice that you can change the number of top interfaces graphed when this is applicable New Link When you create a new link the Link Details screen appears where you can configure the link Sea sell assy Lin Link Details Link Name TestLink Link Type logicalLink xi A End Point Resource RA PCTSS24P_ 171 410 201 171 9 A End Point Address 10 201 171 Z End Point Resource Click to Select Z End Point Address la Save x Close This screen has the following fields Lin
302. o a role click Action gt Permissions and check the appropriate box next to the role Configure OpenManage Network Manager functional permissions for these roles in Roles see Redcell gt Permission Manager on page 42 Tip You can Export Users to a comma separated value CSV file Once you have configured a user you can click Action and to do the following Edit Re configure the selected user Select the user s Role in the editor too Roles configure access and action permissions Permissions Manage the user s access to and control over various parts of the portal Manage Pages Configure the Public or Private pages for a user depending on the selected tab Possible actions here include changing the look and feel of pages for computers and mobile browsers adding pages and child pages and importing or exporting page configurations Notice that you can configure meta tags and javascript on these pages too Exports are in lar format and go to the download location configured in the browser you are using The export screen lets you select specific features and the date range of pages to export Tip If you want to set up several pages already configured elsewhere for another user or even for an entire community of users export those pages from their origin then Manage gt Pages menu for the user or community Impersonate User Open a web client with the same permissions as the user configured here Imperson
303. o accept your edits for the attribute or Cancel to abandon them Use an existing Parameter Schema for this Adaptive CLI Select this and a Select Existing button appears Clicking this button opens a selector where you can select from previously configured attribute schemas collections of attributes to use in the Adaptive CLI you are configuring Validating IP Address Variables Programatically IP address attributes support four extended properties IP_ MASK SUBNET ALLOW_32_BIT_MASK and ALLOW_ANY_VALID_IP The state of the first two largely defines Dell OpenManage Network Manager s responses IP_MASK Determines whether Dell OpenManage Network Manager accepts an IP address OR a subnet subnet mask The value accepted is an IP address attribute when false subnet subnet mask when true SUBNET This property determines whether a subnet value must be provided or not and controls display of the subnet portion of the widget Valid subnet values are 1 31 By default when both of the above are false the attribute only accepts valid IPv4 addresses For example 10 10 10 4 If IP_MASK is false and SUBNET is true then Dell OpenManage Network Manager accepts any valid IP address with a subnet specified The address must be an IP within the specified subnet For example 10 10 10 4 24 is a valid entry whereas 10 10 10 0 24 is invalid since it represents the subnet id not an actual address within the subnet Actions Portlet Actions an
304. o add them to the list Decimal Default Value Enter a single or range of default decimal values Constraints Enter a range of acceptable numbers separated by a colon For example Constraints 2 4096 At runtime a field where you can enter numbers validates that entered numbers are between 2 and 4096 when running the Adaptive CLI If you enter a number outside this range a validation message appears and the attribute name turns red You can also include several numbers or ranges separated by the pipe character If you specify a range the lowest number must be to the left of the highest number For example 9 99 999 1010 Valid Values Enter valid decimal range values and click the green the red removes them You can manage these as described in Coded Value above IP Address See also Validating IP Address Variables on page 346 Default Value Enter a default IP Address Valid Values Enter valid values as described in Coded Value above Check IP Mask Subnet Allow 32 Bit Mask and Allow Any Valid Ip in the Properties tab if you want the values entered to be those Editable Valid Values Check to enable editing of default or entered IP addresses Integer Default Value Enter a default integer Constraints Enter a range of acceptable numbers separated by a colon You can also include several numbers or ranges separated by the pipe character If you specify a range the lowest number must be to the left of the
305. o determine the distance between levels Distance between nodes Use the slider to determine the distance between nodes Orientation Select from Top to Bottom Bottom to Top Left to Right or Right to Left Draw edges from Select from Node Center or Node Side Link drawing type Select from Straight Straight polyline Curved polyline Orthogonal polyline or Orthogonal curved Cluster Policy Select from Horizontal or Vertical Cluster Spacing Use the slider to determine the spacing between icons not in child parent hierarchy 218 Visualize My Network Visualize Basic Spring Basic Spring is an algorithm attempts to produce a natural layout that optimizes a spread out topology Optimal Edge Length Use the slider to determine the distance between nodes Cluster Policy Select from Horizontal or Vertical Cluster Spacing Use the slider to determine the spacing between icons not in child parent hierarchy OVERVIEW This displays a thumbnail of the entire topology that appears in the larger screen to the right Click a location to move the larger view to center on it Alarms in Visualizations popologies Colored circles and triangles appear next to topology nodes to indicate its network status circles or the alarm state of the device triangles apex points up or the alarm state of its child entities off center triangles apex points down For information about the alarm hover your cursor over
306. o the following Add Action This opens a screen with a selection list of available actions Click Apply to select an action to add to the list for this profile Select an Action to add to the Current Profile Action DiscoverLinksForDevice xl LY Find Actions By most common keyword search CreateL2Links Vv CreateL3Links M DiscoveryOption BetweenDevicesAndManagedDevices xl SL Apply Cancel Notice the default for this screen displays the most common actions but you can also click keyword search in the top right corner to display a search field instead of a pick list with the most common actions The search results 158 Discovery Profiles Resource Management appear in the pick list When you select an item if it has parameters they appear listed below that item Use the checkbox es or pick list to configure these parameters then click Apply to select this action as part of the profile See Actions on page 116 for more about these Edit Delete Move These icons appear to the right of each action If you Edit a profile with parameters you can change them The screen looks like the one that appears when you Add actions Deleting actions removes them from the list and the Move arrows help arrange the order in which actions appear listed and are executed The list of actions the profile executes goes from top to bottom Inspection Using the Inspection Panel is an optional step If you want to execute the pro
307. ocessing open the My Alerts tab in the lower left corner of the portal and click the magnifying glass to the right of the appropriate message Notifications E Archived Date Details a 10 11 10 08 37 AM 5 Learned MAC has been completed s Ll 10 08 10 08 07 AMB Report is now ready For viewing 2 a 10 08 10 08 07 AM Report completed a 10 06 10 02 51 PM a 10 06 10 02 51 PM L 10 06 10 02 51 PM CEEE 2 bm Messages Audit Trail Portlet Portal Conventions 93 Expanded Audit Trail Portlet When you click the plus in the upper right corner of the summary screen the expanded portlet appears Click the Settings button to configure the columns that appear in this screen and their order Filter the appearance of the screen with the Advanced Filter capabilities at its top 94 W Audit Trail 4 Return to previous Advanced Filter Search Refresh Settings JB Y Creation Date v Component User ID Subject 85 1 9 49 AM Redcell Service Center ig Service Resynced A admin 85M1 9 49 AM Redcell Service Center 57 Service Resynced LL admin BASH1 9 49 AM Redcell Service Center 5 Service Resynced A admin 81541 9 49 AM Redcell Service Center Service Resynced 2 admin 85M1 9 49 AM Redcell Service Center 5 Service Resynced 2 admin 81511 9 49 AM Redcell Service Center amp Service Resynced 2 admin 8M5M1 9 49 AM Redcell Service Center E Service Resynced 2 admin 84511 9 49 AM Redcell Service Cent
308. of Apply Cancel The General screen has the following fields Name An identifier for the policy Description A text description of the policy Enabled Check to enable the policy Schedule Interval Use the pick list to select an interval Once you have configured an interval here you can re configure it in the Schedules Portlet Base Archive Name The prefix for the archived file Compress Archive Check to compress the archive file Archive Location Select from the available Repositories in the pick list 52 Redcell gt Database Aging Policies DAP Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager The contents of the Options tab depend on the type of DAP you are configuring Typically this tab is where you set the retention thresholds DAP SubPolicies Some Options tabs include sub policies for individual attribute retention Adding new DataCollection Aging Policy covert CD Printer Data Sub Policies 2 Add Sub Policy Attribute Retention Hours Retention Days Retention Weeks Archive Action All 1008 182 156 DE Y Apply Cancel Click Add SubPolicy or click the Edit button to the right of listed policies to access the editor Editing Tips Archiving options that appear in the Aging Policies Editor vary based on type of policy selected Inventory Change Tracking DAPs ask how long you would like to keep Config reports Inventory Report DAPs ask how long you would like to keep your Histo
309. on ProScan Portlet Change Management ProScan 323 324 return Success else return Failure no description found Tip Notice that you can also combine these scans with the Edit Source Group Criteria regular expressions to streamline them Click Save to preserve the policy you have configured in these screens or click Close in the tool bar to abandon your edits Compliance Policy Job Status This screen displays the progress of compliance scanning you have configured GJ Gejolianes polio Saarion Jey Ses cis o Y Starting ProScan policy NetgearvWolverine e ix Executing policy against device NetgearGSM7252PS 1_9 10 128 4 9 e ix Configuration file not compliant against policy Netgear Wolverine E Following Config Term not satisfied Config Term does not contain wolverine Please click A No proscan policies have target group s Ga oars 11 24 41 am ES Faiur e r Failed Instance 1 i Source Current Configuration System Description GSM 252PS 48 Port GE L2 Managed Stackable PoE SY 4 x Close You can the revisit history of this policy s use in the Audit portlet see Audit Trail Portlet on page 93 Select an audit trail in this portlet to review details When you see the Success indicator then the scanned item is compliant If you also see a warning message that no policies have target groups this does not have Y Success an impact on compliance
310. on F Alarms The alarm panel in Equipment Details displays alarms connected to the selected equipment You can right click these and Acknowledge Clear or Email the selected alarm You can also Assign User and Share with User Alarms Severity Date Openedy Entity Name Event Name TRENA 3 16PM C Router vnurclam_ _redcellNetConfigRestoreFail Acknowledge Alarm amp Assign User gt Clear Alarm Lo Email Alarm Hover the cursor over an alarm and a EPIA popup appears with that alarm s details El Aging Policy just as described in Alarms on page 100 all au Ports This displays the equipment s ports If you hover Ports Software Versior the cursor over a port you can also see the Port ae Network Status mm Type for example Fast Ethernet T1 and so E 1118 Route port Type T on Name port identifier and Operational 711 2 Routel ame mo Type Up Down A column in the summary W 11111 Route Operational State portlet lists what Equipment the port belongs to Hostname ed GigabitEtherneton Router oware net 192 168 0 17 C3825 Cha Model The Expanded portlet displays snap panels and om ae 32 GigabitEthernet0 0 Router oware net 192 168 0 17 C3825 Cha Equipment Icon additional columns for Encapsulation IP cane Sa EP Address Subnet Mask Port Description 8 Max teme a E Location Name IP Address Date Created Tip If the Ports portlet is o
311. on either for telnet or SNMP If it did alter the SNMP authentication you would have to create an SNMP authentication alternative before scanning could occur ProScan Portlet This portlet lets you configure compliance requirements You can use filtering in the Expanded 0 ProScan Portlet to limit the Ls ProScan PH X Settings Refresh Search Hame y Target s Overall Compliance Monitored Scheduled visible policies The Icon and ProScan Type columns indicate whether the e Cisco tacacs enabled ic Cisco SNMP Community String NOT public e Cisco SNMP Community String NOT priv A E A g c Cisco RADIUS Enabled policy is a single policy or a group Columns also display the Overall Compliance of a policy and the Target s number of devices to scan and whether the policy is Monitored red means no green means yes See Proscan on page 269 in Chapter 7 Monitoring for details Finally you can see whether a policy s execution is scheduled To execute a policy manually go to the Managed Resources portlet and right click the targeted device to find the Change Management menu item You can Execute ProScan policies that target the device with that menu item If you want to execute a ProScan policy not already associated with the device or group then select Execute Proscan Policy A selection screen appears where you can select a policy and either execute or schedule it Cisco monitor logging Enabled 000000
312. on ifinErrors 13812122114 INTEGER Counter32 COLUMN 20 ifinNUcastPlds 13612422112 INTEGER Counter32 COLUMN BG ifinDiscards 13642122113 INTEGER Counter32 COLUMN ar ifinOctets 13612122110 INTEGER Counter32 COLUMN BB ifinUcastPits 13612422411 INTEGER Counter32 COLUMN BB 1442 20H Save Cancel The PF and IF table columns indicate if a port filter or interface filter is configured for the entity Click the icons on the right side of the list of Monitor Entities to configure filters Clicking these buttons displays an interface configuration panel General Calculated Metrics Thresholds Inventory Mappings Configuring Interface Filter Interface Type ATM 37 Interface Y i Save Delete Cancel Resource Monitors Monitoring 273 This panel lets you specify filter attributes for the port or interface filters you want to monitor For example if you select a device but only want to monitor active interfaces created by a particular user then these filters do the job The SNMP Attributes panel is the same as described in SNMP on page 270 SNMP Table Monitor This panel appears if you are creating an SNMP Table monitor The application stores not absolute numbers from counters but the counter s change since its last measurement Aza EAOa General Monitor options Calculated Metrics Thresholds Inventory Mappings Conditions Monitor Entities Add Remove All Entity Type Action M5 duniperM5 10128315 1
313. on the same network switch Network reconfiguration can be done through software instead of physically relocating devices DELL CONFIDENTIAL PRELIMINARY 4 6 12 FOR PROOF ONLY Template Last Updated 7 01 2005 Glossary 372 Glossary Index Numerics 32 bit Linux Libraries 18 A A Note About Performance 13 About Box 72 Access Control 367 ACLI needs Perl 32 Acrobat 19 Action Job Screen Results panel 354 Actions 116 335 Active Performance Monitor SNMP Performance Monitoring 262 Performance Monitoring Ex ample 262 Active Performance Monitor Support 363 Adaptive CLI 335 Attribute Appearance and Validation 351 Attributes 342 Conditional Blocks 359 General 341 Monitor Attributes 365 Non Configuration at tributes 349 Perl Scripts 360 Scripts 347 SNMP Adaptive CLI Editor 340 Adaptive CLI Script Lan guage Syntax 358 Additional Products 11 Administration Overview 15 Aging Policies Editor 32 Aging Policies Options 54 Alarm 367 Alarm Email 105 Alarms 100 Alarm State 102 Assigned User 103 Date Assigned 103 Date Closed 102 Date Opened 100 Email 105 Entity Type 100 In Equipment Detail 181 In Topology 219 Notification Instance 102 Service Effecting 101 Snap Panels 104 Suppression 170 Amigopod 27 API 367 Top 276 Attributes Extraction 351 Audit Trail 93 Audit Trail Screen 91 Audit Trail Snap Panels 94 Authentication 24 367 Authentication Editor 144 Authentication Portlet 143 Authentica
314. on your Linux machine 16 Overview Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager Linux Installation Best Practices How you install Linux has an impact on Dell OpenManage Network Manager s installation Here are some tested best practices e You can install Linux in its Desktop option or if you select Basic Server default choose additional packages XWindows Basic Core Gnome Desktop without Gnome utilities although we suspect any Gnome will work Tum off SE Linux in etc selinux config Change SELINUX disabled This typically requires a reboot e You must install compatibility library from installation media so it is compatible with installation compat libstdc 33 x86_64 3 2 3 69 e16 InstallMedia Also verify that etc hosts points to new name use the following command and you should see similar output qa rh6Test Desktop cat etc hosts 10 18 0 241rh6Test localrh6Test Added by NetworkManager 127 0 0 1localhost localdomainlocalhost 1 rh6Test localrh6Testlocalhost6 localdomain6localhost6 Upgrading on Linux The following are best practices for upgrading from a previous OpenManage Network Manager version on a Linux machine 1 Make sure Red Hat is not installed with a MySql database option or remove the Linux MySql first 2 Ensure you have installed the 32 bit Linux Libraries as described below 3 Verify your previous version s installation application server starts without excpetions 4 Back
315. ondition Error pattern Test Error type Error x Number of lines to check 100 Error Condition Error pattern Test2 Error type Warning x Number of lines to check 40 Add new error condition Click Add new error conditions to configure a condition at the bottom of this screen with the following fields Error Pattern Enter a regular expression for the error Error Type Select from the pick list of options Error Warning Ignore Number of lines to check Enter the number of lines of the script output to check for the pattern specified above after each command execution An error message is most likely to appear immediately right after the command is invoked Continue Pattern Like Error Conditions this screen lets you ya P Script Content Error Conditions enter conditions to which script execution can respond Continue Pattern The Continue Pattern editor operates like con eater A the Error Conditions editor but has slightly petal n G Send new line E different fields AO Continue Pattern lf you expect the device output of a script to prompt to continue you may add a Continue Pattern with a regular expression to parse Add new continue pattern Answer This field specifies the Answer to the Continue Pattern prompt Send New Line For some devices a single key response without a new line would be sufficient in such cases you may need to uncheck the
316. ons 31 Share a Resource 88 Use How To 12 Index 375 Use Containers 147 Use Traffic Flow Ana lyzer 294 I ICMP Monitor 267 IIS 29 Import Export 86 Installation and Startup 28 Installing Perl 32 Interfaces 180 Interfaces gt Details 180 Internet Information Servic es 29 Introducing ProScan 303 IP address changes 24 ISATAP 369 J Java 19 K Key 369 Key Features 9 Key Management 369 Key Metric Editor 289 Key Metrics Monitor 268 Key Portlets 99 L Labels 224 Level 1 Filters 210 Level 2 Filters 210 Level 3 Filters 210 License 12 License Viewer 62 Link Discovery 176 Location Editor 136 Location Manager Address 136 376 Index Parent location 136 Location updates 138 Locations Portlets 135 Locations Snap Panels 137 M Mail hosts 41 Managed Object 369 Managed Resource Groups 162 Managed Resources 66 Managed Resources Ex panded 173 Managed Resources Portlet 166 Managing Windows systems 29 Mandatory Fields 81 Map Context Portlets filtered 147 Map Context without Con tainers 152 mass deployments 237 Match Regex for each line 315 Mediation 45 369 Mediation Agent 369 MEG 369 Memory Footprint 28 Menu 103 Menu Bar 77 Menu Options 153 MEP 369 MIB 369 MIB Browser 188 Migrating heartbeats 253 Minimum hardware 16 Monitor Editor 251 Calculated Metrics 254 Conditions 260 Inventory Mappings 259 Monitor Options 254 Thresholds 256 Monitor Graph Background 259 Monitor Options Type Spe cif
317. ons Type Specific Panels 266 Scheduling Refresh Monitor Targets 276 Top Asset Monitors 0000 c cece cece eee cent nee e eens 276 Top Configuration Backups 277 Dashboard VieWS 0 c cece eee eee eee e ene e en eeenes 277 How to Create a Simple Dashboard View 279 Performance Dashboard 279 Dashboard Editor aaa 281 How to Create a Custom Dashboard View 282 Show Performance Templates 00cceeceeeeeeeaees 286 How to Create A Performance Template 286 Key Metric Editor 00 0 ccc cece eee eee eee e eae 289 9 Traffic Flow Analyzer c cece eee eee eee 293 How does it work 0 0 e cece cece eee eect nent ees 293 A ee hh ees O 294 How to Use Traffic Flow Analyzer 0 0000000 294 Exporter Registration 295 Traffic Flow Portlet 0 c ccc eee eee eee eee eee 295 DrilltDOWiN ec ft cee ca te ae a OA cue E 298 DE AIC isos er eh ea Masia AAA OS DO ha he ob oy 300 Traffic Flow Analyzer Example 0 0 000 eee eeeee eee 300 10 Change Management ProScan 0 0000 303 Introducing ProScan and Change Management 303 How to Use ProScan Change Management 303 How to Configure ProScan Groups 0 00eeeaeee 304 How to Do Change Management E
318. onthis report See Reports on page 200 for more about reporting capabilities 1 Last changec 35 PDT 20 location post 161 descripti The Change Determination Report report displays detected changes based on a configuration change flag set when OpenManage Network Manager detects a change made to the device To successfully execute this report you must enable a scheduled Change Determination Process The process must run before the reports has any contents To run the process go to the Schedules portlet and schedule that change determination process Reporting Limitations The Configuration Change Report only reports on incremental configuration changes discovered in the CD process Simply making changes to configurations and backing them up in OpenManage Network Manager does not ensure these appear in Configuration Change Reports They appear in reports only after running the CD process Compliance and Change Reporting Change Management ProScan The Configuration Change Report includes a Filter that you can alter at runtime By default the report filters on Type only If you want more filter criteria like device IB and or date ranges you must edit the Report filter To edit the filter in the Reports manager right click the Configuration Change Report and select Open then edit the filter in the Filter screen by selecting that node on the left Tip A recommended best practice is to execute the CD process as an oper
319. ord search depending on which of the links in the upper right corner of the screen is selected Select an Action to add to the Rule Action Juniper MPLS L2 ELAN LDP VPLS Backup Neigl M v Find Actions By most common keyword search Target 0 Event entity will be used as default target if no target is selected gt VPLS Name testVPLS Packet Switched Network PSN A endpoint of the transport tunnel on Remote Neighbor IP 10 10 20 10 the remote PE Backup Neighbor IP 10 10 20 11 Community Name Community Target Standby E f Apply Cancel The most common actions include those you have used most recently To search for actions either enter a keyword or click the search icon the magnifying glass to produce a pick list below the Action field Select an action by clicking on its appearance in that list Select the device target of the custom action by selecting from the Target pick list If you do not specify an explicit target Dell OpenManage Network Manager uses the default entity for the event as the target If you select an action with additional parameters those parameters appear in the screen below the Target field To see definitions for such parameters hover the cursor over the field and a tooltip describing the field appears Click Apply to accept your edits or Cancel to abandon them Email Action Variables The following are the Email Action variables you can use in customizing the
320. orner to see portlets so you can re arrange them Site Settings Configures page behavior look and feel See also Import Export on page 86 Show Versions See Show Versions on page 72 Go To Makes the selected screen type appear Select My Public Pages or My Private Pages for example When you add a new Community its configured pages appear in this menu too This also provides access to Control Panel see Control Panel on page 33 CAUTION Dell OpenManage Network Manager does not support multiple tab browsing as a reliable way to see its screens Pages overcome that limitation Administrators can permanently configure Public pages while users with fewer rights can only configure their Private pages Any page changes persist after you make them provided you have the rights to make changes on a page See Public Private Page Behavior on page 40 for the details User Name sign out Opens the Manage My Account screen where you can configure your name job title image e mail and so on The Sign out link lets you log out of Dell OpenManage Network Manager Toggle Full Screen The icon on the far right of this bar toggles its appearance disappearance so you can use more screen area for portlets if you need it This toggle also impacts the Menu Bar 74 The Dock Portal Conventions Status Bar Alerts The Status bar appears at the bottom of the portal On the left it catalogs messages and notifications you h
321. ort opens a screen that lets you select a locally accessible file to store view compare and deploy Tip You can see configuration files in the Latest Configurations portion of the Details screen for a device or in the Configuration Files or Top Configuration Backups portlets xX How To Backup Configurations Dell OpenManage Network Manager simplifies backing up devices so you always have their configuration files even if the one on the device becomes corrupted or out of date Tip You can back up several devices at once for what amounts to a group operation Select more than one device by Ctrl clicking in the expanded portlet then right click as outlined below You must expand portlets to multi select File Management File Server File Management 225 Here are the steps to back up a device 1 Make sure you have configured an FTP or TFTP server to handle the backup See Netrestore File Servers on page 69 2 Right click a device in the Managed Resources portlet 3 Select File Management gt Backup 4 Configure the subsequent Backup Device screen a BARR Uayies ATT Results Specify Backup Options File Name DefaultConfig Update user label Description Email Settings add email Add Equipment Add Groups Remove All Last Backup Results Last Backup Date Action cisco7206 1921681138 192 168 1 Ld Device Options Add Schedule Execute Save Close This screen lets you configure the following
322. ortal gt Users and Organizations user editor K NOTE Owner Roles do not have an Action button Owner implies something you have added or created and so actions do not apply Notice also that when you Assign Members a screen appears with tabs where you can assign Users Sites Organizations and User Roles Typical best practice is to assign users to one of these collective designations then assign the collection to a role Notice also that you can view both Current and Available members with those sub tabs You can even Search for members Click Back in the upper right corner or the View All tab to return to the screen listing roles and their Action buttons Portal gt Portal Settings The Settings screens are where users who are administrators can configure the most basic things about Dell OpenManage Network Manager These include the following e Mail hosts e Email notifications who sends them what the contents are for account creation notices or password change reset notices e Identification including address phone email and web sites e Display settings Google Apps login password ZN CAUTION Checking Allow Strangers to create accounts may produce a defective login screen Control Panel Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 41 42 Portal gt Other Some of the remaining portal labels permit the following Sites Configure sites Sites are a set of pages that display content a
323. orts Alarms and so on 3 Add the Container View portlet to that page 4 Click the container to filter by 5 Observe the other portlets to see resources assigned to the selected container for example customer or location Container View Resource Management 147 Container Editor This editor lets you create and manage containers You can also associate user authorizations with container models to specify which groups or users have access to contained items f PESA Container Fulseubenesinar e 1 FolsomContainer General Membership Authorizations Lab Container Details Name Owner FolsomContainer ame Synergy Admin Description Parent Access Private C Shared _gAdd Child Delete Child Close In this editor a tree panel on the left lets you build and navigate the container tree Click Add Child or Delete Child to create or remove a node to from the node you have selected in the tree Clicking a node in the tree displays the tabbed panel on the right where you can edit it The Container Details panel has the following tabs e General e Membership e Authorizations Click the labels at the top of the screen to access these K NOTE Alarm states are recalculated and propagated for containers like they are for Visualizations General This panel has the following fields Name The container identifier 148 Container View Resource Management Description
324. our configuration or Cancel to dismiss this screen without applying it STYLE OPTIONS This tab s options configure node and line appearance It displays the following when you click buttons in this panel Notice the fist two have Tooltips tabs in addition to the first one you see Node Style Options Configure how nodes appear in topology Labels Node View Tooltips Enable Node Labels O Show labels for problem Nodes only a Truncate Node label characters to 20 la Only a single label is displayed Move the desired attributes to the right box and adjust there priority If an attribute has no data then the next one with data is rendered as the label Available Attributes Attributes to Display IP Address Name Status Node Rendering Select the type of node rendering graphics style Icons Style 1 In the Label Node View tab you can elect to Enable Node Labels so labels appear next to icons in topology Select the attributes in the middle panel You can also elect to Show Labels for Problem Nodes Only and Truncate Node Label Characters and select the maximum number of characters Click to move attributes from Attributes to Display all appear by default to Available Attributes to conceal attributes you do not want displayed The Node Rendering pick list lets you select from several styles of icon that appear in topology These include two icon styles Style 1 the default and Style 2 colored C
325. owing Equipment eb JuniperJ2300 1 10 128 316 E Juniper Network eL Juniper s2300 10 128 3 16 10 128 3 16 M5 i O E suniperMS 10 128 3 15 10 128 3 15 Snap Panels X Close Authentication Snap Panel When you select a listed authentication the Reference Tree Snap Panel displays a tree of that authentication s connections to Discovery profiles and equipment Authentication Resource Management 145 Container Manager Container manager lets you create edit and delete Container tree models displayed in Ef Container Manager TOR Container Views described in the next a section Hame y Description Access Type The relationship to users and devices Top2 SHARED appears in Container Manager Expanded Tort SHARED Right click to select from a menu with New Edit and Delete and Refresh Members Selecting New or Edit displays the Container Editor described below Container Manager Expanded The expanded view displays the same information as the summary view but displays the selected container s authorized users creator owner and membership in the Reference Tree snap panel LE Container Manager Return to previous Root Containers y Advanced Search Refresh Settings JB Y Mame Description Access Type Owner Reference Tree i Folsom amp Folsom Lab 2 Authorized Users and Groups 146 Container Manager Resource Management Container View This
326. oyed eonooo ga Task Collection R Task Executes a task seq Public Undeployed Spawn Service Service Spawn Service Mem li Undeployed o0 Service Undeploy Service Service Undeploy Service li Undeployed 140 2 2 Reference Tree Execution History Scheduled Actions 8 Sync Allocations Ta Execution Date Status User ID Descriptior Target Count Scheduled Next Exe test 25 8ABA1 1 No data is available to display The expanded portlet also has snap panels to display Reference Tree connections between the selection and other elements within Dell OpenManage Network Manager as well as an Execution History panel listing Device Name s Execution Date and Status for the selected Action and a Scheduled Actions panel cataloging any Schedules for the selected Action Right click a Schedule to edit execute or delete it 336 Actions Portlet Actions and Adaptive CLI The Execution History snap panel displays history by device Right click to see the details of what occurred when the selected action ran against a particular device Execution Details The Execution Details panel displays tabs showing the Results of running an Adaptive CLI and the Sent Commands You can also View Job to see a screen like the Audit Trail Jobs Screen on page 91 or ADe Action acudan History ungane ejecutar ai o 247 dra e Execution Details Sent Commands Find 1 META INF 2 README service txt
327. p as the type to create displays a selector screen where you can EN Name and select a Category for Resource Group Parameters the group then search for f Eriu RESCUE DLU gi are Hame Category available resources with a filter a EA Optional Click Apply Filter after you have configured it and a list of Current resource members 288 le ena devices fitting its criteria Resource Name IP Address Vendor Common Type Action appears Select device s and RA Forces4810P_11 10 128 10 128 6 11 ES pen nc Switch click Add Selecte d or simply AN Forces60_09 10 128 6 9 10 128 6 9 ES Dei inc Switch click Add All to add the entire list to your static group Notice that you can continue to re use Group by None C vendor C Common Type this filter to list devices and continue to select them 4 When you select a device itno Sv O came longer appears listed When you click Done the subsequent screen displays all devices you have selected You can click Add on this screen to return to the previous screen or Remove All to delete the listed devices from the group At the bottom of this screen you can also elect to group devices by None Vendor or Common Type Switch Router and so on These last two create trees with nodes for each vendor or type You can also click the magnifying glass to search through listed devices Clicking Remove All removes all devices in the group Click Save to
328. pe is External then Target Type can be None otherwise it is not an option Export File Location This is a file name and path C mypath myfile where you elect to store the result of an adaptive CLI execution You may specify the variable SIPAddress in the filename for pattern substitution Overwrite on Export Check to overwrite the result file This overwrites any existing results file with new results if checked If it is unchecked the new results appends to the file Is Batch Execution Enabled Check to allow consolidation of related Adaptive CLI scripts provided the associated device driver supports such consolidation when provisioning a service Batching is valuable for instances like the following if an Adaptive CLI provisioned service has 10 sub services OpenManage Network Manager runs commands for the first service then if it s successful commits and logs off Then OpenManage Network Manager repeats this procedure nine times more logging on committing and logging off for each command If batching is turned on then OpenManage Network Manager sends the 10 Adaptive CLIs to the device as a single unit before committing and logging off This logic does not apply if you are running a procedure against 10 devices Batching is best practice since if one line of a command fails the device rolls back the entire block of commands Cisco devices typically skip and do not commit failing lines Actions Portlet Actions and
329. pes besides String then you must switch to Perl For example Boolean myF lag equals True if S myFlag Integer myInt greater than zero Example if myInt gt 0 To check whether a string is a particular value like from a valid values list entry assigned to the String attribute then you must also use Perl The CLI format only can test if the String exists It cannot validate its value when populated For example EncapsulationType VLAN CCC VLAN TCC You can not do this check with the CLI Format IF EncapsulationType VLAN TCC Instead use a Perl script with a statement like this If SEncapsulationType eq VLAN TCC 334 Introducing Actions and Adaptive CLI Actions and Adaptive CLI print set encapsulation EncapsulationType n If any attributes in your script are a List Collection the only way to loop through the list s items during the Adaptive CLI execution is to use Perl For example Processing a List of Strings Scount 0 foreach MyCommandList print Scount Actions Portlet The Actions Portlet lets you manage actions like Adaptive CLI backups change management actions and so on The list of actions available to your system depends on the exact configuration you have installed This portlet is the primary access point for Adaptive CLI editing The summary portlet displays columns with the Name Family and Target Entity Type
330. pick list A Z Endpoint Resource Select a resource for the A or Z endpoint A Z Endpoint Address The IP address if available for the endpoint Click Save to preserve your edits or Close to abandon them 182 Equipment Details Resource Management Ports gt Details You can right click to Share port information or to open a Details screen for the selected port This includes the device s Reference Tree so you can see this port in relation to other parts of the device It also includes a Details panel that can include the following fields Hardware Version The port s hardware version Port Description A text description of the port Model A model number Date created When the port was discovered Creator The logged in user who discovered it Port Type The port s type T1 Fast Ethernet and so on Encapsulation The port s encapsulation Subnet Mask The port s subnet mask Install Date The port s installation date In Use An indicator use IF Index The SNMP MIB designation for the port Container Index The SNMP MIB designation for the port s container Slot Number The port s slot number Speed The port s speed MTU The port s MTU Port Icon The port s configured icon Learned MAC Addr The port s learned MAC address Count The port s count CLI Name The port s command line interface name Notes Any notes recorded about the port Operation Type
331. pics graphed include Available Not Available No Data and Not Applicable Right click a listed monitor to do the following not all menu items appear for all types of monitors New Monitor Lets you either create a new monitor of the type you select in the sub menu or edits the monitor selected in the portlet See Monitor Editor on page 251 for details New from Template Opens the Monitor Editor where you can configure the equipment targets for template monitors selected in the sub menu These templates already have selected attributes and calculations You can examine exactly what these are in the editor that appears when you select one Edit Monitor Opens the Monitor Editor where you can modify the selected monitor Resource Monitors Monitoring 245 246 Details Opens a Detail panel with a reference tree status summary and general information about the selected monitor E Equipment Details System Return to previous fi Default ICMP Monitor Reference Tree Monitor Status Summary Details BD SDO eae ra Targety Last Polled Availability Mame Dotok ICMP Menton PEARSA Default monitor to collect ping Router y 8 8 11 10 41 AM o escription response times for all devices Router y 8 8 11 10 41 AM o Enabled Enabled Polling Interval Value 5 Router 8 8 11 10 41 AM o Polling Interval Units Minutes Router 1 6 8 11 10 41 AM e Pe Emit Availability 9 Not Emt Availabilty diniperW SONION AM o
332. plays all the port s settings that have been retrieved including a Reference Tree of logical interfaces below the port a Learned MAC Address panel Alarms related to the port and other Details fi DSX16 1 Router 192 168 1 138 PA Slot 6 Channelized T1 PRI no CSU 81 Reference Tree Alarms Learned MAC Address 2 FastEthernet4 0 Date Opened Entity Hame Device IP Hardware Version FF FastEthernet4 0 10 Bort Description FF FastEthernet4 0 11 Model FF FastEthernet4 0 21 Date created Fri Sep 10 10 29 14 PDT 2010 No data is available to display Creator Cisco Device Driver Learned MAC Address Port Type Fast Ethernet Port Learned MAC Addr Last Observed Encapsulation 802 10 Virtual LAN TT Subnet Mask 255 255 255 240 Install Date Not Available Max items returned 25 7 InUee ntn usa No data is available to display If Index 6 Container Index 0 Slot Humber 4 Speed 100000000 MTU 1500 Port Icon B Learned MAC Addr a Count CLI Name FastEthernet4 0 Hotes Operation Type Routed Switch Mode Not Applicable Duplex Half Name FastEthernet4 0 Port Humber 0 Equipment Hame Router 10 128 2 135 Operational State Down IP Address 10 60 1 2 MAC Address 003076542070 Administrative State Down In Details fields describing the following for the selected port Hardware Version Port Description Model Date Created typically this is the date discovered Creator Port Type Encapsulation Subnet M
333. ple within your system that you are following Click the Find People link to see a list of potential contacts within your system You must click Action gt Follow to see them listed in the Contacts Home Use the Action button to explore other possibilities The contact has to approve you in their requests To Follow means you want to receive the followed person s activity stream blog postings and so on Friending means your friends can see your activity and you can see theirs They have to accept any Friend request Tip You can export vCards for all contacts in the system to use with other software that uses contacts For example e mail clients 34 Control Panel Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager RCSynergy Domain RCSynergy appears as a default domain name in Control Panel Global and My Login s Site configurations appear as additional items to configure when you click the down arrow to the right of RCSynergy The items under this label configure the overall look and feel of the portal reference information and so on See the tooltips for more complete descriptions This also configures pages documents calendars blogs wikis polls and so on Social equity lets you alter measurements for user participation in organizations Equity values determine the reward value of an action equity lifespans determine when to age the reward of action Portal gt Users and Organizations Create organizations
334. pter 5 Visualize for more Actions Select from a sub menu of actions available for the group Adaptive CLI Select from a sub menu of Adaptive CLI Change Management Elect to run Change Determination process or any Proscan policies associated with the group See Chapter 9 Change Management ProScan for an explanation of these If you want to execute a ProScan policy not already associated with this group then select Execute Proscan Policy A selection screen appears where you can select a policy and either execute or schedule it Managed Resource Groups Resource Management File Management gt Backup Restore Deploy Lets you call on Dell OpenManage Network Manager s NetConfig configuration file backup restore and deploy capabilities See Backup Configurations on page 225 for an example of the steps this follows See also File Management on page 223 and more about deploying updates to the OS for the selected resource group See Deploy Firmware on page 238 for details BAAO m TS Results Specify Backup Options File Name DefaultConfig Update user label Description Email Settings add email Select Targets for Backup Add Equipment Add Groups Remove All Name Last Backup Results Last Backup Date Action E Ug Storage Group Device Options Aruba0S Brocade RX Series Device Driver Dell Force10 Dell PowerConnect Device Driver JUHOS Configuration running contig fia E Add
335. r expression or optionally the generated configlet from File Management NetConfig for matching Group results must be separated by device like Adaptive CLI Manager When ProScan policies run the application emits notifications whose contents depend on whether compliance was or was not maintained Tip Your system may have several ProScan examples You can use these as provided or alter them to suit your network C X How To Use ProScan Change Management The following outlines common use cases for this software and the steps to achieve the goals of each case Goal Verify configurations are compliant on a scheduled recurring basis 1 Create ProScan policy ies based on what indicates compliance Right click New gt Policy in the ProScan portlet 2 Specify the Name and Input source based on Device Backup Current Config Configuration Label By Date and Adaptive CLI Results Introducing ProScan and Change Management Change Management ProScan 303 NY A WN A Add Targets gt Filter Option available for selecting Equipment Group Tip The advantage of selecting dynamic device groups is that newly discovered devices of the selected type are automatically members of the group so they are scanned too A benign warning No proscan policies have target group s lets you know you have not selected either dynamic or static groups when you execute a ProScan policy without them Specify Proscan Compliance Criteria
336. r information about supported devices and operating systems Windows Management Interface The Windows Management driver currently supports any Windows based operating system that supports the Windows Management Interface WMI Windows Management is always installed on the following operating systems or later e Windows XP Professional with a browser other than Internet Explorer 24 Sizing for Standalone Installations Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager e Windows 2003 All Editions e Windows Vista The login credentials must be for an administrator on the installation host for complete functionality Both this and NET installation are requirements for any installation managing devices supported by this driver This driver supports global group operations K NOTE Discovery may display benign retry warning messages in the application server shell or log You can safely ignore these Prerequisites Before installing this software to manage other computers with a Windows Management Interface driver assuming you are installing that driver if you do not already have it installed you must download and install the Microsoft Net framework version 3 0 or later on the application server For complete functionality the WMI login for this software must be a login for a domain user who also belongs to the administrator group on the WMI device Both are requirements for any installation managing WMI devices
337. raffic Flow Analyzer 295 296 When you add one of the traffic analyzer portlets to a page its summary or minimized form appears This displays a simple view containing a pie chart and a table showing the summarized collected data over the configured time period The only thing that can be changed in this view is the period Change this by clicking the clock dropdown button in the upper right corner of the portlet y Traffic Flow Applications Top 5 Applications Bytes Last Hour Name MM ss C O ADOBE SERVER 2 MM http protocot over nSSSL O DO ttrian E sw Packets 06442 4639 979 9591 20309 The Expanded Traffic Flow Portlet displays an interactive graph You can also Drill Down to details about components within this portlet by clicking on one of the links in the table below the graph Traffic Flow Portlet Traffic Flow Analyzer Expanded Traffic Flow Portlet When you expand the portlet a more complex interactive view appears Initially it displays a line graph for the selected period Top 5 Applications Bytes A All Exporters Top 5 Applications Y Byte m a Last Hour 4 500 0 08 50 09 00 09 10 09 20 09 30 Mame Bytes Packets Bito Sec MH Syslog 8MB 86153 20252 O anosr server 2 4wa 15519 11517 mM http protocol over TLS SSL 3MB 4581 7637 O O pran 2M8 8636 6320 El sump 2MB 9400 5333 K NOTE lt may seem a device reporting the same value as others is not graphed properly but mousi
338. rafficAnalyzerAlarms 1 3 6 1 4 1 3477 1 7 20 10 taExporterUnregistered TrafficAnalyzerAlarms 1 3 6 1 4 1 3477 1 7 2012 Filter Conditions Clear Filter E Severity Y 3 Warning y Lo N device ip x 192 168 1 45 l Previous gt Next Cancel Click Add Filter to further filter the selected events See Filter Expanded Portlet Displays on page 85 for more about this feature After you Add Filter the button changes to Clear Filter so you can remove any filter from the event tule Tip Dell OpenManage Network Manager supports multiple IP addresses per resource During event processing filters that include IP address criteria may behave incorrectly when Dell OpenManage Network Manager evaluates the filter Best practice is using resource name s instead of IP addresses The following are processing rule types and a description of their properties Event Processing Rules Key Portlets Pre Processing These rules either override the event definition change the behavior of an event or generate another event The following are the different subtypes These are also called Correlation rules See the descriptions below for additional information about the available types Post Processing Also called Automation rules these execute specified actions for the rule after the event processing occurs The following are Pre Processing Correlation rule subtypes Device Access The
339. rch case sensitive or RegEx to use regular expressions to search Click the Find button to locate text in the config file Click Replace to replace found text once it is located Check the All checkbox and click Replace to bulk replace all instances of the Find text Click Save to preserve your edits or Close to abandon them Notice that the edited configuration appears listed with the other Configuration Files in the portlet as a different version than the original the version increments by one every time you edit and save a configuration File Management File Server File Management 231 232 File Management File Server File Management Image Repository The Image repository Manages firmware ie isis updates to deploy to devices in your A PARIA network or configurations you want to ARA deploy to several devices Hamey Version Type Device Class You must add such files to your Dell WE Powercomnect_60 20 019 Firmware Dell PowerConnect OpenManage Network Manager system a PowerConnect_34 2 0 0 31 Firmware Dell PowerConnect a PowerConnect_53 2 01 3 Firmware Dell PowerConnect before you can deploy them The summary Ea ll PowerConnect54x 2 0 0 41 Firmware Dell PowerConnect screen listing these images displays their A 7 e EE ll Powerconnect35x 2 0 0 40 Firmware Dell PowerConnect Name Description File Name Image lype fq Pcm8024v3 1312 31 312 Firmware Dell PowerConnect and Inst
340. re Test SNMP Interface Report Select a source in the Source tab Here Active Monitoring gt SNMP Interfaces Notice that the Select your inventory columns panel displays the attributes available based on your monitor selection Select Available columns and click the right arrow to move them to Selected In this case we select SNMP Interfaces Monitor Target Polled Date Time if nErrors Arrange the columns and fonts as you like in the Layout tab Save the template Right click and select New in the Reports portlet Enter a Name and Title for the report Notice that since this is the first report created since you made the Test SNMP Interface Report template that it is the Report Template already selected Since the monitor already filters devices we add no filter in the Report although you could add one to further filter the monitored devices Test SNMP Interface Report should appear in the Reports portlet Right click and select Execute noticing that you can also schedule such reports even repeatedly Resource Monitors Monitoring 265 14 Click the magnifying glass to the right of the Report Completed message in My Alerts to see 15 Hover your cursor over the lower right corner of the report to see a set of icons that let you expand zoom out and in save Monitor Options Type Specific Panels the report B Copan pouei Jasi MPA te nace Reporta PO Sep 2p deo eo PDT eu DO agunt Created By admin Filter
341. re devices The Adaptive CLI manager displays a list of Configure and Show commands the Command Type with a Name Description and the Last Run Date You can filter what appears in this manager with the fields at its top K NOTE The contents of the Action Portlet vary depending on the various options you have installed Introducing Actions and Adaptive CLI Actions and Adaptive CLI 333 Using Adaptive CLI You can quickly take a set of commands or configuration file snippet from a device copy it directly into the Script editor mark it up and save it as a working CLI When using the CLI Format The Adaptive CLI tool will prompt you to create new attributes based upon your script markup This lets you quickly create a script and schema to create an ACLI If you have attributes that are mainly simple String attributes this is a very quick and automated approach Using Perl in Adaptive CLI If you need conditional logic that goes beyond simple scripting you can use Perl in Adaptive CLI The example below checks to see if a String Attribute is empty null or not If the String attribute ShowCmdString has content the show command with ShowCmdString as a parameter goes to the device Otherwise the Perl script skips or excludes this statement Embedded CLI Example IF ShowCmdString Show ShowCmdString ENDIF ShowCmdString You could use the CLI format for the above example but if you need to check attributes of other ty
342. received message is rejected Suppress The message is tracked in Event History and then ignored Alarm The message is tracked in Event History and then processed with Correlated events and Event Processing Rules of any type other than Syslog Set Severity Set the alarm severity for the selected event MIB This lets you upload a new MIB to your event definitions You can also configure an Aging Policy and View events as PDF in this menu See Redcell gt Database Aging Policies DAP on page 50 and View as PDF on page 90 for more about those options Event Definition Editor This editor lets you modify event definitions in the following tabs e General e Message Template e Correlations Click Save to preserve any modifications you have made or Cancel to abandon them 128 Event Definitions Key Portlets General This tab manages basics for Event Definitions MESA Event Definition if BeapuveciiRunodececetouniceuon y ED Message Template Correlations Extensions General Properties Event Name MIB Hame adaptiveCLiRunSuccessNotification AdaptiveCLi MIB Notification OID Default Behavior 1 3 6 1 4 1 3477 31 22 Alarm Severity Propagation 0 Cleared xl Default Advisory Text lad Save Cancel It has the following fields Event Name A text identifier for the event Notification OID The object ID Severity The severity of any associated alarm If a new alarm is a clearing s
343. redcellEquipmentResynchNotification Result Success Share Asset Cancel In the subsequent screen select a user with whom you want to share type any message you want to include and click Share Asset The chat message to the selected user includes your text and a link that opens to display the Snap Panels for the selected item Cancel aborts sharing 88 Common Menu Items Portal Conventions Edit Custom Attributes In several right click menus Managed Equipment Port Contact Vendor or Location the Edit Custom Attributes menu item lets you open the custom attribute editor appropriate for the device type listed in the portlet See Redcell gt Data Configuration on page 45 for another way to get to this editor Avision Ainura setos Attribute Definitions Enabled y Hame Type ToolTip Custom10 Date Custom11 Boolean Custom12 Boolean Custom13 Boolean Custom14 Date Custom15 Date Tit Customs Date Kk 2 gt n Vv Test Attribute This is a test la Save Q Cancel Selecting a row in the editor lets you edit rows describing custom fields directly The following are the custom attribute properties you can alter Enabled Check Enabled to activate the selected custom field Label This is a label for the tooltip identified in the Name The Label is what you see in the portlets appropriate for the entity type you have selected The Type column in the attribute describes
344. repository Online Ve Check to mark repository in online state SY Apply Cancel When you Add Repository or Edit an existing one the following fields appear in the editor Repository Name An identifier for the archiving destination Description A text comment Virtual Path This is the path relative to the installation root directory Any user with administrator permissions can specify or change the default archive path here Online Check this to put this repository online Dell OpenManage Network Manager automatically writes to any configured failover repository if the primary repository is full or not writable Tip To view any archived DAP file use dapviewer Type oware in a command shell then after pressing Enter type dapviewer to use this utility Portlet Level Permissions You can also provide permission for a user group role organization on a defined portlet 58 Redcell gt Database Aging Policies DAP Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager xX How To Configure Portlet Permissions 1 As an admin user click on the Configuration icon the wrench in the top right comer of the portlet of interest Click on the Configuration and go to the Permissions tab in the next screen aad Configuration Uncheck the View permission for Guest and Community members Make sure Owner and PowerUser still have View permissions y Common Setup Tasks Configuration x Role Add to Pag
345. rical Reports based on number of instances days and weeks months or years Set these thresholds in the Options tab All DAPs require a Name and a record threshold Check the Enabled checkbox to enable the policy DAPs run on a schedule If the record threshold number is greater than or equal to the configured threshold then the DAP runs at the scheduled time You may also manually click the gear icon to the right of a listed policy and execute a DAP at any time to check that threshold figure In either case if the threshold is not crossed Dell OpenManage Network Manager creates no archives To verify when current DAPs are scheduled to run open the Schedules portlet and select the schedule on which it runs For most DAPs this is the Daily recommended DAP Right click to edit it The Scheduled Aging Policies list should include all DAPs that have selected that schedule Redcell gt Database Aging Policies DAP Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 53 54 Aging Policies Options The Options tab in this editor can vary depending on the type of policy a Editing Event History Records Aging Policy General Keep Events for this many days 30 Archive Events B Apply Cancel Typical fields can include the following Keep Aged Item for this many days The number of days to keep the aged item before archiving it Archive Aged Item Check this to activated archiving according to this policy R
346. riptions view the contents of the RedcellMonitor MIB in owareapps performance mibs Resource Monitors Monitoring 257 258 Apply to Series Check to enable on composite attributes only Checking this applies the threshold to individual elements within the series When it is unchecked the threshold applies only to aggregate measurements the overall value of the series not individual elements within the series For example a Key Metric monitor for CPU utilization on a device with two CPUs actually monitors both CPUs When unchecked the threshold applies to the average of both CPUs when checked the threshold applies to each individual CPU Tip When you check this you can also apply thresholds to regular expressions This is useful to monitor components within components for example cores within a CPU Click Apply to preserve your edits or Cancel to abandon them The threshold interval editor pops up when you select the Add button or the Edit icon to the right of a threshold s row in the threshold attribute editor Editing Threshold Information for Attribute Packets Out Errors Configured Threshold Intervals Add Name Lower Upper Color Severity Matching String Action CriticalThreshold 200 0 ma A Critical Laila MajorThreshold 50 0 200 0 mM A Major LA Ls WarnThreshold 25 0 50 0 CE A Warning L L InfoThreshold 0 0 25 0 El informational 1214 Editing Threshold Interval Hame CriticalThreshold Lower Boundary
347. rk Manager by putting the updated license file in a convenient directory Then click License Management in the Quick Navigation portlet item to open a screen with a button leading to a file browser Register License Select File Locate the license file and click the Register License button Your updated license should be visible in the License Viewer See License Viewer on page 62 for details K NOTE If you update your installation from a previous one where you upgraded license you must also re register those licenses You must restart application server or wait up to 15 minutes before a license modification takes effect see Installation and Startup on page 28 Licenses now support three expiration formats Never Date certain and a format that indicates the license will be valid for a number of days after registration Online Help Filter Access general online help by clicking Help in the The Dock at the top of the screen Help appropriate to each portlet appears when you click question mark icon on the portlet title bar By default this opens a separate browser window which is not necessarily always in front of the screen that calls it Because it is separate you can arrange the display so the help screen does not conceal the portlet it describes Click the Show button to display the contents index and search tabs Hide conceals them again and the Prev Next buttons or clicking table of contents topics moves to different
348. rk for con trolling Quality of Service and Access to network resources Policy can be extended to per form other configuration functions including routing behavior VLAN membership and VPN security POLICY ENFORCEMENT POINTS PEP In a policy enforced network a policy enforcement point represents a security appliance used to protect one or more endpoints PEPs are also points for monitoring the health and status of a network PEPs are generally members of a policy group DELL CONFIDENTIAL PRELIMINARY 4 6 12 FOR PROOF ONLY Template Last Updated 7 01 2005 Glossary 369 370 POLICY ROUTING Routing scheme that forwards packets to specific interfaces based on user configured policies Such policies might specify that traffic sent from a particular net work should be routed through interface while all other traffic should be routed through another interface PoLicY RuLEs In a policy enforced network PEN policy rules determine how the mem bers and endpoint groups of a policy group communicate PPTP POINT TO POINT TUNNELING PROTOCOL Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP is a network protocol that enables the secure transfer of data from a remote client to a pri vate enterprise server by creating a virtual private network VPN across TCP IP based data networks PPTP supports on demand multi protocol virtual private networking over public networks such as the Internet PRIVATE Key In cryp
349. rmance and data storage impact For example retaining day s information from an active performance SNMP monitor configured with one target s worth of data retrieved on one minute intervals can consume 0 7 G of database and require 21 inserts per second Traffic flow analysis can process and retain even larger amounts of information Flows that correlate 50 polled every minute for a day require roughly 109G of database and require 4500 inserts per second Active Monitor Members Select from Available Monitors on the left and click arrows to move the desired monitor s to the Selected Monitors on the right 250 Resource Monitors Monitoring Click Save to preserve your edits and include the monitor as listed among existing Retention Policies or click Cancel to abandon any changes Monitor Editor This editor lets you fine tune the monitor you selected and right clicked to open the editor It includes the following panels and fields e General e Monitor Options e Calculated Metrics e Thresholds e Inventory Mappings e Conditions General The General panel is common to all different monitor types EENG ONEA AN EE ies dolio EN Monitor Options Calculated Metrics Thresholds Inventory Mappings Conditions General Monitor Options Name Default Interface Monitor Emit Availability Events default false Retain Polled Data O default true Update Network Status v default false D
350. rn to previous in the upper right corner of the Was Loopback interfaces expanded portlet to return to the page where you started with S leap u loopback454 the smaller portlet If the page you are on has a breadcrumb eu trail of intervening detail pages for example you can click an jan Tunnel Interfaces intervening page s breadcrumb if you do not want to return to JEE VLAN interfaces the previous screen AA Poos o B This Equipment has these Authentication s o y Monitor Status 2 xX How To Filter Expanded Portlet Displays Among other places filters appear at the top of expanded portlets Many pre installed filters come from drivers your installed package Filters match entity types but may not necessarily be sensible in the context of a particular portlet You can pick from already configured filters with the drop down on the left or you can click Advanced Filter to create one of your own Default Resource Profile Filter x X Advanced Filter Search Refresh Settings JB Y A HA A H EEE oe S ES z After you click the green plus select and or or on the left to combine more than one filter Click Apply Filter to see the list after the filter acts on it Click Reset to return the list to its original state Click Save As to preserve a filter you have configured for future use The pick list in the upper left corner of this filter panel is where you would
351. roScan policy as it executes Tip If you have more than one type of device you must typically have more than one ProScan policy to address each device type To run more than one ProScan so you can address multiple types of devices create a ProScan group See Creating or Modifying ProScan Policy Groups on page 325 General This tab has the following fields General Properties Name A unique identifier for the policy editable only when you click New not on existing policies 310 ProScan Portlet Change Management ProScan Enabled Check to enable this policy Description A text description of the policy This also appears when the policy is listed in the manager Input Source Use the radio buttons to select a source Select from among the following options Device Backup Retrieve the configuration from the device and scan it for compliance Current Config The scan the current configuration backed up from the device Configuration Label Select the configuration to run against based on a label This software automatically updates the Current label so it points to the most recently backed up configuration files By date When you click this radio button you can then select a configuration file backed up that precedes a specified date most closely in a selector that appears below the radio button K NOTE You can scan even historic configurations for compliance with the Based on date field There
352. roximate or Deterministic 216 Visualize My Network Visualize Even angle distribution Enable even angle distribution of nodes Cluster Policy Select Vertical or Horizontal This determines the automated orientation of the topology Remember you can click and drag device icons Cluster Spacing Use the slider to determine the spacing between icons not in child parent hierarchy Orthogonal Orthogonal connections include right angles You can specify the following settings for such layouts aaa e Minimal nodes spacing Use the slider to configure the node spacing Use pseudo orthogonal edges Enable pseudo orthogonal edges that have non right angles Cluster Policy Select Vertical or Horizontal This determines the automated orientation of the topology Remember you can click and drag device icons Cluster Spacing Use the slider to determine the spacing between icons not in child parent hierarchy Radial Radial layouts arrange nodes in concentric rings Minimal concentric rings radius Use the slider to determine the concentric ring spacing Minimal nodes spacing Use the slider to determine the nodes spacing Angular sector 0 Use the slider to determine the arc where child nodes appear Overlap avoidance method Select Approximate or Deterministic Root node selection policy Select Most weighted for general graphs Manual for general graphs or Directed only for tree graphs
353. rt see Report Templates on page 195 for more about them Filter This screen configures a filter to retrieve devices that are the source of the report General Filter Click Add Filter in the filter 99009 em mMer panel to select an existing filter create a new filter or ore copy an existing filter When you create a new filter you LAGNO weve port Gy Creating New Report General Filter General Settings Hame TestReport Title This report is atest Subtitle and only a test Report Template Access Point Report gt l kal Save x Close Entity Type Managed Equipment Shared IV Allow filter to be shared by all users must enter a Name and optionally a Description for it select an Entity Type with the green plus and elect whether this filter is o available to other users Shared See How to Filter Expanded Portlet Displays on page 85 for and y E Equipment Name led Save Cancel y contains Y Test instructions about configuring the filter itself in the lower portion of this screen Reports Resource Management 205 Once you have configured or selected a filter the fema o Filter panel displays its characteristics in tree form Click Edit to re open the editor or Del to remove coo GU the filter Filters Z fat vet r4 e 2 Match All of the following Y N OTE Model does not begin with E le Sys
354. rted or not K NOTE You can also select devices then change the OS selection so a potential mismatch will occur This will likely trigger rejection of the deployment by the device but is not a recommended experiment Device Options The appearance of the Device Options panel at the bottom of this screen depends on the device selected in the Targets panel These vendor specific fields let you fine tune the deployment 4 Click one of the buttons at the bottom of the screen to initiate the next backup action Add Schedule opens the scheduling screen to let you automate the backup you have configured on a specified date time or repetition See Schedule Actions on page 186 Execute performs the backup immediately The Results tab in this screen opens displaying the message traffic between Dell OpenManage Network Manager and the device s See Audit Trail Portlet on page 93 Save preserves this configuration without scheduling or executing it Close closes this screen without saving the configured backup Deploy Firmware File Management 239 240 G Deploy Configuration 7 Deploy Options Results Deploy Configuration When you deploy a configuration a screen appears to configure how that occurs Selected Firmware Image Firmware Image Description Version Generate and Save Configuration Only Label for Configuration TestConfig This is atest 2 r Select Targets For Deployment Add Equipme
355. rts with lots of data may take a long time to appear without much indication that Messages you are eyersizing they are in process This is an artifact of the Acrobat plug in and outside the scope of Dell OpenManage Network Manager to influence Acrobat also produces an error if a report has too much data to display meaningfully Execute Report Advanced Also lets you schedule reports Aging Policy If you automate report generation you may also want to configure a Database Aging Policy to insure the volume of reports does not overwhelm your storage capacity See Redcell gt Database Aging Policies DAP on page 50 for more about doing that Delete Removes the selected report from the list display Delete History Removes the selected report s history To change reports appearance and contents you must configure their Report Templates Also see Branding Reports on page 206 for instructions about changing the default report logo When you View or Execute Report Advanced by right clicking either a listed report or a historical instance of that report a configuration screen appears that lets you select several parameters Report an o views Execute Report Report Email Export Type POF hal Overwrite Existing mj Save O Notify O Email Address a test test com zje Export Directory Go ch ae Add Schedule id Execute Reports Resource Management 201 202 These include the followi
356. run OpenManage Network Manager s change determination process it reviews the flag setting in the database and backs up a managed device if the flag indicates a change This backup updates the OpenManage Network Manager system label Current which is then compared to the OpenManage Network Manager system Change Determination label OpenManage Network Manager then writes the differences between the two labelled configurations to its database where it is available for reporting purposes 5 Once this occurs the Change Determination label moves to point to the same configuration which is reflected by the Current label Compliance and Change Reporting Change Management ProScan 331 6 The report which can run to display these changes is OpenManage Network Manager s Configuration Change Report It displays the name of the device in question the IP address date time of change who made the change what was removed and what was added You can schedule this report to run immediately after an Change Determination process too so you can capture a history of changes 332 Compliance and Change Reporting Change Management ProScan Actions and Adaptive CLI Introducing Actions and Adaptive CLI The Actions Manager lets you manage actions like enabling monitors file backups resyncs and so on These actions are typically limited in scope and not that complex On the other hand it also manages Adaptive CLI command line interface commands to
357. run against devices which can be complex These commands amount to mini scripts to query and configure those devices In it you can create commands to run against devices after the device driver has opened a connection to the devices The driver handles logins and general connection management You can even initiate these actions with the application s optional group operations although if you delete a target group the operation will not work Many drivers seed pre configured command that appear listed when you first open this manager For a brief overview of creating and using these see How to Create Adaptive CLI Example on page 361 Adaptive CLI s Attributes capabilities let you insert variables in scripts See Attributes on page 342 for the details You can also assemble configurations made here as component Tasks to execute with other component Tasks You can even use this capability to include Perls scripts within OpenManage Network Manager See Perl Scripts on page 360 Tip You can have Actions maintain lists like ACLs and when these change in the Adaptive CLI script push the updated list out to the appropriate devices Adaptive CLI commands let you map several vendor specific commands to a single action so you could for example query two types of devices throughout the network for their MAC addresses with a single action Adaptive CLI actions can also help you debug more complex scripts that either query or configu
358. ry Reference and String The following fields appear for each of these types omitting redundant fields K NOTE Configure the data type of an attribute before you save a task After attributes are in Scripts you cannot change the data type Boolean Default Value Check for True Coded Value Default Coded Value Enter the default coded value If an attribute a Coded Value then enter valid values in the format of NUMBER Display Label For example 10 Hello World 20 Hello Moon Without this pattern a validation error appears Coded values become a Drop Down Combo Selection at runtime containing the Display labels within it like Hello World Hello Moon Selecting one gives the script the numeric value If users select Hello World the value the script gets is 10 The default appears by default in this list of alternatives Enter any other alternatives below this field in the Valid Values Valid Values Enter a valid value in the line above the table of valid values then click the green to add the value entered to the list Click the Remove icon the red to delete a selected value These must be formatted like the Default Coded Value 344 Actions Portlet Actions and Adaptive CLI Date Default Value Fnter a default date or use date icon to display a calendar where you can select one Click off the calendar to make it disappear Valid Values Enter valid date values above the list and click the green plus t
359. s The following are some key features of Dell OpenManage Network Manager Customizable and Flexible Web Portal You can customize the web portal even providing custom designed views of your data assigned to individual users You can even create web portal accounts for departments geographic areas or other criteria Why Dell OpenManage Network Manager Preface 9 10 Automate and Schedule Device Discovery Device discovery populates Dell OpenManage Network Manager s database and begins network analysis You can also create network discovery schedules to automatically run Discovery whenever you need them Dell OpenManage Network Manager Administration You can now conduct administrative tasks adding devices user accounts and web portal displays from a secure console on your network Open Integration Dell OpenManage Network Manager supports industry standards It comes with an open source MySQL database and supports using Oracle databases It also uses industry standard MIBs and protocols and even lets you install open source screen elements like Google gadgets to the web portal Topology The OpenManage Network Manager topology screen lets you create multi layered fully customizable web based maps of your network to track devices wherever they are in your network Alarms You can configure custom alarms to respond to hundreds of possible network scenarios including multiple condition checks Dell Ope
360. s Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager The Filters by Location Vendor or Device Type let you narrow the list of devices discovered by the selected item s As the screen says this filtering will not have any impact on the processing that occurs during the Inspection step Network 5 After you click Next the Network screen appears Network Type and Addresses Select the type of entry in the pick list IP Address es CIDR Address Hostname SNMP Broadcast Subnet Tip You can specify an IP Address range by separating the beginning and end with a dash For example 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 240 The tooltips in the data entry field describe what valid entries look like 6 Authentication You can Create new or Choose existing authentications See Discovery Profiles on page 153 for details Notice that authentications appear with Edit Delete icons and Up Down arrows on their right The Edit icon opens the authentication editor Click the arrows to arrange the order in which credentials are tried top first Ordering only applies when two credentials are of the same type Actions 7 You can configure Actions to run as part of discovery By default the actions screen includes the Resync action Use Add Action to select others to enter here You can also edit parameters if available delete and re order the actions listed here by clicking the icons to the right of them Dell OpenManage Network Manager exec
361. s for example Alarms portlet s the charting options or the Top N portlets number of Top Items These persist too Tip Max Items Max Items Per Page and Columns persist for both the summary and maximized portlets independently For example If Max Items is 50 in minimized mode it does not affect the Max Items in the Maximized window state This lets you configure modes independently Dell OpenManage Network Manager remembers the default sort column and order per user whether the user has Admin rights or not The Sort Column Order Descending Ascending is also shared between both summary and maximized portlets A sort on IP Address in Resources persists if you expand the summary portlet to maximized mode xX How To Add and Configure User Roles Permissions Add and configure User Roles with the following steps 1 Click Go to gt Control Panel and navigate to Portal gt Roles 2 Click the Add tab under the heading at the top of the page and select Regular Roles Notice that you can also add roles that configure permissions for sites and organizations Enter the details of the new role Name Title Description then Save it 4 Click Portal gt Roles View All button to see a list of available roles including the one you added 5 By clicking the Action icon to the right of any listed Role you can also select the role s permissions to alter web portal access in a subsequent screen 6 Click Add to add permissions Click
362. s C7 1 00 Inbound ICMP Errors O errors 290 Key Metric Editor Monitoring Chart Click Chart to first select up to three metrics you want to graph and the polling interval for the graph ey wate fora tdo Metrics qo 1st Metric 2nd Metric 3rd Metric Polling Interval Seconds Key Metric Chart Properties TCP Connection Attempt Failures y Outbound IP Discards y CPU Utilization y 1 Key Metric Editor Monitoring 291 Then click Save and the graph appears ey lets TOLEO Metrics E 25 12 26 37 CPU Utilization Cpu 1 Outbound IP Discards datagrams TCP Connection Attempt Failures Failures Click the screwdriver wrench icon in the upper right corner to return to the chart configuration screen 292 Key Metric Editor Monitoring Traffic Flow Analyzer OpenManage Network Manager s Traffic Flow Analyzer listens on UDP ports for NetFlow or JFlow datagrams A flow is a unidirectional stream of packets between two network nodes The following key parameters appear in flows Source IP address e Destination IP address Source port number e Destination port number e Layer 3 protocol type e ToS byte Type of Service e Input logical interface Using that data Traffic Flow Analyzer can help you visualize network traffic troubleshoot and anticipate bottlenecks How does it work terminal terminal etFlow analyzer collector
363. s Juniper BGP Group Template BGP Groups K 4 2 3 4 a The report Icon Name Template and Subtitle appear in the columns in this summary screen Generally speaking the report selects the target equipment and the template configures the layout and attributes reported K NOTE If the Interface details panel is empty then the Interface reports will have no contents Some devices have ports but no interfaces Use the Ports report for such devices Right click a selected report to do the following New Edit Copy This opens the Report Editor described below to configure a new report edit or copy an existing selected report Copy automatically renames the selected report Schedule Opens a scheduler screen to automate report creation Reports Resource Management Execute Report When you execute a report a numbered message as notification appears and a link to the report appears in the Messages panel cya Sree to notify you the report is ready for m aan 02 03 PM ni is now ready for viewing gt viewing Click the magnifying glass to L 06 26 10 02 03 Report completed R the right of the notification to view Li 06 28 1002 01 PM EN Report is now ready for viewing Q either the audit trail or the report a 06 28 10 02 01 PM Gj Report completed 2 del 06 23 10 11 49 AM e Report is now ready for viewing 3 K NOTE Ly 06 23 10 11 49 AM Es Report completed 2 ke M23 4 OW Repo
364. s are Area Hub Customer National Hub Other Provider Regional Hub and State Postal Address The Street City State Zip address of the location Additional Any optional notes Click Save save the Location or any modifications you have made 136 Locations Key Portlets Expanded Location Portlet The location portlet displays a list of all locations with Snap Panels to display a selected location s connection to the network and details B Locations Return to previous Default Location Fitter y Advanced Filter Search Refresh Settings JB Y Hame y Details Reference Tree L Location Details O Folsom LOCATION NAME Folsom LOCATION DETAILS LOCATION TYPE area hub PARENT LOCATION STREET 110 Woodmere CITY STATE Folsom CA ZIP 95630 ADDITIONAL Snap Panels X Close The New menu option appears in the expanded location portlet Click Settings to change the column appearance see Show Hide Reorder Columns on page 84 This has the same columns as Locations on page 135 Locations Snap Panels Selecting a location row displays the Reference Tree Snap Panel with that location s connection to containers see Container View on page 147 and equipment Click the plus icons to expand the tree The Location Details panel displays what has been configured in the Location Editor Locations Key Portlets 137 Tag When creating a location Dell OpenManage Network Mana
365. s in the SNMP attribute panel launch the SNMP Attribute editor Montor Entkies fobs he iA aay type pre i rr mans re rae ars Mage beets d RINA PCIA AA Adding New SNIP Amite e TEE a vha Toe paan nwo Pre eye id miere 3 Mirna yr Casi x This panel contains the following properties Oid The object identifier for this attribute Name This attribute s name Instance SNMP instance 0 for scalar or the ifIndex value for an SNMP column View Type Scalar or Column Syntax Integer Boolean DisplayString and so on Meta Syntax Counter Gauge and so on If you type in an OID and click the search button next to the OID field the browser searches the MIB for the OID and fills in the other values if it finds the OID 272 Resource Monitors Monitoring SNMP Interfaces The SNMP Interface Monitor Entity editor supports the following entity types group equipment manager port and interface It also supports port and interface filters on groups and equipment manager objects lla mlonitor Cua ful jtartieslonieur General Calculated Metrics Thresholds Inventory Mappings Monitor Entities Add Remove Al Entity Type PF 1 Action ig All Routers and Switches Group eo 2 SNMP Interface Properties Collect from iTable V Use not reachable as not available C Skip Polling Interval 0 SNMP Attributes Browse Add Remove Al Mame Oid Instance Syntax Meta Syntax View Type Acti
366. sa external 2 route map allanRM03 neighbor 2 3 4 5 activate neighbor 2 3 4 5 route map allanRM01 in neighbor 4 5 6 7 activate neighbor 4 5 6 7 route map allanRM02 in ProScan Portlet Change Management ProScan 317 318 default information originate no auto summary no synchronization exit address family address family ipv4 vrf VPN_PE_A redistribute ospf 10 vrf VPN_PE_A match internal external 1 external 2 no auto summary no synchronization exit address family In addition within this configuration you want to check if the target lines are present under each address family in the router bgp section To scan for this follow these steps 1 Select the Match All of the following radio button and enter both of the above lines as match criteria Select the Config Term as match Regex for each line so the order in which these lines appears does not matter 2 Add a source group criterion to search for a section that begins with routers bgp in regex routers sbgp No end match criterion is needed Click Apply 3 Click Add to make another criterion This time the start is address family s and the end is exit address family Click Apply 4 You should see both criteria listed in the editor Current Compliance Policy Criteria Add Criteria Match Any of the following criteria Match All of the following criteria Type Criteria Action match Regex for each line router s bgp PIE match Regex for each line
367. select it Hame Cisco Juniper Devices Description These are Cisco amp Juniper Only la Save Cancel Status Bar Alerts Portal Conventions 85 Create a name and description then click Save on the next screen to preserve your filter configuration See Redcell gt Filter Management on page 48 for the screen that lists all such filters Tip You can also filter what appears on a page with the Container View portlet Select a container and the rest of the portlets on that page confine displayed data to reflect the selected container s contents K NOTE When using a filter you must click the refresh icon to the right of the drop down list to populate it Common Menu Items Several menu items appear in multiple portlets In addition to editing commands New Open such menus let you Import Export All Share with User See Sharing below Edit Custom Attributes e View as PDF e Tag items with a location K NOTE You can also export or import page configurations as well as items Dell OpenManage Network Manager manages like equipment discovery profiles locations and so on Aging Policy Scee Redcell gt Database Aging Policies DAP on page 50 for instructions about configuring these Import Export Menus often contain these options Import Retrieve a file with an XML description of the listed items in the manager Some imports can come from a URL Export Selection Expor
368. st Backup Last Configuration Change Service Tag Asset Tag ForceS4810P_11 10 128 6 11 Force10 Networks Real Time Operating System Software Force10 Operating System Version 1 0 Force10 Application Software Version 8 3 7 2 Copyright c 1999 2011 by Force10 Networks Inc Build Time Sun Aug 7 08 32 10 PDT 2011 10428611 Responding Q False us am Switch Dell inc Force10 54810 1361 41 6027 1314 HADL112720066 8372 Not virtual 0302 2012 10 15 admin 3 2210 15 AM 3 212 10 16 AM 3 521 31 PM Notice that you can right click listed interfaces configuration files and so on to perform more actions Visualize Create a topology map of the selected resources See Chapter 5 Visualize for more about such maps Managed Resources Resource Management 169 170 Actions Actions you can initiate here can include yes egos cy things Adaptive CLI Actions see Chapter 10 Actions and Adaptive CLI and other actions so Ea we specific to the selected device Del Force10 Add Channel Port Actions including Adaptive CLI appear in SHOW a i Dell Force10 Add Interface to tagged VLAN CONFIG and in some cases MANAGE categories PTEN A IERE EREA TT Dell Force10 Add IP Address The list that appears depends on the device Del Force10 Banner Settings selected You can also open search field by clicking Del Force10 Enable Port Channel the magnifying glass at the bottom of this screen Delt ofce 0 n
369. st yj 30 Minutes xl Device Models Specify which device model s will use this template M5 Core Edge Router EJ M20 Core Edge Router Attributes Monitors Available Attributes Default Cisco Monitor E AvgRTT Default ICMP Monitor MinRTT Default Interface Monitor PacketCount El Selected Attributes EJ D Defaut ICMP Monitor MaxRTT 4 Default Juniper Monitor bb Default WMI Monitor K led Save Cancel 4 Name your template The Show Composites and Time Frame fields are the same as in the dashboard see Dashboard Editor on page 281 Show Performance Templates Monitoring 287 5 To specify which device model s this template will apply to click on the button in the Device Models panel The model selector appears Gece ones Vendors Types Models Aruba Networks Inc al Firewall4VPN Appliance EJ IPMPLS Router Module Avaya Media Gateway 42300 Edge Router Barco BCI Other 42320 Edge Router Brocade Communications Systems Inc Router 2350 Edge Router Cisco Systems Switch Router J4300 Edge Router Covaro Networks Inc J4320 Router Dell Force10 Networks Inc J4350 Router Dell Inc J6300 Edge Router DoremiLabs inc J6350 Router EMC Corporation Inc LN 1000 Mobile Router Enterasys Networks M10 Core Edge Router Extreme Networks M10i Edge Router F5 Labs Inc M120 Router Hewlett Packard M160 Core Router M20 CorefEdge Router Lexmark International M320 Core Router NETGEAR M40
370. stanceable and the purple icon portlets are non instanceable In other words you can add only one instance of the purple icon Container View portlet to a community and it displays the same data even if it appears on more than one screen K NOTE Once you have added a non instanceable portlet to a page its entry in the Add menu appears grayed out and disabled You can add more than one non instanceable portlets to different pages but they display the same data Instanceable portlets can appear multiple times on the same page and can display different data The Authentication portlet for one example is different You can add it many times to pages in the community and can configure each instance of the portlet to display different authentication data Mandatory Fields Some portlets include editors These appear after you select an item right click and select either New or Open Mandatory fields in these editors appear with a red flag icon to their right Hame testLocation Status Bar Alerts Portal Conventions 81 82 Sorting Portlet Lists Sorting tables that list items occurs when you click a column heading The arrow to the right of that heading s Location lame y text displays the direction of the sort ascending or ena descending When the arrow appears in a heading the pee lost in space selected column is the basis for sorting Expanded Portlets Some portlets appear with a plus icon in t
371. strator Portal Role Portal users with syste 2 Control Panel Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager Click the Edit button the pencil and paper to the right of a listed group to see and configure its permissions Petites RECIO CUA tato Group Details Name Administrator 4 unique name Description Portal Role Portal users wit system privilegi Permissions Add Advanced Functional Permission Name Enabled Settings Actions L3VPN Service Discovery deprecated Customer Manager Schedule Service Service Center Provision Service Service Definitions Service Pre Post Tasks Services Spoof Deployment Service Manager Clean Service From DB Services Approval Review Services Custom Definition Settings Policy Clean Service Policies Services Templates DELETE EXECUTE READ ADD WRITE DELETE EXECUTE READ ADD WRITE DELETE EXECUTE READ ADD WRITE DELETE EXECUTE READ ADD WRITE DELETE EXECUTE READ ADD WRITE DELETE EXECUTE READ ADD WRITE DELETE EXECUTE READ ADD WRITE DELETE EXECUTE READ ADD WRITE DELETE EXECUTE READ ADD WRITE DELETE EXECUTE READ ADD WRITE DELETE EXECUTE READ ADD WRITE DELETE EXECUTE READ ADD WRITE DELETE EXECUTE READ ADD WRITE nO 2 2 lt gt laf 3 2E 148 Li E 148 Le L4 E La 128 L E LE 48 2 Save Cancel Edit permissions wi
372. sualize Displays a mapping of the selected contact s association to devices Dell OpenManage Network Manager only retrieves Contact and Location information on initial discovery You can modify these once the resource is under management However doing will not modify the any system info on the device Contacts Key Portlets 133 134 Contacts Editor This editor has two panels where you can enter contact information Name Address Phone and so on Click the tabs at the top of this screen to move between the panels The Contact ID a unique identifier for the contact in your system is a required field at the top of the first page Click Save to preserve your new or modified contact information Click Cancel to leave the contact unmodified Contacts Key Portlets delito apra Sle Buya He General Additional Information Contact ID a PESA COTA Ueypeyer AUE General MEU Home Information Home Phone Personal Cell Personal Pager Other Information Other Phone Other Pager Other Fax Other Cell Save Cancel Locations In its summary form the locations portlet displays configured Bi Locations alo Es locations in your system 17 Settings S Refresh Search You can right click to create modify or remove New Open De Delete the selected location See aoe si Location Editor description below cd for more about editing or creating aia locations tt Sub
373. submitting OS Image File s Device Family Select Files Uploaded File ErrorScreen jf 23 KB TitleBarProble 48 KB Select the files you wish to upload Import from Disk Import from URL slid smbssA 29117 spsml er w Soate2 speril 20 eirlt of slit ombr 9 BRRBRSRRRRRR BBE EEE RRRR BREE EEE RRRR RRR R EE EE RRRRR RRR EERE RARER AMIATA JALUMAIA 02 0 0 Sv xx22 TOM BRRBESRRRRRR BESS BE RRRRR BREE SER RRRR BREE SBR RRRRRR RRR RR RRRR RRR Ssiswaart OF 0 0 8v xx22 Josanodiswod 101 morssnriotat esbivorg sMbss RRRARRRRRARRANARRANARRAARRARARRANARAAARRANARRAARRAAARRAAARA RRRRRRRRRARRARARRARARRARRRARARRAARRRAARRAAARRAARRARARRANARA Ixsm WOY poatavbh s3isbqu eids patylqqs ebasimmoss1 Lisd 10 edasmsnasdas sivytest enissaon sssbqu sdT sloyso sash sldissqmno0s bas sjasiivo siswittos msseye wog qssx gqisd Lliw sisusioe bas sisviab 801d siswersit esivbom mssey RRRRRRRRRRAR PARSE RRRRRRRARRRRRRRRRSRARRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR RRA RRRRRRRRRRRR RARER BRAS RRRRRRRRRRRRARRRRSRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR RRS xx22 tosmmod1swod isd sd3 101 OF 0 0 8v sessis1 sisumiit s Parameters tab contains its OS Image Name Description Version and the Device Class and Device Family The Image Files tab displays a selector that lets you create new OS Images retrieving files from the local file system Import from Disk or a URL Import from URL Because such images can consist of multiple files you can import multiple files here
374. t 68 69 comection limit 10700 72 syslog 73 archive size 64k files 1 world readable 74 user 99 100 101 102 xe 0 0 1 File Name DefaultConfig Version 2 al 2 version 11 1R2 3 3 groups 4 PROTECT_RE_GROUP mse04 5 logical systems 6 mse04 BURSA 65 ssh 66 protocol version vl v2 1 68 telnet 69 connection limit 155 70 n 72 syslog 73 archive size 64k files 1 world readable 74 user 99 400 101 102 xe 0 0 1 103 103 mtu 1500 04 1 105 104 mtu 1500 105 e Alatic the title bar of this screen Lines that differ 108 107 xe 0 0 2 4 113 xe 0 0 2 108 mtu 1500 114 mtu 1500 between the two oli configurations Wj 42 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 gt i appear highlighted Navigate between the last 6 configuration files lt Prev Next currently comparing 2 and 3 green Lines that are missing in one but that appear in another appear highlighted red Added lines appear highlighted in yellow Use the right left arrows to page through the side by side comparison x Close The page numbers and beginning forward back end arrows help you navigate between pages of pairs of files Notice also that if you have more than two such files a panel appears at File Management File Server File Management the bottom that lets you navigate between adjacent pairs of such files 1 and 2 2 and 3 3 and 4 and so on Click the Prev Next lin
375. t a file with a text or XML description of the selected item s in the manager 86 Common Menu Items Portal Conventions Export All Export a file with a text or XML descriptions of all listed items in the manager Tip Printing manager contents You can Export a full size manager into PDF or Excel format and print from there ZN CAUTION You must import into the correct portlet You cannot import event processing rules into the Actions portlet for example You must import event processing rules into the Event Processing Rule portlet Sharing You can share elements within Dell OpenManage Network Manager with colleagues when more than one user exists on your Dell OpenManage Network Manager system and consult with them using the texting described in Status Bar Alerts on page 75 Common Menu Items Portal Conventions 87 xX How To Share a Resource To share an something first select it where it appears listed in the appropriate portlet Right click and select Share Asset E wnt leer i 1 Select the user you would like to share this asset with Name Title Online Last Login Status Message Suman Sarkar e N A LAN Jack Black e 06 18 10 02 43 PM IT dorado 0 06114110 05 15 PM sample account 17 0614 10 10 32 AM Bill Acevedo 0 06 2110 12 21 PM Mark Sanders o 06 15 10 02 27 PM CEK EEE Bs 4oW 2 Type in a message which will be presented with this asset Check this out Attachment j 1 Informational
376. t monitor to collect p ICMP 5 Minutes 2 Z Default Default Cisco Monitor Q Default key metrics monito Key Metrics 5 Minutes Default Reference Tree f Details f Monitor Status Summary 2 a it NAME TestACLI Monitor S TestACLI Monitor Target Last Polled Availability Monitor To Targets DESCRIPTION JuniperM5 8 15 11 10 19 AM Monitor To Trendable Attributes ENABLED P Enabled a JuniperJ2 845M1 10 23 AM Retention Poley POLLING INTERVAL 5 Minutes Membership A RETENTION POLICY E Defaut EMIT AVAILABILITY 9 Not Emit Availabilty RETAIN AVAILABILITY Q Not Retain Availabilty RETAIN POLLED DATA Retain Polled Data RETAIN CALCULATED DATA y Retain Calculated Data As in most expanded views this one displays a list ordered by the Name of the monitor Click Settings to configure the column display Available columns include those on the summary screen Name Enabled Monitor Type as well as Description Poling Interval Target Count and Retention Policy Resource Monitor Snap Panels When you select a monitor the Snap Panels at the bottom of the screen display details about it The Reference Tree shows the selected monitor s connection to attributes groups retention policies and its membership the devices monitored The Details Snap Panel displays the attributes the popup shows when you hover the cursor over the Monitor Type column in the summary screen and adds Emit Availability events Retain
377. t was not found or the required addresses are not specified for the Contact then Dell OpenManage Network Manager uses the Recipent addresses configured in the the Email Action This screen has the following fields Recipient Addresses Enter an e mail address in the field below this label then click the plus sign to add it to the list of recipients The minus removes selected recipients Subject The e mail subject Email Header Footer The e mail s heading and footing SMS Body The e mail contents to be sent as text SMS Max Length The maximum number of characters to send in the SMS Typically this is 140 but the default is 0 so be sure to set to your carrier s maximum before saving Here is what Email looks like when it arrives Sent Wednesday March 02 2011 2 37 PM To techpubs doradosoftware com Subject Web Test Notification redcellInventoryAttribChangeNotification Notification Attributes 5 hours 16 mins 43 secs Lo LA Le 34772521 sysUpTime 0 snmpTrapOID 0 redcellInventoryAttrName 0 RedCell Config EquipmentManager_Notes admin redcellInventoryAttrChangedBy 0 redcellInventoryAttrNewValue 0 hello world severity auto redcelliInventoryAttrOldValue 0 hello world severity Event Processing Rules Key Portlets 121 122 Custom This screen lets you configure Action based on Adaptive CLI actions available in the system Notice that you can select by most common or by keyw
378. ted rule Modifying or creating rules opens Rule Editor See How to Create Event Processing Rules for steps to create these rules When you Copy an event processing rule Dell OpenManage Network Manager generates a new name but you must change that name before you save the event processing rule Event Processing Rules Key Portlets Expanded Event Processing Rules Portlet The expanded portlet displays additional columns Details about selected rules appear in the snap in panels at the bottom of this screen Event Processing Rules Return to previous Default Event Processing Rule Filter y Advanced Filter Search Refresh Settings 2 8 Y Rule Name y Rule Type Dell Powerconnect Login Failed Event Correlation Database Free Space Low Event Correlation Configuration Change Automation ciscoConfigManEvent Automation Cisco User Login Failed Event Correlation Cisco User Logged In Event Correlation SBSeSeSeegg 2 Backup and Change Determination Process Automation lt Reference Tree Rule Actions Event Filter Summary Add new equipment to heartbeat Name Description e 4 Match All of the following Add to default Heartbeat P io Event Name is redcellEquipmentDiscoveryNotificatic Snap O Y Close The Reference Tree panel displays the selected rule s connection to events The Rule Actions list any configured actions associated with the rule The Event Filter Summary summarizes any confi
379. ted below Tip Clicking Go to in the Dock and selecting My Private Pages to open pages not shared with others unless you configure sharing See Sharing on page 87 Because they are so fundamental to Dell OpenManage Network Manager s functioning this section also describes the following portlets e Audit Trail Portlet Schedules Tip You can rename any portlet by clicking its title You can also configure portlets default filters to work in concert with the title See Filtering Settings on page 112 Portal Overview Portal Conventions 71 72 Tooltips Dell OpenManage Network Manager has extensive tooltips that appear when you click the blue circle with a question mark one help icon see also Online Help Filter on page 12 or when you hover the cursor over a field General Resource Information name of the resource Name JuniferJ2300 1 0 128 3 16 10 128 3 16 Tooltips also display the content most fields in portlets If the screen does not allow a full field to appear you can still find out what is in a field by letting the tooltip re state what it contains Refresh You may have to refresh your browser to see screen updates One way to refresh without re loading the entire window however is to click the Refresh button at the top of an individual portlet See Settings on page 80 The Back Button Although browsers have a Back button this is not always the best way to return to a
380. tem Object ld begins with 1 3 6 1 4 1 2636 1 1 1 2 Filters appear only for the entity type of your Report template Branding Reports ee lean Reports come with a default logo but you can change that as is illustrated in the above screen Put the png jpg or gif graphic file with your desired logo in owareappslredcelllimages on the application server In the owareapps installprops lib installed properties file alter this property redcell report branding image lt filename_here gt No need to include the path just use the file name CAUTION You must create images that are no taller than 50 pixels and no wider than 50 pixels 206 Reports Resource Management Visualize Visualize My Network The Visualize My Network portlet displays discovered devices mapping them in relationship to each other It also lets you store and retrieve views you have arranged as well as configure the default view see VIEW DETAILS on page 213 for more about these capabilities xX How To Create a Visualization Creating a topology map of devices or services is as simple as right clicking the item s you want to map and selecting Visualize You can also save different topologies after you configure them See VIEW DETAILS on page 213 for more about that You can fine tune the appearance of what you see with the tools described in Configuring Views and what follows Tip If you do not see what you expect make sure
381. ter a PROTECT _RE GROUP mse04 logical systems mse04 BURSA interfaces E CLName 100 unit lt gt ilitie family inet El Capabilities filter input PROTECT_RE_FILTER Contact m Administrative State Creator DNS Hostname Date created Description system host name JuniperM5 10 128 3 15 Device Driver OID time zone America Los_Angeles authentication order password Device Identifier location country code US postal code 95630 ados Equipment Icon console type ansi auxiliary type ansi K 4 oO 213 Discovery Date root authentication encrypted password 1 vynJ7Ugt gkJ3WU1FKuT FRSSDDAZCUL login message SNMP V3 credentials un perf man user MD5 pass class qa idle timeout 10 permissions admin control all class super user local a Pe pape ee Se al k k Save Close This screen appears without contents when you create a new Configuration Image but appears with data from any promoted configuration file if it originated as a promoted config file Target Param The panel of parameters that appears to the right of this screen lets you insert a value retrieved from Dell OpenManage Network Manager s database into the restored configuration file For example if a Contact appears in the file delete the specifics retrieved from a particular device s config and double click the Target Param Contact Dell OpenManage Network Manager inserts _EquipmentManager_Re
382. th the Edit button to the right of the listed permission Editing Functional Permission Services Approval Review Available Settings Enabled READ ica WRITE Vv EXECUTE Vv ADD Vv DELETE Vv Apply Cancel The following describes the actions of the permissions when checked Action Default Behavior read Enables Details Visualize and View as PDF Control Panel Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 43 Action Default Behavior write Enables the Edit Save and Import Export execute Lets you see the view altogether launch from a portlet and query for elements Alternatively this action can control a specific application function typically described by the permission name like provisioning a policy add Enables the New menu item and Save If you do not check this action then the New menu item does not appear delete Enables the Delete menu item The Add button on the Permissions panel lets you add permissions previously deleted if they are available and the Advanced button lets you configure permissions by type For example if you want to see all of the READ permissions Configure the Required Permissions to be Applied Read Select All Unselect All Functional Permission Name Allow Read Juniper MPLS L3VPN Provider Tunel Service v Juniper Routing Options Service Vv Juniper BGP Service Vv Juniper OSPF Service VV Juniper PIM Service Vv Juniper MPLS
383. that one canrun perl v from the command line where the OpenManage Network Manager server is to be started Adaptive CLI invokes that same per1 command If for some reason Adaptive CLI fails to invoke the default per1 command it reads the setting of activeconfig perl exe inside ovareapps activeconfig lib ac properties and uses that alternative command Note that the default activeconfig perl prefix setting inac properties is prepended to every Perl script It basically forces the script to use strict mode and provides a convenient print1n method for the user Knowledgeable Perl users can change this default behavior setting but should be careful about it Remember best practice is to override properties as described in Overriding Properties on page 23 The standard output using print1n of the Adaptive CLI Perl script represents the command set that is to be sent to the device For convenience a printi1n subroutine is embedded with the script Perl Scripts Actions and Adaptive CLI A X How To Create Adaptive CLI Example The following describes the basics of creating and using Adaptive CLIs 1 Create a new Adaptive CLI Right click and select New 2 In the Attributes panel create attributes named required and optional 3 In the Script panel define the Attribute Delimiter lt gt and Optional Attributes Delimiter and enter the following three scripts show run show lt Required gt show Optional 4 Save this
384. the CD process compares configurations and determines and stores the incremental configuration changes it updates the resource s Change Determination label to point to the latest config file backup version Steps in the Change Determination Process are as follows 1 Retrieve configuration file indicated by the Change Determination Label if any 2 Retrieve configuration file indicated by the Current Label which should be the same as the device in the network has 3 Compare these two files 4 Write changes to History Records that will be used during Change Reporting 5 Move Change Determination Label for this device to the configuration file pointed to by the Current Label If the Change Determination Label points to no configuration file for this device it must be the very first time this device is processed by the Change Determination Process It creates a Change Determination Label Item for this Device The compliant label contains a pointer to the last configuration file that was compliant for each device that has been through ProScan If a device fails ProScan you can automatically restore the last compliant configuration file indicated by the compliant label 328 Change Determination Process Change Management ProScan To retrieve this information see the instructions in Compliance and Change Reporting on page 329 xX How To Run Change Determination Follow these steps to run the Default Change Determination 1 In
385. the Schedules portlet locate the Default Change Determination operation 2 Right click and select Open 3 Configure the schedule This runs Change Determination with the target group of All Devices all discovered devices Change Determination Defaults By default Change Determination can run against all devices without requiring the config change update flag be set or updated based on events tied to the Conifg Update Flag event processing rule action To disable the manual run ability of the Change Determination process uncomment the property in owareapps changemgmt lib cm properties or add it to owareapps installprops lib installed properties FE FE E HE HE HE HE HE FE FE FE HE HE HE HE FE FE FE FE HE HE HE HE HE FE FE FE FE E HE HE HE FE FE FE EEE HH Change Determination Flag Allows system to be flagged to only run change determination against devices we have received Config Change Event for Default Behavior is to run change determination for All targets the same as setting the below property false com dorado changemgmt change determination require config events true Compliance and Change Reporting The Compliance Policy Violation report is seeded when you have ProScan Change Management in Dell OpenManage Network Manager Inventory Compliance Attributes for reporting can also appear in report templates when you install ProScan These report in compliance or out of compliance the last compliance date when
386. thernet 1 0 Tip Notice the breadcrumb trail at the top of the Equipment Detail panel tracks the levels through which you drill down You can click a level that appears in this trail to return to a previous screen If you click Return to previous in the upper right corner of the screen you will return to the original screen from which you selected the basic equipment Some fields may be truncated onscreen Workaround hover the cursor over the truncated field so the text appears as a tooltip or drill down to see the detail Performance Indicators These gauges display CPU and Memory Utilization The numbers indicate percentage of capacity These rely on UE Flash du 0 25 50 75 100 Performance Indicators Memory Utilization 0 25 50 75 100 L 1 1 J Equipment Details Resource Management 179 180 Interfaces This panel displays interfaces on the selected device Notice that you can right click these to display additional details or to share this list with another user You can right click to Share an interface s information or to open a Interfaces gt Details screen K NOTE Some devices populate the ports panel but not the interfaces panel This panel is empty for such devices Interfaces may appear for Force10 Force 10 devices interfaces details can display Port Channels LAGs VLANs SVIs and Loopbacks Interfaces gt Details The details available for interfaces can inclu
387. this monitor account for this but if you know that this is an issue you can probably configure the monitor to account for it too After taking a look at Thresholds no more configuration is required Notice however that you can also configure Calculated Metrics Inventory Mappings and Conditions on other screens in this editor to calculate additional values based on the monitored attributes to map them and to make conditional properties based on monitored behavior Tip Calculated Metrics is particularly valuable if you want to monitor a composite like ifInErrors ifOutErrors or want to calculate a parameter like errors per minute when you have a 5 minute monitoring interval 11 Click Save and the monitor is now active Notice that the Availability icon appears at the top of a Monitor Status Summary snap panel in the Expanded Resource Monitor next to a time date stamp of its last polling Right click the monitor and select Refresh Monitor to manually initiate polling Values displayed in the Overall Availability column of the Monitor Manager do not automatically refresh and may be out of date The Reference Tree snap panel maps the monitor s relationship to its target s attribute s and other elements The Details snap panel summarizes the monitor s configuration 12 For information about having the monitor s results appear in the a Dashboard portlet see Dashboard Views on page 277 Q X How To Create an ICMP Monitor The
388. tings Hame Script 1 7 Target Filter SS xj Optional Attribute Delimiter T z seo cont CERT Attribute Extraction Pattern Attribute name Resut xi Parse algorithm Extract xl Parse expression Md Add new attribute extraction Set up attribute extraction in the Values Extraction tab of the script editor Script Names and Functions common pl Common functions defined for scripts in this directory External Commands Actions and Adaptive CLI 355 dns_test pl Check if DNS can resolve the specified host name finger_test pl Check if the finger service is running on a specified host ftp_test pl Check the FTP service is running on a specified host http_test pl Check the HTTP service is running on a specified host nntp_test pl Check if the NNTP service is running on a specified host Public NNTP server to test news aioe org peping_test pl Check if a target is pingable from the specified remote host pop3_test pl Check if the POP3 service is running on a specified host smtp_test pl Check if the SMTP service is running on a specified host telnet_test pl Check if the TELNET service is running on a specified host X How To Create a Monitor for an External Script The following steps describe creating a monitor for an external command configured as an Adaptive CLI ACLI Create the Adaptive CLI 1 Right click in the Actions portlet and create a new Externa
389. tion Constraints are most relevent to Traffic Flow Analysis Peformance Management and Event Management Traffic Flow Analysis ratings map to constant throughput divided by sample rate as in bandwidth sample rate 20G 2000 is easier to manage than 20G 1000 20G 1is a thousand times more demanding than 20G 1000 Best practice is to avoid such high sample rates The bandwidth the hardware your Dell OpenManage Network Manager installation can support is dramatically lower in such cases Best Sizing for Standalone Installations Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 21 practice is to sample a maximum of one traffic flow for every 1000 1 1000 Higher sampling rates degrade database performance and increase network traffic without adding any significant statistical information Performance Management can support 600 inserts per second using a single disk SSD Drive 1 insert 1 monitored attribute Expect better performance as you add more drives and worse performance with slower drives Event Management can support a sustained 1200 traps sec using a single SSD drive Expect better performance as you add more drives and worse performance with slower drives Database memory settings increase as the number of database hits increases At the 32GB level best practice is to use an SSD drive or fast disk array because of the large number of database actions possible You can start and stop the client portion of t
390. tion Snap Panel 145 Authorization 367 B Back button 72 Backups Latest Configurations 277 Basic Network Consider ations 22 Branding Reports 206 Breadcrumb trail 179 C Change Determination 328 Change Management Compliance Policy Vio lation report 309 Change Management ProS can 303 Change Manager Use paradigms 303 Changing the Session Time out Period 33 Chat Conferencing 76 Common Menu Items 86 Common Setup Tasks 67 Compliance Policy Summa ry 308 Compliant label 328 Condition Override s 210 Index 373 Configuration File Editor 231 Configuration Files 229 Configure Alarm E mail 104 Contacts Editor 134 Contacts Portlet 133 Container Editor 148 Container Manager 146 Container Manager Expand ed 146 Container View 147 Containers Portlets filtered 147 Continue Pattern 350 Control Panel 33 CoS 367 Creating a new label 226 Creating or Modifying a ProScan Policy 310 Creating or Modifying ProS can Policy Groups 325 Custom Action 122 Custom attributes 45 Customizing Report Logos 206 D DAP 50 DAP SubPolicies 53 dapviewer 58 Dashboard Editor 281 Dashboard View Selection 280 Dashboard Views 277 DATA Topology 214 DATA VIEW SETTINGS Topology 213 374 Index Data Configuration 45 Database 367 Database Aging Policies 50 Database Aging Sub Poli cies 55 Deploy OS 238 Deployment 367 Details 185 Digital Certificate 367 Direct Access 188 Discovering hostnames 156 Discovery Profile Actions 158
391. tion about creating or modifying dashboards For an explanation of Convert see Convert Simple Dashboards to Custom Dashboards on page 286 The Performance Dashboard on page 279 and Dashboard Editor on page 281 describe configuring simple dashboards See the How to Create a Custom Dashboard View on page 282 section for a description of custom dashboard view creation Dashboard Views Monitoring 277 278 You can also Convert Simple Dashboards to Custom Dashboards as described below When you Edit a view Dashboard Editor appears It lets you select which monitors appear in the dashboard the monitored entities and attributes The expanded portlet offers similar capabilities To make a monitor appear on a page use the portlet described in Performance Dashboard on page 279 Launch a Dashboard View Launching a view lets you view the monitors active for a Dashboard view Last 30 Minutes Entity 10 128 315 Temperature celsius Loon ff Goon E 07 16 12 16 24 16 29 16 34 16 07 16 12 16 24 16 29 16 34 16 07 16 12 16 24 16 29 16 34 16 arpa a Mou JE Memory Utilization 07 16 12 16 24 16 29 16 34 16 Total Inbound SNMP E ainean E butter 07 16 12 16 24 16 29 16 34 16 07 16 12 16 24 16 29 16 34 16 Outbound IP No Route Discards datagrams 07 16 12 16 24 16 29 16 34 16 07 16 12 16 24 16 29 16 34 16 E vos inbound Errors E outbound IP Discards errors datagrams Some packages display a Network
392. tity Type Settings Attribute Settings Entity Type Hame Test Attribute Schema Entity Type Settings The Entity Type Settings tab has the following fields Entity Type Name An identifier for the schema Description This is a test schema Category Test Category Version 0 Description A text description for the schema Category A category for the schema 342 Actions Portlet Actions and Adaptive CLI Version An automatically created version number Attribute Settings Click the New Attribute a button and select the attribute diia We RUE MEE type and open editor panel and General Scripts configure the attribute Attribute Settings Configured attributes appear in a tree to the left of the pedido editor panel Click a listed lal save O Cances attribute to edit it after it has Tae Attribute Properties been created TestCode Name TestiP 2 The editor panel has the Description following fields ity einem Collection Settings Entity Type Name An identifier for the schema Default Value Description A text description for the lal Save attribute x Close The following tabs may appear depending on the type of attribute you are configuring some are absent Additional fields may appear depending on the attribute type you are configuring Datatype Settings Default Value An optional default value for the attribute Collection Settin
393. tlets Message Template This panel lets you view or alter MIB Text Bindings and the Message Template for the event selected BEENA ar Datiition CACA AV EARN SCESE do edo General C Correlations Extensions MIB Text Adaptive CLI Execution Success K Bindings in Event Binding Object Name OID redcellEquipmentContact 1361413477234 redcellEquipmentLocation 13 6 1 41 3477 235 redcellEquipmentvendor 1 3 6 1 41 3477 23 6 redcellEquipmentHostname 13 6 1 41 3477 23 7 Message Template 1 3 6 1 4 1 3477 31 41 3 o This is a template for messages that accompany this event Specifying an OID from the event bindings within curly braces in the template acts as a tag which replaces the OID with its MIB value For example Interface 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 left the down state led Save Cancel This contains three sections MIB Text A read only reminder of the MIB contents for this OID Bindings in Event A read only reminder of the MIB bindings for this event This displays the varbind contents of the event matching the Binding Object Name and the OID object identifier Message Template A template for messages that accompany this event Specifying an OID within the curly braces in the template acts as a tag which replaces the OID with its MIB value For example Interface 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 left the down state Event Definitions Key Portlets 131 132 If
394. to existing groups See for Managed Resource Groups on page 162 more about this Resync This re queries the device for more current information Traffic Analyzer Register or Unregister the selected resource for traffic analysis You can also select Show Traffic to see a screen with traffic for the selected device See Chapter 8 Traffic Flow Analyzer for more about Traffic Flow Delete Remove the selected device from inventory View as PDF Displays the selected device as an Acrobat pdf See View as PDF on page 90 172 Managed Resources Resource Management Managed Resources Expanded If you click the plus in the upper right corner of the summary screen this expanded screen appears As in all such screens you can limit what appears listed with the filters at the top of the screen Select the filter from default seeded filters with the pick list at the top left corner of the screen You can also create your own custom filter by clicking Advanced Filter to the right of this pick list see Filter Expanded Portlet Displays on page 85 for more E Managed Resources 4 Return to previous Default Resource Filter h Advanced Filter Search Refresh Settings E e gt Mame IP Address Vendor Model Type Firmware Software Last Backup Location Hardware Version Version Version RA Turb 10 201 17 E Dellinc Powerco Switch 04 2 00b Ob ects 10 201 221 Dell inc Powerco Switch 4204 4201 Folsom RE POTS 10 201 1
395. to configure organizations Associating organizational roles with organization members empowers them to exercise the associated permissions within the organization s site s 1 Create a new Regular organization Add gt Regular Organization named MyCorp as the parent of location organizations 2 Notice that you can add much more identifying information once you have saved the basics Name and Description for the organization This includes an Organization Site a checkbox that would create a separate portal for the organization to which you can add and configure pages portlets and so on 3 Create two Location organizations Add gt Location for example Admin and Headquarters Select MyCorp as the parent when you create the organization 4 Create users in MyCorp TestUserA TestUserB and TestUserBoss 38 Control Panel Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 10 11 As you create these users add each to one of the MyCorp organizational children Admin or Headquarters Tip Notice that you can View gt Hierarchy to see the parent child relationships between organizations Users unassigned to organizations also appear below this portion of the screen View y QAd y A Search v Organizations Delete D Name Type aly MyCorp Oo 2 Suborganizations Admin Headquarters Reqular Organization A ad Actions 1 User Test User ae 33 r O See TesiLocation456 Regular Organization 4 Actions Showing 2
396. to manage License Make sure you have the correct WBEM driver license installed Licenses come in the following types e Major Vendor by Name Such as Dell Compaq HP Gateway e Server Desktop individual license support e Generic computers non major vendors e ALL this gives the driver all capabilities for any computer system N CAUTION If you discover an Amigopod host that does not have its SNMP agent turned on Dell OpenManage Network Manager labels it a WMI or WBEM host rather than an Amigopod host Getting Started The following section outlines the steps in a typical installation and subsequent first use Because the software described here is both flexible and powerful this section does not exhaustively describe all the details of available installations Instead this Guide refers to those descriptions elsewhere in the OpenManage Network Manager User Guide or online help A typical installation means doing the following Getting Started Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 27 Installation and Startup below includes instructions for a basic installation If you have a large network or anticipate a large number of web clients then best practice is to install Dell OpenManage Network Manager as the Administration Section of the User Guide guide instructs Administering User Permissions You can also set up users device access passwords and groups for users as you begin to use it See Control
397. to preserve the Adaptive CLI you have configured Clicking Close does not save your configuration 340 Actions Portlet Actions and Adaptive CLI General The following are parameters to configure in this panel Name A unique identifier for this action For example Retrieve MyDevice MAC addresses For a new action to appear on the right click Action menu begin its name with the vendor name For example Force 10 showyersion would appear under Actions in that menu Otherwise it appears under and Adaptive CLI classification Description A text description of the action Type Select a type from the pick list Configure External or Show Command Tip You can use Dell OpenManage Network Manager s optional Proscan policies to scan Adaptive CLI show commands for compliance and trigger actions alarms e mail and so on based on their contents See Chapter 9 Change Management ProScan The External command refers to a script Making this an ACLI means Dell OpenManage Network Manager can schedule such scripts or include them in a workflow See External Commands on page 352 for more about these Target Type Select a type of target from the pick list Card Equipment and Subcomponents Interfaces Managed Devices Ports Adaptive CLI targets can also be None largetless On execution if you create an Adaptive CLI type with port target then the selection view panel lets you choose ports When the Adaptive CLI ty
398. tography a private or secret key is an encryption decryption key known only to the party or parties that exchange secret messages In traditional secret key cryptography a key would be shared by the communicators so that each could encrypt and decrypt messages The risk in this system is that if either party loses the key or it is stolen the system is broken A more recent alternative is to use a combination of public and private keys In this system a public key is used together with a private key PROFILE A profile is an abstract collection of configuration data that is utilized as a tem plate to specify configuration parameters to be applied to a device as a result of a policy con dition being true PUBLIC Key A public key is a value provided by some designated authority as a key that combined with a private key derived from the public key can be used to effectively encrypt and decrypt messages and digital signatures The use of combined public and private keys is known as asymmetric encryption A system for using public keys is called a public key infra structure PKI QoS Quality of Service In digital circuits it is a measure of specific error conditions as compared with a standard The establishment of QoS levels means that transmission rates error rates and other characteristics can be measured improved and to some extent guar anteed in advance Often related to Class of Service CoS RADIUS RADIUS Remote A
399. topics within the helpset Tip Sometimes your browser s cache may interfere with help s correct appearance If you see a table of contents node without contents you can often repair it by refreshing the panel or whole screen A xX How To Use How To Several sections of what follows contain the How to instructions for use These are typically steps to follow to produce the desired result For a look at all such steps available refer to the How to section of the Index 12 Why Dell OpenManage Network Manager Preface Feedback To provide your input about this software click the Feedback link in the lower left corner of the Dell OpenManage Network Manager screen Provide your contact information enter Questions Likes New Ideas or a Problem in the screen that appears next then click Send Dorado Software responds and often uses customer suggestions in future versions of the software A Note About Performance Dell OpenManage Network Manager is designed to help you manage your network with alacrity Unfortunately the devices managed or the networks that communicate with those devices are not always as fast as this software If discovery takes a long time it can often network and device latency is the culprit You can also optimize installations to be faster see the recommendations in the Administration Section of the User Guide and Administration Sections and limit device queries with filters but device and
400. tor Target Refresh When executed this updates monitors with groups as targets based on current memberships This removes targets no longer members of a monitored group and adds new group members A seeded schedule refreshes these every six hours by default Tip You can also Refresh Monitor manually by right clicking in the Resource Monitors table Top Asset Monitors Dell OpenManage Network Manager uses seeded default Active Performance Monitors APM to display performance data in several categories These portlets display the summary results of device monitoring for example the devices slowest to respond to ping Top Ping Response Slowest xX Top o Que Equipment Ping Rate ms Equipn 15 Juniperm5 10 128 3 15 10128 3 15 2 67 a y 2 Cisco6509 10128221 oware net 10 12 2 6 c7505 0 166 192 168 0 166 26 15 E CiscoCat6000 10128220 10 128 2 20 25 5 CiscoCat2948G L3 10128233 10 128 2 1 3 21 29 26 29 31 29 36 29 41 29 46 29 E Router 10 128 2 135 13 E Router yourdomain com 10 128 2 10 eb JuniperJ2300 10 128 3 16 10 128 3 16 E Router yourdomain com 10 128 2 11 2 CiscoME3400 10128230 10 128 2 30 B Ping Rate ms 276 Top Asset Monitors Monitoring Devices appear ranked by the monitored parameter Hover the cursor over a row s summary graph of Ping Rate and a popup graph of recent activity over time appears If you right click a monitored item you can select from menu items l
401. tor 269 Proscan Policy Group Editor 325 Protocols Used 23 Public Private Page Behav ior 40 Public Key 370 Q QoS 370 Quick Navigation 61 Quick Start 27 Quickstart 15 R RADIUS 370 RCSynergy 35 Recommended Operating System Versions 16 Recorder Page turn icons 84 Redcell gt Mediation 45 Reporting Refresh 72 Refresh Monitor Targets 276 re index 34 Report Template Editors 196 Report Templates 195 Reports Customizing Logos 206 Portlet 200 Snap Panels 203 Repositories 57 Resolve DNS Hostnames Activity 156 Resource Discovery 152 Resource Icons 166 Resource Management Port lets 143 Resource Monitor Snap Pan els 247 Resource Monitors Portlet 245 Retention Policies 248 Return to previous 72 RIP 370 Rule Editor 111 Actions 116 S Saving Views 213 Schedule Refresh Monitor Targets 276 Schedules 95 Schedules Portlet 95 Scheduling 95 Scheduling Actions 186 Scheduling Monitor Target Refresh 276 Scheduling Refresh Monitor Index 377 Targets 276 Screen resolution 19 Screen width in pixels 20 Search in Portlets 81 Search Indexes 34 Self signed Certificate 370 Server 49 Server Statistics 244 Sharing 87 Show Performance Tem plates 286 Show Versions 72 Site Map portlet 77 Sizing memory 28 SMTP 371 SMTP Configuration 67 Snap Panels 83 SNMP 371 SNMP Interface Monitor 273 SNMP Interface Monitor Example 262 SNMP Monitor 270 SNMP Table Monitor 274 Solaris Prerequisites 30 Sorting 82 Spanning
402. tribute ID BW Recv Pkt In Errors Pkt Errors BW Xmit Pkt Out Errors Pkt In Discards BW Recv Packets In Errors Errors and Discards Count BW Xmit Packets Out Errors Packets In Discards xD gt la Save Cancel Resource Monitors Monitoring 259 You can Add a new mapping with that button or Remove All listed mappings with that button You can also edit or delete listed mappings with the Action icons to the right of each row Adding or editing opens the Inventory Mapping Editor Salting easy Inventory miao oige Metric ID CPU util x Attribute ID Packets Out Errors x lad Save Cancel This lets you configure the following Metric D Inventory metric name Attribute ID Attribute to associate with the inventory metric Conditions This panel lets you add multiple conditions to the monitor you are editing RESTO i Hajali yeaeiies logue General Monitor Options Calculated Metrics Thresholds Inventory Mappings Conditions Monitor Conditions Add Remove All Hame of Occurrences Trendable Alert Severity Description Action PacketOutBig 1 false false A Warning Packets Out Exceed 200 1214 la Save Cancel Click the Add button to enter a new set of conditions or click the Edit this entry button to the right of a listed Monitor Condition to open the editor Click the Delete button to remove a listed set of conditions Click the Copy ico
403. trics Monitor 264 Follow these steps to create a Key Metrics Monitor also see Key Metric Editor on page 289 1 In the Resource Monitors portlet and create a new monitor by right clicking and selecting New Select the type of monitor from the submenu for this example an Key Metrics monitor In the General screen enter a name Test Key Metrics Monitor and a polling interval 5 minutes is the default For this example check Retain polled data and accept the remaining defaults for checkboxes and the retention policy Select an entity to monitor by clicking the Add button in the top portion of the Monitor Options screen Select devices on which you want to monitor Key Metrics Select from the available metrics that appear at the bottom of the screen in Key Metric Properties by selecting a category with the pick list at the top of the screen then click on an Available metric and click the right arrow to make it a Selected metric Click Save to retain your new Monitor Resource Monitors Monitoring 8 Test Key Metrics Monitor appears in the Resource Monitors portlet xX How To Create a Monitor Report You can create reports based on your monitors The following example creates a report based on How to Create an SNMP Interface Monitor above 1 OO onan 10 11 12 13 Create a new Report Template by right clicking the Report Templates portlet selecting New gt Table Template Name the report he
404. turn to previous Open Alarms bd Advanced Filter Refresh Settings B 17 Date Opened v Count Entity Name Device IP Entity Type Event Name Message Q 81511 9 54 AM Mi JuniperM5 10 1 10 128 315 Managed Equipment redcellNetConfigBackupFailu Unable to identify or resol x 85 11 6 43 AM GA XP OD4Parti 10 20 1157 Unknown authenticationFailure e A 4 Minor redcellNetConfigBackupFailureNotification Ur 2 10 EIN G LE Managed Equipment J sunipers2300 10 128 3 16 10 128 3 16 ENTITY HAME JuniperJ2300 10 128 3 16 10 128 3 16 MESSAGE Unable to identify or resolve transfer mode DATE OPENED 85M1 9 54 AM UPDATE DATE TIME 8 15 11 9 54 AM ACKHOWLEDGED Q Not Acknowledged Aug 15 DATE CLEARED redcellNetConfigBackupFailureNotifica tion Totals MIB Details SnapPanels X Close This displays listed alarms and Snap Panel details of a selected alarm By default this screen adds the first of the following columns to those visible in the Event History s summary screen view To add the others listed here right click and select Add Columns to change the screen appearance The following are available additional columns besides those visible in the Alarms summary portlet Count A count of the instances of the alarm Multiples of the same alarm appear as a single row but increment this count Entity Type The type of monitored entity Message Any message that accompanies the
405. ty type Click the plus to the left of the entity label to expand the tree Container View Resource Management 149 150 Authorizations This tab configures user or group access to the container you are editing Click Add User or Add Group to select the users or groups with permission to access the container you are configuring By default containers are accessible to everyone F mang Container if Folsomtontamer Lab pg FolsomContainer General Membership W Lab Container Authorizations Add User Add Group User Group Hame Inherited From 2 Power User FolsomContainer Permissions for Synergy Admin owner Permission Allow access to container Allow to modify container Allow to run operations on container Allow to create child container Allow to delete container Add Child Delete Child Close Each entry in the Container Authorizations list specifies the name of the user or group and whether the entry is inherited or not A child container by default inherits the authorizations from parent hierarchy no explicit authorizations for child containers are necessary Edit any authorizations in the parent When editing a child container click a listed authorized user or group and its permissions appear in the panel at the bottom of this screen Clicking Save preserves any alterations you have made Confirm the container is configured as you like by
406. u make modifications Tip Schedule new actions from the portlet that ordinarily executes them for example Resource Discovery on page 152 If you have Dell OpenManage Network Manager s Change Management Proscan capabilities installed you can use Schedules to initiate the Change Determination process See Change Determination Process on page 326 It is disabled by default 96 Schedules Portal Conventions Expanded Schedules Portlet When you expand this portlet the additional columns that appear include Submission Date Start Date whether the schedule is still active Scheduled and the Execution Count E Schedules Return to previous Default Schedules Filter y 1 Advanced Filter Search Refresh Settings JB Y Enabled Descriptiony Type Submission Date Start Date Next Execution Recurrence End Date 5 Refresh P Refresh Pros 1245 0 2 06 PM 121510 2 07 PM 8M5M1 3 07 PM Recur Every Never Ending cal Refresh Refresh Monit 12 4 09 5 27 PM 12 7 09 6 00 AM 815111 1 00 PM Recur Every Never Ending a Network Network Link 124541010 11 AM 7150 3 00 AM 8116111 3 00 AM Recur Daily Never Ending a Network Network Data 1215 10 10 11 AM 711410 12 00 AM 81611 12 00 AM Recur Daily Never Ending al Monthly Database Agi 2 24 11 8 21 AM 2125111 3 00 AM 8 25 11 3 00 AM Recur Monthly Never Ending cal Every 12 Database Agi 2 2441 8 17 AM 2125411 12 00 AM 845411 1 00 PM Recur Every Ne
407. ue circle around a question mark next to them 9 This blue circle can also toggle the appearance disappearance of the tip Users are individuals who performs tasks using the portal Administ organized in a hierarchy of organizations and delegate its administra Users and Organizations f Users with less than Administrator permissions may not see all of the features described in this guide Search Indexes Sometimes Dell OpenManage Network Manager may display Control Panel objects like users roles and organizations inaccurately This occurs because search Indexes need to be re indexed every so often especially when changes to roles users and organizations are frequent To re index go to Control Panel gt Server Administration and then click on the Reindex all search indexes This takes little time My Account To configure information for your login look for the bar titled with your account login s name It has the following lines beneath it My Account This configures your information as a user including your e mail address password and so on My Pages This manages public and private pages visible to you as a user Use the tree of pages that appears on the left of this screen to drag and drop pages in the order you want Notice that you can also configure the look and feel the logo that appears and other settings with the editor screens on the right Contacts Center This configures contacts in other words peo
408. unk ports ETHERNET SERVICE An Ethernet service represents a virtual layer broadcast domain that transports or transmits Ethernet traffic entering from any one endpoint to all other end points Often this is a VLAN service across multiple devices An Ethernet service may or may not use Ethernet trunk depending on the desired connec tion between two neighboring devices If the connection is exclusively used for this Ether net service no Ethernet trunk is needed On the other hand if the connection is configured as an aggregation which can be shared by multiple Ethernet services an Ethernet trunk models such a configuration Each Ethernet service can have multiple Ethernet Access Ports through which Ethernet traffic flows get access to the service ETHERNET ACCESS SERVICE Since an Ethernet trunk can be shared by multiple Ethernet Services each Ethernet Service relates to a shared trunk via a unique Ethernet Access com ponent Because Ethernet trunk is a point to point connection there are two Ethernet Access Ser vices per trunk per Ethernet service instance ETHERNET ACCESS POINT These represent the access points through which Ethernet frames flow in and out of an Ethernet service For an Ethernet Service that uses an Ethernet Trunk Service an Ethernet Access Port must be associated with either one of the two Ethernet Access Services Event Notification received from the NMS Network Management System Notifica
409. up You must configure the installation directory so this user and group have all permissions 770 at least You may install without any universal world permissions However you must create a home directory for the installing user K NOTE All files created during installation respect a umask of 007 All files from setup jar are 770 Files from ocpinstall x are set for 660 Bin scripts from ocpinstall x are 770 Best practice is to install as the user designated as DBA and admin of the system not root user If necessary create the appropriate user and login as this user for running the install program The installing user must have create privileges for the target directory By default this directory is dell openmanage networkmanager Z CAUTION Linux sometimes installs a MySQL database with the operating system Before you install this application remove any MySQL if it exists on your Linux machine K NOTE To set the environment correctly for command line functions after installation type oware or etc dsienv in UNIX dot space etc dot dsienv before running the specified command Also This application can run on any Linux desktop environment CDE KDE Gnome and so on but the installer will only install shortcuts for CDE 30 Installation and Startup Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager File Handles Best practice is to modify file handles for Linux If you do not do this ex
410. uration Backups on page 277 File Management File Server File Management Configuration File Editor This editor lets you manually edit configuration files and save them to the Dell OpenManage Network Manager database MEA NO DC O AR iO ALO console Find Ala RegEx Replace 7 All E H9H 3 l 1 Last changed 1999 05 05 11 34 07 PDT 0 4R4 5 2 version 1 3 system host name JuniperM5 10128315 time zone America Los_Angeles authentication order password location country code US postal code 95630 port type ansi auxiliary type ansi root authentication encrypted password l vynJ7Ugt gkJ3W1FKuT FRSSDDAZCUL login class qa idle timeout 10 permissions admin control all class super user local permissions admin user admin uid 2000 class super user authentication encrypted password 1 3RlhxQ4s L9SfxXSrxDBWiZINSHaXLO user qa uid 2002 class qa authentication encrypted password dorado services ftp connection limit 10 ssh protocol version vl vZ telnet rate limit 20 xnm clear text xnm ssl lanal cerrificara YIM Scr PEDT i Save x Close When you select a file in the Configuration Files portlet and right click to select Edit this screen appears with the following features Find Replace Click the magnifying glass icon to open a text search feature Notice that you can check A a to make your sea
411. urces this discovers their connections See Link Discovery on page 176 Backup Config Files This lets you back up discovered devices configuration files Before you can use this feature you must have servers configured as described in Netrestore File Servers on page 69 and or File Servers on page 221 See also File Management on page 223 OS Image Upload Upload firmware updates for devices See Firmware Image Editor on page 235 for more about these capabilities Deploy OS Image This deploys firmware updates To deploy images you must have File Servers configured as described above for Backup See Deploy Firmware on page 238 License Management This lets you see and manage the licensed capabilities of Dell OpenManage Network Manager See License Viewer below for details Z CAUTION Do not remove this portlet You cannot re enable it once it is removed Admin user and Power User can see all the above menu items The User role sees only sees four Link discovery and OS image upload do not appear by default To see them you must give User write permission Quick Navigation Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 61 License Viewer This screen appears when you click License Management in the Quick Navigation portlet rasa WIE WET Register License Select File Product Licenses Device Licenses Producta Configx Active Config Aruba restricted actions Cisco MDS restrict
412. ut or click Home to go to the top level Right clicking a device can also let you select available Adaptive CLI Actions to execute on the selected device or component If you right click the blank area of the screen you can Export it as either an image or GML graphic markup language or print the displayed topology K NOTE Because Topology uses Adobe Flash menu items appear for that software when you right click nodes This includes Settings Global Settings and About Flash menu items The text below does not discuss these Actions Available Node Actions mirror the kinds of menu items available in Managed Resources on page 166 Node Actions Node Actions Action Search Action Tree EGTE ES cisco Actions Type in a keyword to find a matching Action amp Service Discovery back i Adaptive CLI B Direct Access 212 MIB Browser A Terminal e File Management O db Performance SgRC Inventory jg Resource Groups Execute Cancel Execute Cancel Visualize My Network Visualize 209 The Action Tree panel displays the available actions The Action Search panel lets you enter a desired action and search for it Select an action and click Execute to implement it Click Cancel to dismiss this screen without running any action Control and Styles e ZOOM e DISPLAYED LEVELS STYLE OPTIONS VIEW DETAILS ZOOM Click the or icons to zoom in or out The 1 icon retur
413. ut Errors y Calculation Type Consecutive hal Emit Notification Consecutive Value Count Apply To Series Configured Threshold Intervals Name Lower Severity Matching String Upper 30 E informational Mid 20 A Informational 10 informational Configure threshold intervals you Add at in the editor screen according to the following parameters Attribute Name Appears when you click Add rather than Editing a selected threshold Use the pick list that appears in this screen to select the attribute for which you are specifying threshold information When you Edit the name of the attribute appears as a title within the editor screen Calculation Type Select from the pick list Specifies whether the range calculation is to be done based on Average or Consecutive values Consecutive Value Count Select how many consecutive values to consider at once for a range calculation Typically the larger the number here the less flutter in reporting threshold crossings Emit Notification Check to emit an event if the device crosses the configured threshold s The notification event contains the threshold crossing value as well as which threshold was crossed and is an alarm at the severity selected when you configure the threshold Tip You can make a set of thresholds for each monitored attribute so a single monitor can throw different alarms for different attributes To see available events and their desc
414. utes them in top to bottom order Inspection 8 Inspect Network using your current settings This screen lets you preview the discovery profile s actions and access to devices If you clicked Next rather than Inspect at the bottom of the previous screen click Start Inspection to begin the inspection process for selected authentications that validates the device s credentials Notice that the Inspection Status fields below listed authentications indicates the success or failure of Ping Hostname resolution and the listed Authentications If the device does not match all required authentications you can click the Fix it icon a wrench with a red or yellow dot to edit them for the selected device You can also click Test Device Create New or Choose Existing authentications while in the editor clicking the Fix it icon displays the authentication selection panel The yellow dot on the Fix it icon means an optional authentication is missing A red dot means a required one is missing When authentications are unsuccessful you can remove or edit them in this editor too Click the icons to the right of listed authentications to do this Discovery Profiles Getting Started with Dell OpenManage Network Manager 65 66 When they test successfully the authentications appear in a nested tree under the Discover checkbox checked when they test successfully 9 Save Click Save to preserve the profile You can then right click it to select E
415. uthentication Dial In User Service is a client server proto col and software that enables remote access servers to communicate with a central server to authenticate dial in users and authorize their access to the requested system or service RADIUS allows a company to maintain user profiles in a central database that all remote servers can share RIP Routing Information Protocol SELF SIGNED CERTIFICATE A self signed certificate uses its own certificate request as a signature rather than the signa ture of a CA A self signed certificate will not provide the same functionality as a CA signed certificate A self signed certificate will not be automatically recognized by users browsers Glossary FILE LOCATION P Archive OMNM_5 Glossary fm and a self signed certificate does not provide any guarantee concerning the identity of the organization that is providing the website SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Network management protocol used almost exclusively in TCP IP networks SNMP provides the means to monitor and control network devices and to manage configurations statistics collection performance and secu rity SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL STP The inactivation of links between networks so that infor mation packets are channeled along one route and will not search endlessly for a destina tion SSH SECURE SHELL A protocol which permits secure remote access o
416. ver Ending SSSS8SS88856 al disL3 aug Tasks 12 31 69 4 00 PM 85 1 9 45 AM Recur Once End after 1 oc 2 gt Reference Tree E Weekly Snap Panels X Close If a green icon appears in the Scheduled column it means the schedule will be executed on next start date If the schedule has exceeded execution count or passed stop date if specified then a red icon appears there Schedules Portal Conventions 97 98 Schedules Portal Conventions Key Portlets Overview of Key Portlets This section describes some of the key Dell OpenManage Network Manager portlets You may not have access to all of these in your installation or you may not be able to use them with the user permissions you have been assigned by the portal administrator To see all available Dell OpenManage Network Manager portlets click Add gt Applications and use the field at the top of the menu to search for the portlet functionality you want to add This limits the display to Dell OpenManage Network Manager portlets The previous chapter discussed the Schedules Portlet on page 95 Tip Filter what appears on a page with the Container View portlet Select a container and the rest of the portlets on that page filter their data reporting to reflect that container s contents The only caveat for this advice is that Container View is non instanceable In other words you can only add one of them Overview of Key Portlets Key Portlets
417. ver a network from one computer to another SSH negotiates and establishes an encrypted connection between an SSH client and an SSH server SSL SECURE SOCKETS LAYER A program layer created by Netscape for managing the security of message transmissions in a network Netscape s idea is that the programming for keeping your messages confidential ought to be contained in a program layer between an application such as your Web browser or HTTP and the Internet s TCP IP layers The sockets part of the term refers to the sockets method of passing data back and forth between a client and a server program in a network or between program layers in the same computer TRAP SNMP Trap A notification from a network element or device of its status such as a server startup This notification is sent by an SNMP agent to a Network Management Sys tem NMS where it is translated into an event by the Mediation Agent TRAP FORWARDING The process of re emitting trap events to remote hosts Trap Forward ing is available from the application through Actions and through the Resource Manager VLAN A virtual local area network LAN commonly known as a VLAN is a group of hosts with a common set of requirements that communicate as if they were attached to the Broadcast domain regardless of their physical location A VLAN has the same attributes as a physical LAN but it allows for end stations to be grouped together even if they are not located
418. very Profiles Resource Management 1 General Parameters Set the Name Description and a checkbox to indicate whether this profile is the discovery default edito Derna prole Olaa cyo Network Actions Inspection Results 1 Set Discovery Profile General Parameters Name Use as Discovery Default Netscreen A unique name T Use as Baseline Default Description optional 2 Set Discovery Profile Options Discovery Options Filtering Options Not Applicable to Inspection Device Naming Format Filter by Location Sysname and IP Address y a es Manage by Filter by Vendor P Address xl El j Resolve Hostname s j Eg PT Attempt to resolve Hostname to IP Address Filter by Device Type E X ICMP Ping Device s i IV Ping devices before authentication Manage ICMP only Device s T Manage devices that only respond to Ping Manage Unclassified Device s TT Manage device s with no registered software installed gt Next ta Save amp Inspect i Execute x Close 2 Profile Options Select the Device Naming Format how the device appears in lists once discovered whether to Manage by IP address or hostname and check whether to Resolve Hostname s ICMP Ping Device s Manage ICMP only Device s or Manage Unclassified Device s This last checkbox determines whether OpenManage Network Manager attempts to manage devices that have no OpenManage Network Manager device driver installed If your system s li
419. w long data is held per roll up period When you manage these policies you configure how monitored data is retained When you select Manage Retention Policies in the Monitors portlet first a list of available policies appears Clicking the Add button at the top of the screen lets you create a new policy while clicking the Edit button to the right of selected listed policies lets you modify existing policies The Delete button to the right of listed policies removes them from the list Resource Monitors Monitoring 249 Editor Monitors may share a retention policy The retention policy controls how long data is held per roll up period The editor for Retention policies lets you assign characteristics and monitors to them General Retention Policy Options Policy Name Test Policy Description This is a test policy Detail Data Days 1 Hourly Data Days 7 Daily Data Days 30 Active Monitor Members Available Monitors Selected Monitors Default Cisco Monitor aj b Default Juniper Monitor EJ Default ICMP Monitor 4 Default Interface Monitor Default WMI Monitor bb WwW Ei E al Save o Cancel The editor contains the following fields General Retention Policy Options Policy Name A text identifier for the policy Description An optional description for the policy Detail Hourly Daily Data Days How many days to retain the selected data The amount retained has both a perfo
420. w you to re order selected items they run from top first to bottom last See Attribute Appearance and Validation for a description of what constitutes a valid attribute Name Fnter an identifier for the script you are creating or altering Target Filter Click the plus to create a filter that describes the target for this script For example this filter could confine the action of the configured script to devices from a certain vendor or only devices with an operating system version later than a certain number Since you can have several scripts those Adaptive CLIs with a single label Show Users for example could therefore contain several scripts with syntax appropriate to a variety of devices and operating systems Z CAUTION Adaptive CLI supports only filters that select the Managed Equipment type of device Attribute Delimiter The delimiter s you select from the pick list here surround the attributes you designate as mandatory See Adaptive CLI Script Language Syntax on page 358 for more about these Actions Portlet Actions and Adaptive CLI Optional Attribute Delimiter The delimiter s you select from the pick list here surround the attributes you designate as optional See Adaptive CLI Script Language Syntax on page 358 for more about these All but Delete open a script editor with the following panels Script Content e Error Conditions e Continue Pattern e Attributes Extraction Script Cont
421. xample 305 ProScan Portlet vocoder 306 Compliance PolicySummary 308 Creating or Modifying a ProScan Policy 310 How to Create Source Group Criteria 316 Creating or Modifying ProScan Policy Groups 325 Change Determination Process c0ceceeeeeeeeeeeeee 326 Change Determination Process Workflow 327 How to Run Change Determination 0000 329 Change Determination Defaults 2 2 2 2 222 329 Compliance and Change Reporting 0 0ceeeeeeeeee 329 How to Report on Change Determination 331 11 Actions and Adaptive CLI 0 e eee eee 333 Introducing Actions and Adaptive CLI 0 0ee eee 333 Using AdaptiveCLl 2 0 0 en 334 Actions Portleta tac ls ae akan as 335 Adaptive CLlEditor 340 Generala A ene Saale 341 Attributes 2 ee 342 SCriptsS 2 4 6 Be A A te Ed 347 Comparison 2 do we eae ow BAe ere ete BS 352 External Commands 0 0ce cece cece rr 352 Seeded Scripts 2 2 0 0 o o 354 How to Create a Monitor for an External Script 356 Adaptive CLI Script Language Syntax 0 ece cece eee 358 Attributes ets cet oe a dee ik aa 358 Conditional Blocks o 359 Per SCS os ti A 360 How to Create Adaptive CLI Example oooooooooooo o
422. xecute and begin discovery If you select Execute from the profile editor Dell OpenManage Network Manager does not save the profile to execute later Results 10 Execute Clicking Execute begins discovery confirm you do not mind waiting and the 11 12 message traffic between Dell OpenManage Network Manager and the device appears on the Results screen This is a standard Audit screen See Audit Trail Jobs Screen on page 91 for more about it A message Discovery Profile Execute is complete appears in the Messages at the bottom left of the status bar Tip You can also schedule discovery profiles to run periodically updating your Dell OpenManage Network Manager database with any network changes For more see Schedules on page 95 The devices in your network now appear in the Managed Resources portlet and elsewhere in Topology for example See Discovery Profiles on page 153 for more about these capabilities Managed Resources This portlet displays all the devices you have discovered LF Managed Resources 10 20 1 171 is up See Managed Resources on page e Modet R PowerConnect a Settings 47 Refresh Search 166 for the details of this screen s Vendor 9 Dell inc capabilities Network Status Name IP Aq Discovery Date 3 22 10 40 AM S lso M dR C Responding ud PCT8024_221 oa CPU J 8 00 ee also Managed Resource Groups Ping Reto nel TE 1 62 Responding we PCT5548_173 10 2 a on page
423. xpanded Alarm Portlet 102 Event HIStory e oca a e a 106 Event Processing Rules 0 c cece ee cece ee eee eee 108 How to Create Event Processing Rules 109 MATA 111 Event Definitions 00 0 ccc cece eee tenets 128 Event Definition Editor 128 Contacts caviar ia E 133 A A aenetauhetehwa deid wien eee anh en 135 WAG caretaker RR dan toads a we tna cy high ein 138 VENA tt tend beatin che ls tae ors 139 5 Resource Management 00 ceeeeeeeeeees 143 Introduction enseina anaa a e 143 Authentication ditya iapun nenta donc EN ne bee ped eee Sane ES 143 Container Manager 0 0 eee e cece cece e entree eens 146 Container Manager Expanded 146 Container Vit Wicca da 147 Howto Use Containers 0c ccc cece cece eee o co 147 Container Editor o o o 148 Map CONteXt voca de ene E 151 Resource Discovery 0 cece cece cece cent e een eeeeeee 152 How to Discover Resources 0 0ccee eee cece e ee 152 Discovery Profiles 0 2 c cece cece cnet e ron 153 Discovery Profile Editor 154 How to Edit Discovery Profiles oooococooo o 154 Managed Resource Groups 0 eccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeee 162 Static Group t ova Sah da de are Gels e es 164 DynamicGroup 00 4 165 Managed Resources 0cec cece rr 166 New L
424. y its coordinates See Map Context on page 151 for more information about the uses of tagging 90 Common Menu Items Portal Conventions Audit Trail Jobs Screen When you execute an action for example discovering network resources an audit trail screen appears with a tree displaying the message traffic between Dell OpenManage Network Manager and the device s the action addresses fo spray Hinila C Uorarlu dangus CUAD Jug rc Network Discovery 2 amp Discovering network 192 168 0 0 24 amp Discovering Class C Network 192 168 0 0 256 devices Pinging Devices O Executing Ping against 256 device s This might take a while Y Responsive devices o 106 Devices responded to Ping Please click here for Details E Y Hon responsive Addresses o 150 Address es did not respond to Ping Please click here for Details e Resolving Device Hostnames O Executing Hostname Resolution against 106 device s This might take a while Y Resolved Device Hostnames 0 106 Resolved Hostname Please click here for Details Unresolved Device Hostnames 6 0 Did not Resolve Hostname Please click here for Details a a KO VA MO Ssn2ig12am sn2n19124m dh admin g Moa Time 0 0165 A Longest Action 0 0s 150 Address es did not respond to Ping Please cl E Shortest Action 0 0s 150 Address es did not respond to Ping Please cl To see the details of any
425. ys a Parameters screen where you can describe the scheduled suppression and select a duration and any additional suppression targets The Schedule tab on this screen lets you start suppression at a specific time and configure any recurrence and termination Stopping on for the scheduled suppression The termination can either be a date a number of occurrences or Never Deleting stopping or disabling a schedule does not interrupt suppression once it has started You must right click selected devices and select Stop All Alarm Suppression You can also delete suppressions after you select Event Management gt View Active Suppression s Mass Seijye Sueerssslonts Current Resources being Suppressed Resource Description NetgearXSM7224S1 10128441 10 128 4 41 test Ei NetgearGSM7352Sv2 10128430 10 128 4 3C test2 x Close The viewer lists devices for which alarm suppression is active their description and configuring user Click the Stop Suppression icon to the right of listed devices to terminate their alarm suppression Suppressed events alarms do not appear in the Alarm display but unlike rejected events the Event History screen can display a record of them File Management View a current configuration file compare it to previous backups backup restore import or export a configuration file You can also deploy firmware to devices from this menu If you go to the Configuration Files portlet you can also

Dell OpenManage Network Manager Version 5.0 Web Client Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents